Академический Документы
Профессиональный Документы
Культура Документы
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces,
pipe and duct chases, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings,
unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.
B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied
spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.
D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by
building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and chases.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
1. Transition fittings.
2. Dielectric fittings.
3. Mechanical sleeve seals.
4. Escutcheons.
B. Welding certificates.
A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1, "Structural
Welding Code--Steel."
B. Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping."
2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes
involved and that certification is current.
A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping,
storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and
moisture.
B. Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of
construction, to allow for HVAC installations.
C. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for HVAC items requiring access that are
concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in Division 8 Section
"Access Doors and Frames."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following
requirements apply for product selection:
A. Refer to individual Division 15 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining
methods.
B. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings.
A. Refer to individual Division 15 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below.
B. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system
contents.
a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges.
b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges.
2. AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick, unless otherwise indicated; and
full-face or ring type, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping
system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to
ASTM B 813.
F. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty
brazing, unless otherwise indicated; and AWS A5.8, BAg1, silver alloy for refrigerant piping,
unless otherwise indicated.
G. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall
thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.
A. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Fittings: [CPVC] [PVC] [CPVC and PVC] one-piece fitting with
manufacturer's Schedule 80 equivalent dimensions; one end with threaded brass insert, and one
solvent-cement-joint end.
1. Available Manufacturers:
a. Eslon Thermoplastics.
1. Available Manufacturers:
C. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Unions: MSS SP-107, [CPVC] [PVC] [CPVC and PVC] four-part
union. Include brass end, solvent-cement-joint end, rubber O-ring, and union nut.
a. NIBCO INC.
A. Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solder-
joint, plain, or weld-neck end connections that match piping system materials.
1. Available Manufacturers:
1. Available Manufacturers:
E. Dielectric-Flange Kits: Companion-flange assembly for field assembly. Include flanges, full-
face- or ring-type neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or polyethylene bolt sleeves, phenolic
washers, and steel backing washers.
1. Available Manufacturers:
2. Separate companion flanges and steel bolts and nuts shall have 150- or 300-psig (1035-
or 2070-kPa) minimum working pressure where required to suit system pressures.
1. Available Manufacturers:
a. Calpico, Inc.
b. Lochinvar Corp.
G. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining;
plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 300-psig (2070-kPa) minimum working pressure at 225
deg F (107 deg C).
1. Available Manufacturers:
a. Perfection Corp.
b. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc.
c. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Co., Inc.
d. Victaulic Co. of America.
A. Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space
between pipe and sleeve.
1. Available Manufacturers:
2. Sealing Elements: [EPDM] [NBR] <Insert other> interlocking links shaped to fit
surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.
3. Pressure Plates: [Plastic] [Carbon steel] [Stainless steel]. Include two for each sealing
element.
4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: [Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating] [Stainless
steel] of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for
each sealing element.
2.7 SLEEVES
A. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: 0.0239-inch (0.6-mm) minimum thickness; round tube closed with
welded longitudinal joint.
B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.
D. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include
clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing.
E. Molded PVC: Permanent, with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.
G. Molded PE: Reusable, PE, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth-outer surface with nailing flange
for attaching to wooden forms.
2.8 ESCUTCHEONS
A. Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely
fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers
opening.
E. One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Type: With [set screw] [spring clips] [set screw or spring clips]
and chrome-plated finish.
F. Split-Plate, Stamped-Steel Type: With [concealed] [exposed-rivet] hinge, [set screw] [spring
clips] [set screw or spring clips], and chrome-plated finish.
H. Split-Casting, Floor-Plate Type: Cast brass with concealed hinge and set screw.
2.9 GROUT
A. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-cement grout.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Refer to Division 1 Sections "Cutting and Patching" and "Selective Demolition" for general
demolition requirements and procedures.
B. Disconnect, demolish, and remove HVAC systems, equipment, and components indicated to be
removed.
A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 15 Sections specifying
piping systems.
B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping
systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction
loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless
deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.
C. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms
and service areas.
D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right
angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated
otherwise.
E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.
K. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating
pressure.
L. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors according to the following:
1. New Piping:
a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-pattern type.
b. Chrome-Plated Piping: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated
finish.
c. Insulated Piping: One-piece, stamped-steel type with spring clips.
d. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-
brass type with polished chrome-plated finish.
e. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece,
stamped-steel type.
f. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: [One-piece] [Split-
casting] [One-piece or split-casting], cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated
finish.
g. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: [One-piece, stamped-
steel type] [Split-plate, stamped-steel type with concealed hinge] [One-piece,
stamped-steel type or split-plate, stamped-steel type with concealed hinge] and
set screw.
h. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type with
[polished chrome-plated] [rough-brass] finish.
i. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel type with
[concealed] [exposed-rivet] [concealed or exposed-rivet] hinge and [set screw]
[spring clips] [set screw or spring clips].
j. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, cast-brass type.
k. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, stamped-steel type with [set screw]
[spring clips] [set screw or spring clips].
l. Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, floor-plate
type.
N. Permanent sleeves are not required for holes formed by removable PE sleeves.
O. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls and concrete floor and roof
slabs.
P. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board partitions,
and concrete floor and roof slabs.
2. Install sleeves in new walls and slabs as new walls and slabs are constructed.
3. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear space
between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. Use the following sleeve materials:
a. [PVC] [Steel] Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than NPS 6 (DN 150).
b. Steel Sheet Sleeves: For pipes NPS 6 (DN 150) and larger, penetrating gypsum-
board partitions.
c. Stack Sleeve Fittings: For pipes penetrating floors with membrane waterproofing.
Secure flashing between clamping flanges. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to
extend sleeve to 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor level. Refer to Division 7
Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for flashing.
4. Except for underground wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or
pipe insulation, using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint.
Refer to Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials and installation.
Q. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical
sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between pipe
and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches (150 mm) in diameter.
2. Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves 6 inches (150 mm) and larger in diameter.
3. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements
required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble
mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten
bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight
seal.
R. Underground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Seal
pipe penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch (25-mm)
annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
1. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements
required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble
mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten
bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight
seal.
S. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors
at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Refer to Division 7 Section
"Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for materials.
A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 15 Sections
specifying piping systems.
B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before
assembly.
D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube
end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using
lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.
E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube"
Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.
F. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut
threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore
full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal
threading is specified.
2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or
damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.
G. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes and
welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.
H. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service
application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.
I. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings
according to the following:
1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent
cements.
2. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 2846M Appendix.
3. PVC Pressure Piping: Join schedule number ASTM D 1785, PVC pipe and PVC socket
fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other-than-schedule-number PVC pipe and
socket fittings according to ASTM D 2855.
4. PVC Nonpressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855.
L. PE Piping Heat-Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean cloth or
paper towels. Join according to ASTM D 2657.
M. Fiberglass Bonded Joints: Prepare pipe ends and fittings, apply adhesive, and join according to
pipe manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final
connection to each piece of equipment.
2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at
final connection to each piece of equipment.
3. Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materials of
dissimilar metals.
4. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping
materials of dissimilar metals.
A. Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are
not indicated.
B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and
components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope.
3.6 PAINTING
B. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with materials and
procedures to match original factory finish.
1. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches (100 mm)
larger in both directions than supported unit.
2. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated,
install dowel rods on 18-inch (450-mm) centers around the full perimeter of the base.
3. Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through concrete
base, and anchor into structural concrete floor.
4. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting
drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be
embedded.
5. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.
6. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions.
7. Use [3000-psi (20.7-MPa)] <Insert other>, 28-day compressive-strength concrete and
reinforcement as specified in Division 3 Section "[Cast-in-Place Concrete] [Cast-in-
Place Concrete (Limited Applications)]."
B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation
to support and anchor HVAC materials and equipment.
A. Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorages to support, and anchor
HVAC materials and equipment.
B. Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members if opposite side will be exposed to view or
will receive finish materials. Tighten connections between members. Install fasteners without
splitting wood members.
3.10 GROUTING
A. Mix and install grout for HVAC equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment
base plates, and anchors.
F. Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1.3 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices to be compatible with the
following:
1. Motor controllers.
2. Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load.
3. Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence.
4. Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Comply with requirements in this Section except when stricter requirements are specified in fire
suppression equipment schedules or Sections.
A. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 40 deg C and at altitude of 3300 feet
(1000 m) above sea level.
1. For motors with 2:1 speed ratio, consequent pole, single winding.
2. For motors with other than 2:1 speed ratio, separate winding for each speed.
G. Bearings: Regreasable, shielded, antifriction ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.
I. Insulation: Class F.
K. Enclosure Material: Cast iron for motor frame sizes 324T and larger; rolled steel for motor
frame sizes smaller than 324T.
A. Motors Used with Reduced-Voltage and Multispeed Controllers: Match wiring connection
requirements for controller with required motor leads. Provide terminals in motor terminal box,
suited to control method.
B. Motors Used with Variable Frequency Controllers: Ratings, characteristics, and features
coordinated with and approved by controller manufacturer.
1. Windings: Copper magnet wire with moisture-resistant insulation varnish, designed and
tested to resist transient spikes, high frequencies, and short time rise pulses produced by
pulse-width modulated inverters.
2. Energy- and Premium-Efficient Motors: Class B temperature rise; Class F insulation.
3. Inverter-Duty Motors: Class F temperature rise; Class H insulation.
C. Severe-Duty Motors: Comply with IEEE 841, with 1.15 minimum service factor.
A. Motors larger than 1/20 hp shall be one of the following, to suit starting torque and
requirements of specific motor application:
1. Permanent-split capacitor.
2. Split phase.
3. Capacitor start, inductor run.
4. Capacitor start, capacitor run.
C. Bearings: Prelubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable for radial and
thrust loading.
E. Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor
when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor
insulation. Thermal-protection device shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns
to normal range.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1.3 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices to be compatible with the
following:
1. Motor controllers.
2. Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load.
3. Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence.
4. Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Comply with requirements in this Section except when stricter requirements are specified in
HVAC equipment schedules or Sections.
A. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 40 deg C and at altitude of 3300 feet
(1000 m) above sea level.
1. For motors with 2:1 speed ratio, consequent pole, single winding.
2. For motors with other than 2:1 speed ratio, separate winding for each speed.
G. Bearings: Regreasable, shielded, antifriction ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.
1. Motors [15] <Insert number> HP and Larger: NEMA starting Code F or Code G.
2. Motors Smaller than [15] <Insert number> HP: Manufacturer's standard starting
characteristic.
K. Enclosure Material: Cast iron for motor frame sizes [324T] <Insert number> and larger;
rolled steel for motor frame sizes smaller than [324T] <Insert number>.
A. Motors Used with Reduced-Voltage and Multispeed Controllers: Match wiring connection
requirements for controller with required motor leads. Provide terminals in motor terminal box,
suited to control method.
B. Motors Used with Variable Frequency Controllers: [Ratings, characteristics, and features
coordinated with and approved by controller manufacturer.]
1. Windings: Copper magnet wire with moisture-resistant insulation varnish, designed and
tested to resist transient spikes, high frequencies, and short time rise pulses produced by
pulse-width modulated inverters.
2. Energy- and Premium-Efficient Motors: Class B temperature rise; Class F insulation.
C. Severe-Duty Motors: Comply with IEEE 841, with 1.15 minimum service factor.
A. Motors larger than 1/20 hp shall be one of the following, to suit starting torque and
requirements of specific motor application:
1. Permanent-split capacitor.
2. Split phase.
3. Capacitor start, inductor run.
4. Capacitor start, capacitor run.
C. Bearings: Prelubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable for radial and
thrust loading.
E. Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor
when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor
insulation. Thermal-protection device shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns
to normal range.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following hangers and supports for plumbing system piping and
equipment:
1. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural-steel shapes and plates for trapeze
hangers for pipe and equipment supports.
2. Division 13 Section "Fire-Suppression Piping" for pipe hangers for fire-suppression
piping.
3. Division 15 Section "Expansion Fittings and Loops for Plumbing Piping" for pipe guides
and anchors.
4. Division 15 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and
Equipment" for vibration isolation devices.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society for The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.
B. Terminology: As defined in MSS SP-90, "Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers and
Supports."
A. Design supports for multiple pipes, including pipe stands, capable of supporting combined
weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.
C. Design seismic-restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment and obtain approval
from authorities having jurisdiction.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Show fabrication and
installation details and include calculations for the following:
C. Welding certificates.
A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding
Code--Steel."
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
A. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components. Refer to Part 3
"Hanger and Support Applications" Article for where to use specific hanger and support types.
B. Manufacturers:
E. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion for support of
bearing surface of piping.
A. Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made from
structural-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-bolts.
B. Manufacturers:
C. Coatings: Manufacturer's standard finish unless bare metal surfaces are indicated.
B. Manufacturers:
C. Insulation-Insert Material for Cold Piping: Water-repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I
calcium silicate or ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with vapor barrier.
D. Insulation-Insert Material for Hot Piping: Water-repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I
calcium silicate or ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass.
E. For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe.
F. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.
G. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches (50 mm) beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below
ambient air temperature.
A. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete
with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building
materials where used.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Hilti, Inc.
b. ITW Ramset/Red Head.
c. Masterset Fastening Systems, Inc.
d. MKT Fastening, LLC.
e. Powers Fasteners.
1. Manufacturers:
B. Compact Pipe Stand: One-piece plastic unit with integral-rod-roller, pipe clamps, or V-shaped
cradle to support pipe, for roof installation without membrane penetration.
1. Manufacturers:
C. Low-Type, Single-Pipe Stand: One-piece stainless-steel base unit with plastic roller, for roof
installation without membrane penetration.
1. Manufacturers:
a. MIRO Industries.
D. High-Type, Single-Pipe Stand: Assembly of base, vertical and horizontal members, and pipe
support, for roof installation without membrane penetration.
E. High-Type, Multiple-Pipe Stand: Assembly of bases, vertical and horizontal members, and pipe
supports, for roof installation without membrane penetration.
1. Manufacturers:
F. Curb-Mounting-Type Pipe Stands: Shop- or field-fabricated pipe support made from structural-
steel shape, continuous-thread rods, and rollers for mounting on permanent stationary roof curb.
A. Description: IAPMO PS 42, system of metal brackets, clips, and straps for positioning piping in
pipe spaces for plumbing fixtures for commercial applications.
B. Manufacturers:
A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Specific hanger and support requirements are specified in Sections specifying piping systems
and equipment.
B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in
piping system Sections.
C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized, metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will
not have field-applied finish.
D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in
direct contact with copper tubing.
F. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in
piping system Sections, install the following types:
1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or
insulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30 (DN 15 to DN 750).
2. Yoke-Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For suspension of 120 to 450 deg F (49 to 232
deg C) pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 16 (DN 100 to DN 400), requiring up to 4 inches (100 mm)
of insulation.
3. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of
pipes, NPS 3/4 to NPS 24 (DN 20 to DN 600), requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4
inches (100 mm) of insulation.
4. Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4): For suspension of cold and hot pipes, NPS 1/2 to
NPS 24 (DN 15 to DN 600), if little or no insulation is required.
5. Pipe Hangers (MSS Type 5): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 15 to
DN 100), to allow off-center closure for hanger installation before pipe erection.
6. Adjustable, Swivel Split- or Solid-Ring Hangers (MSS Type 6): For suspension of
noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/4 to NPS 8 (DN 20 to DN 200).
7. Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated
stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 8 (DN 15 to DN 200).
8. Adjustable Band Hangers (MSS Type 9): For suspension of noninsulated stationary
pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 8 (DN 15 to DN 200).
9. Adjustable, Swivel-Ring Band Hangers (MSS Type 10): For suspension of noninsulated
stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 2 (DN 15 to DN 50).
G. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Sections, install the following types:
1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to
NPS 20 (DN 20 to DN 500).
2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers,
NPS 3/4 to NPS 20 (DN 20 to DN 500), if longer ends are required for riser clamps.
H. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Sections, install the following types:
1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches (150 mm) for heavy
loads.
2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F (49 to 232 deg C) piping
installations.
3. Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe rings.
4. Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various types of
building attachments.
I. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Sections, install the following types:
1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend
pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.
2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist
construction to attach to top flange of structural shape.
3. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams,
channels, or angles.
4. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams.
5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads
are considerable and rod sizes are large.
6. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes.
7. Top-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25): For top of beams if hanger rod is required tangent to
flange edge.
8. Side-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I-beams.
9. Steel-Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom of steel I-
beams for heavy loads.
10. Linked-Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom of steel I-
beams for heavy loads, with link extensions.
11. Malleable Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to
structural steel.
12. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below, or for suspending from above
by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:
13. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams.
14. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required.
15. Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject to linear
horizontal movement where headroom is limited.
J. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Sections, install the following types:
1. Steel Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with
insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer
to prevent crushing insulation.
3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.
K. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping
system Sections, install the following types:
1. Restraint-Control Devices (MSS Type 47): Where indicated to control piping movement.
L. Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe hanger selections and applications that are not
specified in piping system Sections.
M. Comply with MFMA-102 for metal framing system selections and applications that are not
specified in piping system Sections.
O. Use pipe positioning systems in pipe spaces behind plumbing fixtures to support supply and
waste piping for plumbing fixtures.
A. Steel Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers,
supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from building
structure.
B. Trapeze Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Arrange for
grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping and support together on field-fabricated trapeze
pipe hangers.
1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or
install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified above for individual
pipe hangers.
C. Fiberglass Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with applicable portions of MSS SP-69 and
MSS SP-89. Install hangers and attachments as required to properly support piping from
building structure.
D. Metal Framing System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping and support
together on field-assembled metal framing systems.
E. Fiberglass Strut System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping and
support together on field-assembled fiberglass struts.
F. Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping.
1. Install powder-actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concrete slabs less
than 4 inches (100 mm) thick in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured.
Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners
according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual.
2. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely
cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Pipe Stand Types except Curb-Mounting Type: Assemble components and mount on
smooth roof surface. Do not penetrate roof membrane.
2. Curb-Mounting-Type Pipe Stands: Assemble components or fabricate pipe stand and
mount on permanent, stationary roof curb. Refer to Division 7 Section "Roof
Accessories" for curbs.
I. Pipe Positioning System Installation: Install support devices to make rigid supply and waste
piping connections to each plumbing fixture. Refer to Division 15 Section "Plumbing Fixtures"
for plumbing fixtures.
J. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and
other accessories.
L. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping
systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of
expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.
M. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.
N. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional
attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65)
O. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so piping live and dead loads and stresses from
movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.
P. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so maximum
pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 (for building services piping) are not exceeded.
a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through
insulation.
b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield
insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.
c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME B31.9 for building services
piping.
2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is
indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields
shall span an arc of 180 degrees.
a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2 (DN 8 to DN 90): 12 inches (305 mm) long and 0.048 inch
(1.22 mm) thick.
b. NPS 4 (DN 100): 12 inches (305 mm) long and 0.06 inch (1.52 mm) thick.
c. NPS 5 and NPS 6 (DN 125 and DN 150): 18 inches (457 mm) long and 0.06 inch
(1.52 mm) thick.
d. NPS 8 to NPS 14 (DN 200 to DN 350): 24 inches (610 mm) long and 0.075 inch
(1.91 mm) thick.
e. NPS 16 to NPS 24 (DN 400 to DN 600): 24 inches (610 mm) long and 0.105 inch
(2.67 mm) thick.
B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make smooth bearing surface.
A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and equipment
supports.
B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be
shop welded because of shipping size limitations.
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 procedures for shielded metal arc welding, appearance
and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work, and with the following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and contours
of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve
indicated slope of pipe.
B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches (40 mm).
3.6 PAINTING
A. Touch Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately
after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply
with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.
1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils (0.05
mm).
B. Touch Up: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas
of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in Division 9 painting Sections.
C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply
galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following hangers and supports for HVAC system piping and
equipment:
1. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural-steel shapes and plates for trapeze
hangers for pipe and equipment supports.
2. Division 13 Section "Fire-Suppression Piping" for pipe hangers for fire-protection piping.
3. Division 15 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment"
for vibration isolation devices.
4. Division 15 Section "Expansion Fittings and Loops for HVAC Piping" for pipe guides
and anchors.
5. Division 15 Section(s) "[Metal Ducts] [Nonmetal Ducts]" for duct hangers and
supports.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society for The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.
B. Terminology: As defined in MSS SP-90, "Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers and
Supports."
A. Design supports for multiple pipes, including pipe stands, capable of supporting combined
weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the
following:
C. Welding certificates.
A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to [AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding
Code--Steel."] [AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel."] [AWS D1.4,
"Structural Welding Code--Reinforcing Steel."] [ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code:
Section IX.]
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
A. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components. Refer to Part 3
"Hanger and Support Applications" Article for where to use specific hanger and support types.
B. Available Manufacturers:
E. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion for support of
bearing surface of piping.
A. Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made from
structural-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-bolts.
A. Clevis-Type, Fiberglass Pipe Hangers: Similar to MSS Type 1, steel pipe hanger except hanger
is made of fiberglass and continuous-thread rod and nuts are made of [polyurethane]
[polyurethane or stainless steel] [stainless steel] <Insert other>.
1. Available Manufacturers:
B. Strap-Type, Fiberglass Pipe Hangers: Made of fiberglass loop with stainless-steel continuous-
thread rod, nuts, and support hook.
1. Available Manufacturers:
a. Plasti-Fab, Inc.
B. Available Manufacturers:
C. Coatings: Manufacturer's standard finish, unless bare metal surfaces are indicated.
B. Available Manufacturers:
B. Available Manufacturers:
C. Insulation-Insert Material for Cold Piping: [Water-repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I
calcium silicate] [Water-repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate or
ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass] [ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass] with vapor
barrier.
D. Insulation-Insert Material for Hot Piping: [Water-repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I
calcium silicate] [Water-repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate or
ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass] [ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass].
E. For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe.
F. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.
G. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches (50 mm) beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below
ambient air temperature.
A. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete
with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building
materials where used.
1. Available Manufacturers:
a. Hilti, Inc.
b. ITW Ramset/Red Head.
c. Masterset Fastening Systems, Inc.
d. MKT Fastening, LLC.
e. Powers Fasteners.
1. Available Manufacturers:
B. Compact Pipe Stand: One-piece plastic unit with integral-rod-roller, pipe clamps, or V-shaped
cradle to support pipe, for roof installation without membrane penetration.
1. Available Manufacturers:
C. Low-Type, Single-Pipe Stand: One-piece [plastic] [stainless-steel] base unit with plastic roller,
for roof installation without membrane penetration.
1. Available Manufacturers:
a. MIRO Industries.
D. High-Type, Single-Pipe Stand: Assembly of base, vertical and horizontal members, and pipe
support, for roof installation without membrane penetration.
1. Available Manufacturers:
1. Available Manufacturers:
F. Curb-Mounting-Type Pipe Stands: Shop- or field-fabricated pipe support made from structural-
steel shape, continuous-thread rods, and rollers for mounting on permanent stationary roof curb.
A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.
B. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink and
nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Specific hanger and support requirements are specified in Sections specifying piping systems
and equipment.
B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in
piping system Sections.
C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized, metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will
not have field-applied finish.
D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in
direct contact with copper tubing.
1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or
insulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30 (DN 15 to DN 750).
2. Yoke-Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For suspension of 120 to 450 deg F (49 to 232
deg C) pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 16 (DN 100 to DN 400), requiring up to 4 inches (100 mm)
of insulation.
3. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of
pipes, NPS 3/4 to NPS 24 (DN 20 to DN 600), requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4
inches (100 mm) of insulation.
4. Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4): For suspension of cold and hot pipes, NPS 1/2 to
NPS 24 (DN 15 to DN 600), if little or no insulation is required.
5. Pipe Hangers (MSS Type 5): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 15 to
DN 100), to allow off-center closure for hanger installation before pipe erection.
6. Adjustable, Swivel Split- or Solid-Ring Hangers (MSS Type 6): For suspension of
noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/4 to NPS 8 (DN 20 to DN 200).
7. Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated
stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 8 (DN 15 to DN 200).
8. Adjustable Band Hangers (MSS Type 9): For suspension of noninsulated stationary
pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 8 (DN 15 to DN 200).
9. Adjustable, Swivel-Ring Band Hangers (MSS Type 10): For suspension of noninsulated
stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 2 (DN 15 to DN 50).
10. Split Pipe-Ring with or without Turnbuckle-Adjustment Hangers (MSS Type 11): For
suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/8 to NPS 8 (DN 10 to DN 200).
11. Extension Hinged or 2-Bolt Split Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 12): For suspension of
noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/8 to NPS 3 (DN 10 to DN 80).
12. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30 (DN 15 to
DN 750).
13. Clips (MSS Type 26): For support of insulated pipes not subject to expansion or
contraction.
14. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 36 (DN 100
to DN 900), with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange.
15. Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 36 (DN 100
to DN 900), with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange and with U-
bolt to retain pipe.
16. Adjustable, Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 38): For stanchion-type support for pipes,
NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 36 (DN 65 to DN 900), if vertical adjustment is required, with steel
pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange.
17. Single Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1 to NPS 30 (DN 25 to
DN 750), from 2 rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction
might occur.
18. Adjustable Roller Hangers (MSS Type 43): For suspension of pipes, NPS 2-1/2 to
NPS 20 (DN 65 to DN 500), from single rod if horizontal movement caused by expansion
and contraction might occur.
19. Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 42 (DN 50 to
DN 1050), if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur
but vertical adjustment is not necessary.
G. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Sections, install the following types:
1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to
NPS 20 (DN 20 to DN 500).
2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers,
NPS 3/4 to NPS 20 (DN 20 to DN 500), if longer ends are required for riser clamps.
H. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Sections, install the following types:
1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches (150 mm) for heavy
loads.
2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F (49 to 232 deg C) piping
installations.
3. Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe rings.
4. Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various types of
building attachments.
5. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450 deg F (49 to 232 deg C) piping
installations.
I. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Sections, install the following types:
1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend
pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.
2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist
construction to attach to top flange of structural shape.
3. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams,
channels, or angles.
4. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams.
5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads
are considerable and rod sizes are large.
6. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes.
7. Top-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25): For top of beams if hanger rod is required tangent to
flange edge.
8. Side-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I-beams.
9. Steel-Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom of steel I-
beams for heavy loads.
10. Linked-Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom of steel I-
beams for heavy loads, with link extensions.
11. Malleable Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to
structural steel.
13. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams.
14. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required.
15. Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject to linear
horizontal movement where headroom is limited.
J. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Sections, install the following types:
1. Steel Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with
insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer
to prevent crushing insulation.
3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.
K. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping
system Sections, install the following types:
1. Restraint-Control Devices (MSS Type 47): Where indicated to control piping movement.
2. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not exceed
1-1/4 inches (32 mm).
3. Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41 roll hanger with
springs.
4. Spring Sway Braces (MSS Type 50): To retard sway, shock, vibration, or thermal
expansion in piping systems.
5. Variable-Spring Hangers (MSS Type 51): Preset to indicated load and limit variability
factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from hanger.
6. Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and limit
variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from
base support.
7. Variable-Spring Trapeze Hangers (MSS Type 53): Preset to indicated load and limit
variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from
trapeze support.
8. Constant Supports: For critical piping stress and if necessary to avoid transfer of stress
from one support to another support, critical terminal, or connected equipment. Include
auxiliary stops for erection, hydrostatic test, and load-adjustment capability. These
supports include the following types:
L. Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe hanger selections and applications that are not
specified in piping system Sections.
A. Steel Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers,
supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from building
structure.
B. Trapeze Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Arrange for
grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping and support together on field-fabricated trapeze
pipe hangers.
1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or
install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified above for individual
pipe hangers.
2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel shapes selected for loads being supported.
Weld steel according to AWS D1.1.
C. Fiberglass Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with applicable portions of MSS SP-69 and
MSS SP-89. Install hangers and attachments as required to properly support piping from
building structure.
D. Metal Framing System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping and support
together on field-assembled metal framing systems.
E. Fiberglass Strut System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping and
support together on field-assembled fiberglass struts.
F. Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping.
1. Install powder-actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concrete slabs less
than 4 inches (100 mm) thick in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured.
Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners
according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual.
2. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely
cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Pipe Stand Types except Curb-Mounting Type: Assemble components and mount on
smooth roof surface. Do not penetrate roof membrane.
I. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and
other accessories.
K. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping
systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of
expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.
L. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.
M. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional
attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, [NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65)]
<Insert other> and larger and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before
concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of
inserts.
N. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so piping live and dead loads and stresses from
movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.
O. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so maximum
pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.1 (for power piping) and ASME B31.9 (for building
services piping) are not exceeded.
a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through
insulation.
b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield
insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.
c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME B31.1 for power piping and
ASME B31.9 for building services piping.
2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is
indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields
shall span an arc of 180 degrees.
a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2 (DN 8 to DN 90): 12 inches (305 mm) long and 0.048 inch
(1.22 mm) thick.
b. NPS 4 (DN 100): 12 inches (305 mm) long and 0.06 inch (1.52 mm) thick.
c. NPS 5 and NPS 6 (DN 125 and DN 150): 18 inches (457 mm) long and 0.06 inch
(1.52 mm) thick.
d. NPS 8 to NPS 14 (DN 200 to DN 350): 24 inches (610 mm) long and 0.075 inch
(1.91 mm) thick.
e. NPS 16 to NPS 24 (DN 400 to DN 600): 24 inches (610 mm) long and 0.105 inch
(2.67 mm) thick.
B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make smooth bearing surface.
A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and equipment
supports.
B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be
shop welded because of shipping size limitations.
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 procedures for shielded metal arc welding, appearance
and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work, and with the following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and contours
of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve
indicated slope of pipe.
3.6 PAINTING
A. Touch Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately
after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply
with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.
1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils (0.05
mm).
B. Touch Up: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas
of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in Division 9 [painting Sections.] [Section
"High-Performance Coatings."]
C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply
galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include load deflection curves for each vibration isolation device.
B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Include the following:
1. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and for
designing vibration isolation bases.
2. Riser Supports: Include riser diagrams and calculations showing anticipated expansion
and contraction at each support point, initial and final loads on building structure, spring
deflection changes, and seismic loads. Include certification that riser system has been
examined for excessive stress and that none will exist.
3. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication, including anchorages and
attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include auxiliary motor slides and
rails, base weights, equipment static loads, power transmission, component misalignment,
and cantilever loads.
A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding
Code--Steel."
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into base. Concrete,
reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3.
B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items
are specified in Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following
requirements apply for product selection:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the
manufacturers specified.
A. Manufacturers:
1. Amber/Booth Company, Inc.
2. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc.
3. Mason Industries, Inc.
4. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc.
5. Vibration Isolation Co., Inc.
6. Vibration Mountings & Controls/Korfund.
B. Elastomeric Isolator Pads: Oil- and water-resistant elastomer or natural rubber, arranged in
single or multiple layers, molded with a nonslip pattern and galvanized steel baseplates of
sufficient stiffness for uniform loading over pad area, and factory cut to sizes that match
requirements of supported equipment.
D. Housed Spring Mounts: Housed spring isolator with integral seismic snubbers.
F. Spring Hangers: Combination coil-spring and elastomeric-insert hanger with spring and insert
in compression.
1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for a
maximum of 30 degrees of angular hanger-rod misalignment without binding or reducing
isolation efficiency.
2. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the
spring at rated load.
3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of the rated vertical stiffness.
5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without
deformation or failure.
6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene. Steel-washer-reinforced
cup to support spring and bushing projecting through bottom of frame.
G. Pipe Riser Resilient Support: All-directional, acoustical pipe anchor consisting of 2 steel tubes
separated by a minimum of 1/2-inch- thick, 60-durometer neoprene. Include steel and neoprene
vertical-limit stops arranged to prevent vertical travel in both directions. Design support for a
maximum load on the isolation material of 500 psig and for equal resistance in all directions.
H. Resilient Pipe Guides: Telescopic arrangement of 2 steel tubes separated by a minimum of 1/2-
inch- thick, 60-durometer neoprene. Factory set guide height with a shear pin to allow vertical
motion due to pipe expansion and contraction. Shear pin shall be removable and reinsertable to
allow for selection of pipe movement. Guides shall be capable of motion to meet location
requirements.
A. Available Manufacturers:
B. Manufacturers:
1. Design Requirements: Lowest possible mounting height with not less than 1-inch
clearance above the floor. Include equipment anchor bolts and auxiliary motor slide
bases or rails. Include supports for suction and discharge elbows for pumps.
2. Structural Steel: Steel shapes, plates, and bars complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M.
Bases shall have shape to accommodate supported equipment.
3. Support Brackets: Factory-welded steel angles on frame for outrigger isolation
mountings and to provide for anchor bolts and equipment support.
D. Inertia Base: Factory-fabricated, welded, structural-steel bases and rails ready for field-applied,
cast-in-place concrete.
1. Design Requirements: Lowest possible mounting height with not less than 1-inch
clearance above the floor. Include equipment anchor bolts and auxiliary motor slide
bases or rails. Include supports for suction and discharge elbows for pumps.
2. Structural Steel: Steel shapes, plates, and bars complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M.
Bases shall have shape to accommodate supported equipment.
3. Support Brackets: Factory-welded steel angles on frame for outrigger isolation
mountings and to provide for anchor bolts and equipment support.
4. Fabrication: Fabricate steel templates to hold equipment anchor-bolt sleeves and anchors
in place during placement of concrete. Obtain anchor-bolt templates from supported
equipment manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation and seismic-control devices for
compliance with requirements, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting
performance.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations as specified in Division 7 Section
"Roof Accessories."
A. Fill concrete inertia bases, after installing base frame, with 3000-psi concrete; trowel to a
smooth finish.
1. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated,
install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of the base.
2. Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through concrete
base and anchor into structural concrete floor.
3. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use Setting Drawings, templates, diagrams,
instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
4. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.
5. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions.
6. Cast-in-place concrete materials and placement requirements are specified in Division 3.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust isolators after piping systems have been filled and equipment is at operating weight.
3.5 CLEANING
A. After completing equipment installation, inspect vibration isolation devices. Remove paint
splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris.
A. Provide vibration isolators for equipment per following schedule. Isolator manufacturer shall
verify that static deflection indicated is appropriate.
Chiller
Boiler
Cooling Tower
AHU-1
ABBREVATIONS:
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Equipment labels.
2. Warning signs and labels.
3. Pipe labels.
4. Stencils.
5. Valve tags.
6. Warning tags.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
B. Samples: For color, letter style, and graphic representation required for each identification
material and device.
C. Equipment Label Schedule: Include a listing of all equipment to be labeled with the proposed
content for each label.
1.4 COORDINATION
B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors.
C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.
1. Material and Thickness: Brass, 0.032-inch (0.8-mm) Stainless steel, 0.025-inch (0.64-
mm) Aluminum, 0.032-inch (0.8-mm) minimum thickness, and having predrilled or
stamped holes for attachment hardware.
2. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than
2-1/2 by 3/4 inch (64 by 19 mm).
3. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) for name of units if viewing distance is less
than 24 inches (600 mm), 1/2 inch (13 mm) for viewing distances up to 72 inches (1830
mm), and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include
secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.
4. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws.
5. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.
1. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving,
1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.
2. Letter Color: Black.
3. Background Color: White.
4. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F (71 deg C).
5. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than
2-1/2 by 3/4 inch (64 by 19 mm).
6. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) for name of units if viewing distance is less
than 24 inches (600 mm), 1/2 inch (13 mm) for viewing distances up to 72 inches (1830
mm), and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include
secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.
7. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws.
8. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.
A. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/16
inch (1.6 mm) thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.
D. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F (71 deg C).
E. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2
by 3/4 inch (64 by 19 mm).
F. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24
inches (600 mm), 1/2 inch (13 mm) for viewing distances up to 72 inches (1830 mm), and
proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-
thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.
H. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.
I. Label Content: Include caution and warning information, plus emergency notification
instructions.
A. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering
indicating service, and showing flow direction.
B. Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled, semirigid plastic formed to cover full circumference of
pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive.
D. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or
abbreviations as used on Drawings, pipe size, and an arrow indicating flow direction.
2.4 STENCILS
A. Stencils: Prepared with letter sizes according to ASME A13.1 for piping; and minimum letter
height of 3/4 inch (19 mm) for access panel and door labels, equipment labels, and similar
operational instructions.
A. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) letters for piping system
abbreviation and 1/2-inch (13-mm) numbers.
1. Tag Material: Brass, 0.032-inch (0.8-mm) minimum thickness, and having predrilled or
stamped holes for attachment hardware.
2. Fasteners: Brass wire-link or beaded chain; or S-hook.
B. Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch (A4) bond paper. Tabulate
valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve
(room or space), normal-operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and variations for
identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification
devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and
encapsulants.
B. Stenciled Pipe Label Option: Stenciled labels may be provided instead of manufactured pipe
labels, at Installer's option. Install stenciled pipe labels with painted, color-coded bands or
rectangles on each piping system.
C. Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces;
machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and
exterior exposed locations as follows:
A. Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves; valves within
factory-fabricated equipment units; shutoff valves; faucets; convenience and lawn-watering
hose connections; and similar roughing-in connections of end-use fixtures and units. List
tagged valves in a valve schedule.
B. Valve-Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and color scheme and
with captions similar to those indicated in the following subparagraphs:
2. Valve-Tag Color:
3. Letter Color:
A. Write required message on, and attach warning tags to, equipment and other items where
required.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Equipment labels.
2. Warning signs and labels.
3. Pipe labels.
4. Duct labels.
5. Stencils.
6. Valve tags.
7. Warning tags.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
B. Samples: For color, letter style, and graphic representation required for each identification
material and device.
C. Equipment Label Schedule: Include a listing of all equipment to be labeled with the proposed
content for each label.
1.4 COORDINATION
B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors.
C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.
1. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving,
[1/16 inch (1.6 mm)] [1/8 inch (3.2 mm)] <Insert dimension> thick, and having
predrilled holes for attachment hardware.
2. Letter Color: [Black] [Blue] [Red] [White] [Yellow] <Insert color>.
3. Background Color: [Black] [Blue] [Red] [White] [Yellow] <Insert color>.
4. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F (71 deg C).
5. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than
2-1/2 by 3/4 inch (64 by 19 mm).
6. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) for name of units if viewing distance is less
than 24 inches (600 mm), 1/2 inch (13 mm) for viewing distances up to 72 inches (1830
mm), and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include
secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.
7. Fasteners: Stainless-steel [rivets] [rivets or self-tapping screws] [self-tapping screws].
8. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.
A. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, [1/16
inch (1.6 mm)] [1/8 inch (3.2 mm)] <Insert dimension> thick, and having predrilled holes for
attachment hardware.
D. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F (71 deg C).
E. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2
by 3/4 inch (64 by 19 mm).
F. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24
inches (600 mm), 1/2 inch (13 mm) for viewing distances up to 72 inches (1830 mm), and
proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-
thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.
H. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.
I. Label Content: Include caution and warning information, plus emergency notification
instructions.
A. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering
indicating service, and showing flow direction.
B. Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled, semirigid plastic formed to [partially cover] [cover full]
circumference of pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive.
D. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or
abbreviations as used on Drawings, pipe size, and an arrow indicating flow direction.
A. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, [1/16
inch (1.6 mm)] [1/8 inch (3.2 mm)] <Insert dimension> thick, and having predrilled holes for
attachment hardware.
D. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F (71 deg C).
E. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2
by 3/4 inch (64 by 19 mm).
F. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24
inches (600 mm), 1/2 inch (13 mm) for viewing distances up to 72 inches (1830 mm), and
proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-
thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.
H. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.
I. Duct Label Contents: Include identification of duct service using same designations or
abbreviations as used on Drawings, duct size, and an arrow indicating flow direction.
1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with duct system service lettering to accommodate both
directions, or as separate unit on each duct label to indicate flow direction.
2. Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) high.
2.5 STENCILS
A. Stencils: Prepared with letter sizes according to ASME A13.1 for piping; minimum letter
height of 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) for ducts; and minimum letter height of 3/4 inch (19 mm) for
access panel and door labels, equipment labels, and similar operational instructions.
A. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) letters for piping system
abbreviation and 1/2-inch (13-mm) numbers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification
devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and
encapsulants.
B. Stenciled Pipe Label Option: Stenciled labels may be provided instead of manufactured pipe
labels, at Installer's option. Install stenciled pipe labels [with painted, color-coded bands or
rectangles] [, complying with ASME A13.1,] on each piping system.
1. Chilled-Water Piping:
2. Condenser-Water Piping:
4. Refrigerant Piping:
A. Install [plastic-laminated] [self-adhesive] duct labels with permanent adhesive on air ducts in
the following color codes:
C. Locate labels near points where ducts enter into concealed spaces and at maximum intervals of
[50 feet (15 m)] <Insert dimension> in each space where ducts are exposed or concealed by
removable ceiling system.
A. Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves; valves within
factory-fabricated equipment units; shutoff valves; faucets; convenience and lawn-watering
hose connections; and HVAC terminal devices and similar roughing-in connections of end-use
fixtures and units. List tagged valves in a valve schedule.
B. Valve-Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and color scheme and
with captions similar to those indicated in the following subparagraphs:
a. Chilled Water: [1-1/2 inches (38 mm)] [2 inches (50 mm)], [round] [square]
<Insert shape>.
b. Condenser Water: [1-1/2 inches (38 mm)] [2 inches (50 mm)], [round] [square]
<Insert shape>.
c. Refrigerant: [1-1/2 inches (38 mm)] [2 inches (50 mm)], [round] [square]
<Insert shape>.
d. Hot Water: [1-1/2 inches (38 mm)] [2 inches (50 mm)], [round] [square]
<Insert shape>.
e. Gas: [1-1/2 inches (38 mm)] [2 inches (50 mm)], [round] [square] <Insert
shape>.
2. Valve-Tag Color:
3. Letter Color:
A. Write required message on, and attach warning tags to, equipment and other items where
required.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Insulation Materials:
a. Calcium silicate.
b. Cellular glass.
c. Flexible elastomeric.
d. Mineral fiber.
e. Phenolic.
f. Polyisocyanurate.
g. Polyolefin.
h. Polystyrene.
2. Insulating cements.
3. Adhesives.
4. Mastics.
5. Lagging adhesives.
6. Sealants.
7. Factory-applied jackets.
8. Field-applied fabric-reinforcing mesh.
9. Field-applied cloths.
10. Field-applied jackets.
11. Tapes.
12. Securements.
13. Corner angles.
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, thickness, and
jackets (both factory and field applied, if any).
B. LEED Submittal:
1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For adhesives and sealants, including printed statement
of VOC content.
C. Shop Drawings:
1. Detail application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at hangers for each type of
insulation and hanger.
2. Detail attachment and covering of heat tracing inside insulation.
3. Detail insulation application at pipe expansion joints for each type of insulation.
4. Detail insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and specialties for each
type of insulation.
5. Detail removable insulation at piping specialties and equipment connections.
6. Detail application of field-applied jackets.
7. Detail application at linkages of control devices.
8. Detail field application for fire-suppression water storage tanks.
D. Samples: For each type of insulation and jacket indicated. Identify each Sample, describing
product and intended use. Sample sizes are as follows:
1. Preformed Pipe Insulation Materials: 12 inches (300 mm) long by NPS 2 (DN 50).
2. Sheet Form Insulation Materials: 12 inches (300 mm) square.
3. Jacket Materials for Pipe: 12 inches (300 mm) long by NPS 2 (DN 50).
4. Sheet Jacket Materials: 12 inches (300 mm) square.
5. Manufacturer's Color Charts: For products where color is specified, show the full range
of colors available for each type of finish material.
F. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation
materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets, with requirements indicated. Include
dates of tests and test methods employed.
C. Mockups: Before installing insulation, build mockups for each type of insulation and finish
listed below to demonstrate quality of insulation application and finishes. Build mockups in the
location indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. Use materials indicated for the
completed Work.
1. Piping Mockups:
2. Equipment Mockups:
3. For each mockup, fabricate cutaway sections to allow observation of application details
for insulation materials, adhesives, mastics, attachments, and jackets.
4. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be
constructed.
5. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting insulation application.
6. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract
Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations
in writing.
7. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for
judging the completed Work.
8. Demolish and remove mockups when directed.
B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application and
equipment Installer for equipment insulation application. Before preparing piping Shop
Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field-
applied jackets and finishes and for space required for maintenance.
1.7 SCHEDULING
A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after
installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have
satisfactory test results.
B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of
construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Comply with requirements in Part 3 schedule articles for where insulating materials shall be
applied.
C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less
than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.
D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable
according to ASTM C 795.
E. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing
process.
F. Calcium Silicate:
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following provide one of
the following:
G. Cellular Glass: Inorganic, incombustible, foamed or cellulated glass with annealed, rigid,
hermetically sealed cells. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-
Applied Jackets" Article.
I. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.
Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II and ASTM C 1290, Type I. Factory-applied jacket
requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.
J. Mineral-Fiber Board Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.
Comply with ASTM C 612, Type IA or Type IB. For equipment applications, provide
insulation with factory-applied ASJ. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in
"Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.
2. Type I, 850 deg F (454 deg C) Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a
thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, with factory-applied
ASJ. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets"
Article.
3. Type II, 1200 deg F (649 deg C) Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a
thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 547, Type II, Grade A, with factory-applied
ASJ. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets"
Article.
L. Mineral-Fiber, Pipe and Tank Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting
resin. Semirigid board material with factory-applied ASJ complying with ASTM C 1393,
Type II or Type IIIA Category 2, or with properties similar to ASTM C 612, Type IB. Nominal
density is 2.5 lb/cu. ft. (40 kg/cu. m) or more. Thermal conductivity (k-value) at 100 deg F (55
deg C) is 0.29 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F (0.042 W/m x K) or less. Factory-applied jacket
requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.
M. Polyolefin: Unicellular, polyethylene thermal plastic insulation. Comply with ASTM C 534 or
ASTM C 1427, Type I, Grade 1 for tubular materials and Type II, Grade 1 for sheet materials.
2.3 ADHESIVES
A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding
insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated.
2. For indoor applications, use adhesive that has a VOC content of 80 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
2. For indoor applications, use adhesive that has a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
D. Flexible Elastomeric and Polyolefin Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-24179A, Type II, Class I.
2. For indoor applications, use adhesive that has a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
2. For indoor applications, use adhesive that has a VOC content of 80 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
F. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK and PVDC Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2,
Grade A, for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.
2. For indoor applications, use adhesive that has a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
2.4 MASTICS
A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with
MIL-C-19565C, Type II.
2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96, Procedure B, 0.013 perm (0.009 metric perm) at
43-mil (1.09-mm) dry film thickness.
3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F (Minus 29 to plus 82 deg C).
4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 59 percent by volume and 71 percent by weight.
5. Color: White.
C. Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above ambient services.
2.5 SEALANTS
A. Joint Sealants:
C. ASJ Flashing Sealants, and Vinyl, PVDC, and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants:
1) Dow Chemical Company (The); Saran 540 Vapor Retarder Film and
Saran 560 Vapor Retarder Film.
5. PVDC Jacket for Outdoor Applications: 6-mil- (0.15-mm-) thick, white PVDC biaxially
oriented barrier film with a permeance at 0.01 perms (0.007 metric perms) when tested
according to ASTM E 96 and with a flame-spread index of 5 and a smoke-developed
index of 25 when tested according to ASTM E 84.
1) Dow Chemical Company (The); Saran 540 Vapor Retarder Film and
Saran 560 Vapor Retarder Film.
1) Dow Chemical Company (The); Saran 540 Vapor Retarder Film and
Saran 560 Vapor Retarder Film.
A. Woven Glass-Fiber Fabric for Pipe Insulation: Approximately 2 oz./sq. yd. (68 g/sq. m) with a
thread count of 10 strands by 10 strands/sq. inch (4 strands by 4 strands/sq. mm) for covering
pipe and pipe fittings.
B. Woven Glass-Fiber Fabric for Equipment Insulation: Approximately 6 oz./sq. yd. (203 g/sq. m)
with a thread count of 5 strands by 5 strands/sq. inch (2 strands by 2 strands/sq. mm) for
covering equipment.
C. Woven Polyester Fabric: Approximately 1 oz./sq. yd. (34 g/sq. m) with a thread count of 10
strands by 10 strands/sq. inch (4 strands by 4 strands/sq. mm), in a Leno weave.
A. Woven Glass-Fiber Fabric: Comply with MIL-C-20079H, Type I, plain weave, and presized a
minimum of 8 oz./sq. yd. (271 g/sq. m).
A. Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I, unless otherwise indicated.
a. Shapes: 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows, tees, valves, flanges,
unions, reducers, end caps, soil-pipe hubs, traps, mechanical joints, and P-trap and
supply covers for lavatories.
2.10 TAPES
A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive,
complying with ASTM C 1136.
B. FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive;
complying with ASTM C 1136.
C. PVC Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching field-applied PVC jacket with acrylic adhesive.
Suitable for indoor and outdoor applications.
E. PVDC Tape for Indoor Applications: White vapor-retarder PVDC tape with acrylic adhesive.
2.11 SECUREMENTS
A. Bands:
2. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304; 0.015 inch (0.38
mm) thick, 1/2 inch (13 mm) wide with closed seal.
3. Aluminum: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005;
Temper H-14, 0.020 inch (0.51 mm) thick, 1/2 inch (13 mm) wide with closed seal.
4. Springs: Twin spring set constructed of stainless steel with ends flat and slotted to accept
metal bands. Spring size determined by manufacturer for application.
b. Baseplate: Galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch (0.76 mm) thick by 2 inches
(50 mm) square.
c. Spindle: Aluminum, fully annealed, 0.106-inch- (2.6-mm-) diameter shank, length
to suit depth of insulation indicated.
d. Adhesive-backed base with a peel-off protective cover.
b. Protect ends with capped self-locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to
ensure permanent retention of cap in exposed locations.
C. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) wide, stainless steel
or Monel.
a. C & F Wire.
b. Childers Products.
c. PABCO Metals Corporation.
d. RPR Products, Inc.
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and other
conditions affecting performance of insulation application.
1. Verify that systems and equipment to be insulated have been tested and are free of
defects.
2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry.
3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will
adversely affect insulation application.
B. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be insulated. Before insulating, apply a
corrosion coating to insulated surfaces as follows:
1. Stainless Steel: Coat 300 series stainless steel with an epoxy primer 5 mils (0.127 mm)
thick and an epoxy finish 5 mils (0.127 mm) thick if operating in a temperature range
between 140 and 300 deg F (60 and 149 deg C). Consult coating manufacturer for
appropriate coating materials and application methods for operating temperature range.
2. Carbon Steel: Coat carbon steel operating at a service temperature between 32 and 300
deg F (0 and 149 deg C) with an epoxy coating. Consult coating manufacturer for
appropriate coating materials and application methods for operating temperature range.
C. Coordinate insulation installation with the trade installing heat tracing. Comply with
requirements for heat tracing that apply to insulation.
D. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with
stainless-steel surfaces, use demineralized water.
A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces;
free of voids throughout the length of equipment and piping including fittings, valves, and
specialties.
B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required
for each item of equipment and pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules.
C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install
accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or
dry state.
E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.
H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with
adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers,
supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.
K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet
and dry film thicknesses.
4. Cover joints and seams with tape as recommended by insulation material manufacturer to
maintain vapor seal.
5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at
ends adjacent to pipe flanges and fittings.
M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal
thickness.
O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas.
Extend patches at least 4 inches (100 mm) beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal
patches similar to butt joints.
1. Vibration-control devices.
2. Testing agency labels and stamps.
3. Nameplates and data plates.
4. Manholes.
5. Handholes.
6. Cleanouts.
3.4 PENETRATIONS
D. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated):
Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.
A. Secure insulation with adhesive and anchor pins and speed washers.
1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area,
for 100 percent coverage of tank and vessel surfaces.
2. Groove and score insulation materials to fit as closely as possible to equipment, including
contours. Bevel insulation edges for cylindrical surfaces for tight joints. Stagger end
joints.
3. Protect exposed corners with secured corner angles.
4. Install adhesively attached or self-sticking insulation hangers and speed washers on sides
of tanks and vessels as follows:
5. Secure each layer of insulation with stainless-steel or aluminum bands. Select band
material compatible with insulation materials.
6. Where insulation hangers on equipment and vessels are not permitted or practical and
where insulation support rings are not provided, install a girdle network for securing
insulation. Stretch prestressed aircraft cable around the diameter of vessel and make taut
with clamps, turnbuckles, or breather springs. Place one circumferential girdle around
equipment approximately 6 inches (150 mm) from each end. Install wire or cable
between two circumferential girdles 12 inches (300 mm) o.c. Install a wire ring around
each end and around outer periphery of center openings, and stretch prestressed aircraft
cable radially from the wire ring to nearest circumferential girdle. Install additional
B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation Installation for Tanks and Vessels: Install insulation
over entire surface of tanks and vessels.
A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more
specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles.
1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties with
continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from
same material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly
against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular
surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is
uniform with adjoining pipe insulation.
3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same
material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt
each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with
adhesive.
4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same
material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe
insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe
diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets,
valve stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with
insulating cement.
5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same
material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe
insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe
diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating
cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and
replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable
insulation cover. For below ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor
barrier.
C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps,
test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes, vessels,
and equipment. Shape insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the
connection with insulating cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing
sealant.
D. Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. Installation shall conform to the
following:
1. Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same
thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as adjoining pipe
insulation.
2. When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend insulation
from flanges or union long at least two times the insulation thickness over adjacent pipe
insulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover in place with stainless-
steel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket.
3. Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges except divide
the two-part section on the vertical center line of valve body.
4. When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of
mitered blocks wired to stainless-steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its attached
insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches (50 mm) over
adjacent pipe insulation on each side of valve. Fill space between flange or union cover
and pipe insulation with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating
cement applied in two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel second coat to a
smooth finish.
5. Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules, finish exposed
surfaces with a metal jacket.
1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when
available.
2. When preformed insulation sections of insulation are not available, install mitered
sections of calcium silicate insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands.
3. Finish fittings insulation same as pipe insulation.
1. Install mitered segments of calcium silicate insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation
to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation.
2. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
3. Finish valve and specialty insulation same as pipe insulation.
1. Secure each layer of insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands without
deforming insulation materials.
2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions
with vapor-barrier mastic and applicable insulation joint sealant.
3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above ambient services, secure laps with
outward clinched staples at 6 inches (150 mm) o.c.
4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below ambient services, do not staple
longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation
material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant.
1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when
available.
2. When preformed sections of insulation are not available, install mitered sections of
cellular-glass insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands.
A. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate
openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
1. Install preformed valve covers manufactured of same material as pipe insulation when
available.
1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten
bands without deforming insulation materials.
2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions
with vapor-barrier mastic and applicable insulation joint sealant.
3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above ambient surfaces, secure laps with
outward clinched staples at 6 inches (150 mm) o.c.
4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below ambient surfaces, do not staple
longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation
material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant.
1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when
available.
2. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered sections
of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation
materials with wire or bands.
1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when
available.
2. When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation to
valve body.
3. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without
disturbing insulation.
4. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
1. Secure each layer of insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands without
deforming insulation materials.
2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions
with vapor-barrier mastic and applicable insulation joint sealant.
3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above ambient services, secure laps with
outward clinched staples at 6 inches (150 mm) o.c.
4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets with vapor retarders on below ambient
services, do not staple longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as
recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and
flashing sealant.
1. Seal split-tube longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended
adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being
insulated.
1. Install cut sections of polyolefin pipe and sheet insulation to valve body.
2. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without
disturbing insulation.
3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties, and seal seams with manufacturer's
recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to
surface being insulated.
1. Secure each layer of insulation with tape or bands and tighten bands without deforming
insulation materials. Orient longitudinal joints between half sections in 3 and 9 o'clock
positions on the pipe.
2. For insulation with factory-applied jackets with vapor barriers, do not staple longitudinal
tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive or tape as recommended by insulation
material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic.
3. All insulation shall be tightly butted and free of voids and gaps at all joints. Vapor
barrier must be continuous. Before installing jacket material, install vapor-barrier
system.
A. Where glass-cloth jackets are indicated, install directly over bare insulation or insulation with
factory-applied jackets.
1. Draw jacket smooth and tight to surface with 2-inch (50-mm) overlap at seams and joints.
2. Embed glass cloth between two 0.062-inch- (1.6-mm-) thick coats of lagging adhesive.
3. Completely encapsulate insulation with coating, leaving no exposed insulation.
C. Where PVC jackets are indicated, install with 1-inch (25-mm) overlap at longitudinal seams and
end joints. Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
1. Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead under lap and the
finish bead along seam and joint edge.
D. Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2-inch (50-mm) overlap at longitudinal seams
and end joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with
weatherproof sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless-
steel bands 12 inches (300 mm) o.c. and at end joints.
1. Apply three separate wraps of filament tape per insulation section to secure pipe
insulation to pipe prior to installation of PVDC jacket.
2. Wrap factory-presized jackets around individual pipe insulation sections with one end
overlapping the previously installed sheet. Install presized jacket with an approximate
overlap at butt joint of 2 inches (50 mm) over the previous section. Adhere lap seal using
adhesive or SSL, and then apply 1-1/4 circumferences of appropriate PVDC tape around
overlapped butt joint.
3. Continuous jacket can be spiral wrapped around a length of pipe insulation. Apply
adhesive or PVDC tape at overlapped spiral edge. When electing to use adhesives, refer
to manufacturer's written instructions for application of adhesives along this spiral edge
to maintain a permanent bond.
4. Jacket can be wrapped in cigarette fashion along length of roll for insulation systems with
an outer circumference of 33-1/2 inches (850 mm) or less. The 33-1/2-inch- (850-mm-)
circumference limit allows for 2-inch- (50-mm-) overlap seal. Using the length of roll
allows for longer sections of jacket to be installed at one time. Use adhesive on the lap
3.16 FINISHES
A. Equipment and Pipe Insulation with ASJ, Glass-Cloth, or Other Paintable Jacket Material:
Paint jacket with paint system identified below and as specified in Division 9 painting Sections.
1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer that is compatible with jacket
material and finish coat paint. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew proof.
B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of
insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.
C. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual
inspection of the completed Work.
A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
D. All insulation applications will be considered defective Work if sample inspection reveals
noncompliance with requirements.
A. Insulation materials and thicknesses are identified below. If more than one material is listed for
a type of equipment, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.
B. Insulate indoor and outdoor equipment in paragraphs below that is not factory insulated.
A. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for
each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system,
selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.
B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following:
A. Indoor Engine Coolant Piping for Remote Radiator of Engine-Driven Fire Pump:
A. Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory-applied jacket, install the
field-applied jacket over the factory-applied jacket.
B. If more than one material is listed, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.
C. Piping, Concealed:
1. None.
2. Aluminum, Smooth: 0.016 inch (0.41 mm) thick.
3. Painted Aluminum, Smooth: 0.016 inch (0.41 mm) thick.
D. Piping, Exposed:
1. None.
2. Aluminum, Smooth: 0.016 inch (0.41 mm) thick.
3. Painted Aluminum, Smooth: 0.016 inch (0.41 mm) thick.
4. Stainless Steel, Type 304,: 0.016 inch (0.41 mm) thick.
PLUMBING INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Insulation Materials:
a. Calcium silicate.
b. Cellular glass.
c. Flexible elastomeric.
d. Mineral fiber.
2. Insulating cements.
3. Adhesives.
4. Sealants.
5. Factory-applied jackets.
6. Field-applied fabric-reinforcing mesh.
7. Field-applied cloths.
8. Field-applied jackets.
9. Tapes.
10. Securements.
11. Corner angles.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, thickness, and
jackets (both factory and field applied, if any).
B. LEED Submittal:
C. Shop Drawings:
1. Detail application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at hangers for each type of
insulation and hanger.
2. Detail attachment and covering of heat tracing inside insulation.
3. Detail insulation application at pipe expansion joints for each type of insulation.
4. Detail insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and specialties for each
type of insulation.
5. Detail removable insulation at piping specialties, equipment connections, and access
panels.
6. Detail application of field-applied jackets.
7. Detail application at linkages of control devices.
8. Detail field application for each equipment type.
D. Samples: For each type of insulation and jacket indicated. Identify each Sample, describing
product and intended use. Sample sizes are as follows:
1. Sample Sizes:
a. Preformed Pipe Insulation Materials: 12 inches (300 mm) long by NPS 2 (DN 50).
b. Sheet Form Insulation Materials: 12 inches (300 mm) square.
c. Jacket Materials for Pipe: 12 inches (300 mm) long by NPS 2 (DN 50).
d. Sheet Jacket Materials: 12 inches (300 mm) square.
e. Manufacturer's Color Charts: For products where color is specified, show the full
range of colors available for each type of finish material.
F. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation
materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets, with requirements indicated. Include
dates of tests and test methods employed.
C. Mockups: Before installing insulation, build mockups for each type of insulation and finish
listed below to demonstrate quality of insulation application and finishes. Build mockups in the
location indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. Use materials indicated for the
completed Work.
1. Piping Mockups:
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in
Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports."
B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application and
equipment Installer for equipment insulation application. Before preparing piping Shop
1.7 SCHEDULING
A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after
installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have
satisfactory test results.
B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of
construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Comply with requirements in Part 3 schedule articles for where insulating materials shall be
applied.
C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less
than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.
D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable
according to ASTM C 795.
E. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing
process.
F. Calcium Silicate:
I. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.
Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II and ASTM C 1290, Type I. Factory-applied jacket
requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.
K. Mineral-Fiber, Pipe and Tank Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting
resin. Semirigid board material with factory-applied ASJ complying with ASTM C 1393,
Type II or Type IIIA Category 2, or with properties similar to ASTM C 612, Type IB. Nominal
density is 2.5 lb/cu. ft. (40 kg/cu. m) or more. Thermal conductivity (k-value) at 100 deg F (55
deg C) is 0.29 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F (0.042 W/m x K) or less. Factory-applied jacket
requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.
2.3 ADHESIVES
A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding
insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated.
2. For indoor applications, use adhesive that has a VOC content of 80 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
2. For indoor applications, use adhesive that has a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
2. For indoor applications, use adhesive that has a VOC content of 80 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
E. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK and PVDC Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2,
Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.
2. For indoor applications, use adhesive that has a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
2.4 MASTICS
A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with
MIL-C-19565C, Type II.
B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on below ambient
services.
2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96, Procedure B, 0.013 perm (0.009 metric perm) at
43-mil (1.09-mm) dry film thickness.
3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F (Minus 29 to plus 82 deg C).
4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 59 percent by volume and 71 percent by weight.
5. Color: White.
C. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Solvent based; suitable for indoor use on below ambient services.
D. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Solvent based; suitable for outdoor use on below ambient services.
2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 0.05 perm (0.033 metric perm) at 30-mil (0.8-
mm) dry film thickness.
3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 220 deg F (Minus 46 to plus 104 deg C).
4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 33 percent by volume and 46 percent by weight.
5. Color: White.
E. Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above ambient services.
2.5 SEALANTS
A. Joint Sealants:
C. ASJ Flashing Sealants, and Vinyl, PVDC, and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants:
1) Dow Chemical Company (The); Saran 540 Vapor Retarder Film and
Saran 560 Vapor Retarder Film.
1) Dow Chemical Company (The); Saran 540 Vapor Retarder Film and
Saran 560 Vapor Retarder Film.
A. Woven Glass-Fiber Fabric for Pipe Insulation: Approximately 2 oz./sq. yd. (68 g/sq. m) with a
thread count of 10 strands by 10 strands/sq. inch (4 strands by 4 strands/sq. mm) for covering
pipe and pipe fittings.
B. Woven Glass-Fiber Fabric for Equipment Insulation: Approximately 6 oz./sq. yd. (203 g/sq. m)
with a thread count of 5 strands by 5 strands/sq. inch (2 strands by 2 strands/sq. mm) for
covering equipment.
A. Woven Glass-Fiber Fabric: Comply with MIL-C-20079H, Type I, plain weave, and presized a
minimum of 8 oz./sq. yd. (271 g/sq. m).
A. Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I, unless otherwise indicated.
a. Shapes: 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows, tees, valves, flanges,
unions, reducers, end caps, soil-pipe hubs, traps, mechanical joints, and P-trap and
supply covers for lavatories.
C. Underground Direct-Buried Jacket: 125-mil- (3.2-mm-) thick vapor barrier and waterproofing
membrane consisting of a rubberized bituminous resin reinforced with a woven-glass fiber or
polyester scrim and laminated aluminum foil.
2.10 TAPES
A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive,
complying with ASTM C 1136.
B. FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive;
complying with ASTM C 1136.
C. PVC Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching field-applied PVC jacket with acrylic adhesive.
Suitable for indoor and outdoor applications.
2.11 SECUREMENTS
A. Bands:
2. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304; 0.015 inch (0.38
mm) thick, 1/2 inch (13 mm) wide with closed seal.
3. Aluminum: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005;
Temper H-14, 0.020 inch (0.51 mm) thick, 1/2 inch (13 mm) wide with closed seal.
4. Springs: Twin spring set constructed of stainless steel with ends flat and slotted to accept
metal bands. Spring size determined by manufacturer for application.
b. Baseplate: Perforated, galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch (0.76 mm) thick
by 2 inches (50 mm) square.
c. Spindle: Copper- or zinc-coated, low carbon steel, fully annealed, 0.106-inch-
(2.6-mm-) diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated.
d. Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Product with demonstrated
capability to bond insulation hanger securely to substrates indicated without
damaging insulation, hangers, and substrates.
b. Baseplate: Perforated, nylon sheet, 0.030 inch (0.76 mm) thick by 1-1/2 inches (38
mm) in diameter.
c. Spindle: Nylon, 0.106-inch- (2.6-mm-) diameter shank, length to suit depth of
insulation indicated, up to 2-1/2 inches (63 mm).
d. Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Product with demonstrated
capability to bond insulation hanger securely to substrates indicated without
damaging insulation, hangers, and substrates.
b. Baseplate: Galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch (0.76 mm) thick by 2 inches
(50 mm) square.
c. Spindle: Copper- or zinc-coated, low carbon steel, fully annealed, 0.106-inch-
(2.6-mm-) diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated.
d. Adhesive-backed base with a peel-off protective cover.
b. Protect ends with capped self-locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to
ensure permanent retention of cap in exposed locations.
1) GEMCO.
2) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.
a. C & F Wire.
b. Childers Products.
c. PABCO Metals Corporation.
d. RPR Products, Inc.
A. PVC Corner Angles: 30 mils (0.8 mm) thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch (25 by 25 mm), PVC
according to ASTM D 1784, Class 16354-C. White or color-coded to match adjacent surface.
B. Aluminum Corner Angles: 0.040 inch (1.0 mm) thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch (25 by 25 mm),
aluminum according to ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105 or 5005;
Temper H-14.
C. Stainless-Steel Corner Angles: 0.024 inch (0.61 mm) thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch (25 by 25
mm), stainless steel according to ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and other
conditions affecting performance of insulation application.
1. Verify that systems and equipment to be insulated have been tested and are free of
defects.
2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry.
3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will
adversely affect insulation application.
B. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be insulated. Before insulating, apply a
corrosion coating to insulated surfaces as follows:
1. Stainless Steel: Coat 300 series stainless steel with an epoxy primer 5 mils (0.127 mm)
thick and an epoxy finish 5 mils (0.127 mm) thick if operating in a temperature range
C. Coordinate insulation installation with the trade installing heat tracing. Comply with
requirements for heat tracing that apply to insulation.
D. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with
stainless-steel surfaces, use demineralized water.
A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces;
free of voids throughout the length of equipment and piping including fittings, valves, and
specialties.
B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required
for each item of equipment and pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules.
C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install
accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or
dry state.
D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.
E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.
H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with
adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers,
supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.
K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet
and dry film thicknesses.
4. Cover joints and seams with tape as recommended by insulation material manufacturer to
maintain vapor seal.
5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at
ends adjacent to pipe flanges and fittings.
M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal
thickness.
N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking
due to thermal movement.
O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas.
Extend patches at least 4 inches (100 mm) beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal
patches similar to butt joints.
1. Vibration-control devices.
2. Testing agency labels and stamps.
3. Nameplates and data plates.
4. Manholes.
5. Handholes.
6. Cleanouts.
3.4 PENETRATIONS
D. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated):
Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.
A. Mineral Fiber, Pipe and Tank Insulation Installation for Tanks and Vessels: Secure insulation
with adhesive and anchor pins and speed washers.
1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area,
for 100 percent coverage of tank and vessel surfaces.
2. Groove and score insulation materials to fit as closely as possible to equipment, including
contours. Bevel insulation edges for cylindrical surfaces for tight joints. Stagger end
joints.
3. Protect exposed corners with secured corner angles.
5. Secure each layer of insulation with stainless-steel or aluminum bands. Select band
material compatible with insulation materials.
6. Where insulation hangers on equipment and vessels are not permitted or practical and
where insulation support rings are not provided, install a girdle network for securing
insulation. Stretch prestressed aircraft cable around the diameter of vessel and make taut
with clamps, turnbuckles, or breather springs. Place one circumferential girdle around
equipment approximately 6 inches (150 mm) from each end. Install wire or cable
between two circumferential girdles 12 inches (300 mm) o.c. Install a wire ring around
each end and around outer periphery of center openings, and stretch prestressed aircraft
cable radially from the wire ring to nearest circumferential girdle. Install additional
circumferential girdles along the body of equipment or tank at a minimum spacing of 48
inches (1200 mm) o.c. Use this network for securing insulation with tie wire or bands.
7. Stagger joints between insulation layers at least 3 inches (75 mm).
8. Install insulation in removable segments on equipment access doors, manholes,
handholes, and other elements that require frequent removal for service and inspection.
9. Bevel and seal insulation ends around manholes, handholes, ASME stamps, and
nameplates.
10. For equipment with surface temperatures below ambient, apply mastic to open ends,
joints, seams, breaks, and punctures in insulation.
B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation Installation for Tanks and Vessels: Install insulation
over entire surface of tanks and vessels.
1. Fabricate metal boxes lined with insulation. Fit boxes around pumps and coincide box
joints with splits in pump casings. Fabricate joints with outward bolted flanges. Bolt
flanges on 6-inch (150-mm) centers, starting at corners. Install 3/8-inch- (10-mm-)
diameter fasteners with wing nuts. Alternatively, secure the box sections together using a
latching mechanism.
A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more
specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles.
1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties with
continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from
same material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly
against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular
surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is
uniform with adjoining pipe insulation.
3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same
material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt
each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with
adhesive.
4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same
material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe
insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe
diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets,
valve stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with
insulating cement.
5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same
material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe
insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe
diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating
cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and
replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable
insulation cover. For below ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor
barrier.
6. Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation.
Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe
insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker.
7. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a
mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below ambient services and a breather mastic for
above ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric-reinforcing mesh. Trowel the
mastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour.
8. For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket except for flexible elastomeric
and polyolefin, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and
unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation
facing using PVC tape.
9. Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "UNION."
Match size and color of pipe labels.
D. Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. Installation shall conform to the
following:
1. Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same
thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as adjoining pipe
insulation.
2. When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend insulation
from flanges or union long at least two times the insulation thickness over adjacent pipe
insulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover in place with stainless-
steel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket.
3. Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges except divide
the two-part section on the vertical center line of valve body.
4. When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of
mitered blocks wired to stainless-steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its attached
insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches (50 mm) over
adjacent pipe insulation on each side of valve. Fill space between flange or union cover
and pipe insulation with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating
cement applied in two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel second coat to a
smooth finish.
5. Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules, finish exposed
surfaces with a metal jacket.
1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when
available. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions.
2. When preformed insulation sections of insulation are not available, install mitered
sections of calcium silicate insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands.
3. Finish fittings insulation same as pipe insulation.
1. Install mitered segments of calcium silicate insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation
to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation.
2. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
3. Finish valve and specialty insulation same as pipe insulation.
1. Secure each layer of insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands without
deforming insulation materials.
2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions
with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant.
3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above ambient services, secure laps with
outward clinched staples at 6 inches (150 mm) o.c.
4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below ambient services, do not staple
longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation
material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant.
1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when
available. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions.
2. When preformed sections of insulation are not available, install mitered sections of
cellular-glass insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands.
A. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate
openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
1. Install preformed valve covers manufactured of same material as pipe insulation when
available.
1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten
bands without deforming insulation materials.
2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions
with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant.
3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above ambient surfaces, secure laps with
outward clinched staples at 6 inches (150 mm) o.c.
4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below ambient surfaces, do not staple
longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation
material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant.
1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when
available.
2. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered sections
of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation
materials with wire or bands.
1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when
available.
2. When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation to
valve body.
3. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without
disturbing insulation.
4. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
1. Secure each layer of insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands without
deforming insulation materials.
2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions
with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant.
3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above ambient services, secure laps with
outward clinched staples at 6 inches (150 mm) o.c.
4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets with vapor retarders on below ambient
services, do not staple longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as
recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and
flashing sealant.
1. Seal split-tube longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended
adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being
insulated.
1. Install cut sections of polyolefin pipe and sheet insulation to valve body.
2. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without
disturbing insulation.
3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties, and seal seams with manufacturer's
recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to
surface being insulated.
1. Secure each layer of insulation with tape or bands and tighten bands without deforming
insulation materials. Orient longitudinal joints between half sections in 3 and 9 o'clock
positions on the pipe.
2. For insulation with factory-applied jackets with vapor barriers, do not staple longitudinal
tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive or tape as recommended by insulation
material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic.
3. All insulation shall be tightly butted and free of voids and gaps at all joints. Vapor
barrier must be continuous. Before installing jacket material, install vapor-barrier
system.
A. Where glass-cloth jackets are indicated, install directly over bare insulation or insulation with
factory-applied jackets.
1. Draw jacket smooth and tight to surface with 2-inch (50-mm) overlap at seams and joints.
2. Embed glass cloth between two 0.062-inch- (1.6-mm-) thick coats of lagging adhesive.
3. Completely encapsulate insulation with coating, leaving no exposed insulation.
C. Where PVC jackets are indicated, install with 1-inch (25-mm) overlap at longitudinal seams and
end joints; for horizontal applications, install with longitudinal seams along top and bottom of
tanks and vessels. Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
1. Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead under lap and the
finish bead along seam and joint edge.
D. Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2-inch (50-mm) overlap at longitudinal seams
and end joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with
weatherproof sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless-
steel bands 12 inches (300 mm) o.c. and at end joints.
1. Apply three separate wraps of filament tape per insulation section to secure pipe
insulation to pipe prior to installation of PVDC jacket.
2. Wrap factory-presized jackets around individual pipe insulation sections with one end
overlapping the previously installed sheet. Install presized jacket with an approximate
overlap at butt joint of 2 inches (50 mm) over the previous section. Adhere lap seal using
adhesive or SSL, and then apply 1-1/4 circumferences of appropriate PVDC tape around
overlapped butt joint.
3. Continuous jacket can be spiral wrapped around a length of pipe insulation. Apply
adhesive or PVDC tape at overlapped spiral edge. When electing to use adhesives, refer
to manufacturer's written instructions for application of adhesives along this spiral edge
to maintain a permanent bond.
4. Jacket can be wrapped in cigarette fashion along length of roll for insulation systems with
an outer circumference of 33-1/2 inches (850 mm) or less. The 33-1/2-inch- (850-mm-)
circumference limit allows for 2-inch- (50-mm-) overlap seal. Using the length of roll
3.16 FINISHES
A. Equipment and Pipe Insulation with ASJ, Glass-Cloth, or Other Paintable Jacket Material:
Paint jacket with paint system identified below and as specified in Division 9 painting Sections.
1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer that is compatible with jacket
material and finish coat paint. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew proof.
B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of
insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.
C. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual
inspection of the completed Work.
A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
D. All insulation applications will be considered defective Work if sample inspection reveals
noncompliance with requirements.
A. Insulation materials and thicknesses are identified below. If more than one material is listed for
a type of equipment, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.
B. Insulate indoor and outdoor equipment in paragraphs below that is not factory insulated.
D. Domestic water, domestic chilled-water (potable), and domestic hot-water hydropneumatic tank
insulation shall be[ one of] the following:
E. Domestic water storage tank insulation shall be[ one of] the following:
A. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for
each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system,
selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.
2. NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32) and Larger: Insulation shall be the following:
1. NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32) and Smaller: Insulation shall be the following:
2. NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) and Larger: Insulation shall be the following:
E. Exposed Sanitary Drains, Domestic Water, Domestic Hot Water, and Stops for Plumbing
Fixtures for People with Disabilities:
F. Condensate and Equipment Drain Water below 60 Deg F (16 Deg C):
G. Floor Drains, Traps, and Sanitary Drain Piping within 10 Feet (3 m) of Drain Receiving
Condensate and Equipment Drain Water below 60 Deg F (16 Deg C):
A. Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory-applied jacket, install the
field-applied jacket over the factory-applied jacket.
B. If more than one material is listed, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.
C. Equipment, Concealed:
1. None.
2. PVC: 20 mils (0.5 mm) thick.
3. Aluminum, Smooth: 0.016 inch (0.41 mm) thick.
4. Painted Aluminum, Smooth: 0.016 inch (0.41 mm) thick.
5. Stainless Steel, Type 304,: 0.010 inch (0.25 mm) thick.
1. None.
2. PVC: 20 mils (0.5 mm) thick.
3. Aluminum, Smooth: 0.016 inch (0.41 mm) thick.
4. Painted Aluminum, Smooth: 0.016 inch (0.41 mm) thick.
E. Piping, Concealed:
1. None.
2. PVC: 20 mils (0.5 mm) thick.
3. Aluminum, Smooth: 0.016 inch (0.41 mm) thick.
4. Painted Aluminum, Smooth: 0.016 inch (0.41 mm) thick.
5. Stainless Steel, Type 304,: 0.010 inch (0.25 mm) thick.
F. Piping, Exposed:
1. None.
2. PVC: 20 mils (0.5 mm) thick.
3. Aluminum, Smooth: 0.016 inch (0.41 mm) thick.
4. Painted Aluminum, Smooth: 0.016 inch (0.41 mm) thick.
5. Stainless Steel, Type 304,: 0.010 inch (0.25 mm) thick.
A. For underground direct-buried piping applications, install underground direct-buried jacket over
insulation material.
HVAC INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Insulation Materials:
a. Flexible elastomeric.
b. Mineral fiber.
2. Insulating cements.
3. Adhesives.
4. Mastics.
5. Lagging adhesives.
6. Sealants.
7. Factory-applied jackets.
8. Field-applied fabric-reinforcing mesh.
9. Field-applied cloths.
10. Field-applied jackets.
11. Tapes.
12. Securements.
13. Corner angles.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 15 Section "Fire-Suppression Systems Insulation."
2. Division 15 Section "Plumbing Insulation."
3. Division 15 Section "Metal Ducts" for duct liners.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, thickness, and
jackets (both factory and field applied, if any).
B. LEED Submittal:
1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For adhesives and sealants, including printed statement
of VOC content.
1. Detail application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at hangers for each type of
insulation and hanger.
2. Detail attachment and covering of heat tracing inside insulation.
3. Detail insulation application at pipe expansion joints for each type of insulation.
4. Detail insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and specialties for each
type of insulation.
5. Detail removable insulation at piping specialties, equipment connections, and access
panels.
6. Detail application of field-applied jackets.
7. Detail application at linkages of control devices.
8. Detail field application for each equipment type.
E. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation
materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets, with requirements indicated. Include
dates of tests and test methods employed.
A. Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in
Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports."
B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application, duct
Installer for duct insulation application, and equipment Installer for equipment insulation
application. Before preparing piping and ductwork Shop Drawings, establish and maintain
clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and
for space required for maintenance.
1.7 SCHEDULING
A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after
installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have
satisfactory test results.
B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of
construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Comply with requirements in Part 3 schedule articles for where insulating materials shall be
applied.
C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less
than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.
D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable
according to ASTM C 795.
E. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing
process.
G. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.
Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II and ASTM C 1290, Type III with factory-applied FSK
jacket. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.
H. Mineral-Fiber Board Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.
Comply with ASTM C 612, Type IA or Type IB. For duct and plenum applications, provide
insulation with factory-applied FSK jacket. For equipment applications, provide insulation with
factory-applied FSK jacket. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-
Applied Jackets" Article.
2. Type I, 850 deg F Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.
Comply with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, with factory-applied ASJ-SSL. Factory-
applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.
J. Mineral-Fiber, Pipe Insulation Wicking System: Preformed pipe insulation complying with
ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, with absorbent cloth factory applied to the entire inside surface
of preformed pipe insulation and extended through the longitudinal joint to outside surface of
insulation under insulation jacket. Factory apply a white, polymer, vapor-retarder jacket with
self-sealing adhesive tape seam and evaporation holes running continuously along the
longitudinal seam, exposing the absorbent cloth.
K. Mineral-Fiber, Pipe and Tank Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting
resin. Semirigid board material with factory-applied FSK jacket complying with
ASTM C 1393, Type II or Type IIIA Category 2, or with properties similar to ASTM C 612,
Type IB. Nominal density is 2.5 lb/cu. ft. or more. Thermal conductivity (k-value) at 100
deg F is 0.29 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F or less. Factory-applied jacket requirements are
specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.
2.3 ADHESIVES
A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding
insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated.
2. For indoor applications, use adhesive that has a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
2. For indoor applications, use adhesive that has a VOC content of 80 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
D. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK and PVDC Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2,
Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.
2. For indoor applications, use adhesive that has a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
2. For indoor applications, use adhesive that has a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
2.4 MASTICS
A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with
MIL-C-19565C, Type II.
1. For indoor applications, use mastics that have a VOC content complying with the
requirements of SCAQMD rule 1168.
B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on below ambient
services.
2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96, Procedure B, 0.013 perm at 43-mil dry film
thickness.
3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F.
4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 59 percent by volume and 71 percent by weight.
5. Color: White.
C. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Solvent based; suitable for indoor use on below ambient services.
2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 0.05 perm at 35-mil dry film thickness.
3. Service Temperature Range: 0 to 180 deg F.
4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 44 percent by volume and 62 percent by weight.
5. Color: White.
D. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Solvent based; suitable for outdoor use on below ambient services.
2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 0.05 perm at 30-mil dry film thickness.
3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 220 deg F.
4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 33 percent by volume and 46 percent by weight.
5. Color: White.
E. Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above ambient services.
A. Description: Comply with MIL-A-3316C Class I, Grade A and shall be compatible with
insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
1. For indoor applications, use lagging adhesives that have a VOC content complying with
the requirements of SCAQMD rule 1168.
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
3. Fire-resistant, water-based lagging adhesive and coating for use indoors to adhere fire-
resistant lagging cloths over duct, equipment, and pipe insulation.
4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 180 deg F.
5. Color: White.
2.6 SEALANTS
A. Joint Sealants:
C. ASJ Flashing Sealants, and Vinyl, PVDC, and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants:
1) Dow Chemical Company (The); Saran 540 Vapor Retarder Film and
Saran 560 Vapor Retarder Film.
6. PVDC Jacket for Outdoor Applications: 6-mil- thick, white PVDC biaxially oriented
barrier film with a permeance at 0.01 perms when tested according to ASTM E 96 and
with a flame-spread index of 5 and a smoke-developed index of 25 when tested according
to ASTM E 84.
1) Dow Chemical Company (The); Saran 540 Vapor Retarder Film and
Saran 560 Vapor Retarder Film.
1) Dow Chemical Company (The); Saran 540 Vapor Retarder Film and
Saran 560 Vapor Retarder Film.
8. Vinyl Jacket: White vinyl with a permeance of 1.3 perms when tested according to
ASTM E 96, Procedure A, and complying with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B.
A. Woven Glass-Fiber Fabric for Pipe Insulation: Approximately 2 oz./sq. yd. with a thread count
of 10 strands by 10 strands/sq. inch for covering pipe and pipe fittings.
C. Woven Polyester Fabric: Approximately 1 oz./sq. yd. with a thread count of 10 strands by 10
strands/sq. inch, in a Leno weave, for duct, equipment, and pipe.
A. Woven Glass-Fiber Fabric: Comply with MIL-C-20079H, Type I, plain weave, and presized a
minimum of 8 oz./sq. yd..
A. Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Metal Jacket:
2. Aluminum Jacket: Comply with ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105 or 5005,
Temper H-14.
E. Self-Adhesive Outdoor Jacket: 60-mil- thick, laminated vapor barrier and waterproofing
membrane for installation over insulation located aboveground outdoors; consisting of a
rubberized bituminous resin on a crosslaminated polyethylene film covered with white
aluminum-foil facing.
F. PVDC Jacket for Indoor Applications: 4-mil- thick, white PVDC biaxially oriented barrier film
with a permeance at 0.02 perms when tested according to ASTM E 96 and with a flame-spread
index of 5 and a smoke-developed index of 20 when tested according to ASTM E 84.
G. PVDC Jacket for Outdoor Applications: 6-mil- thick, white PVDC biaxially oriented barrier
film with a permeance at 0.01 perms when tested according to ASTM E 96 and with a flame-
spread index of 5 and a smoke-developed index of 25 when tested according to ASTM E 84.
a. Dow Chemical Company (The); Saran 540 Vapor Retarder Film and Saran 560
Vapor Retarder Film.
2.11 TAPES
A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive,
complying with ASTM C 1136.
2. Width: 3 inches.
3. Thickness: 11.5 mils.
4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width.
5. Elongation: 2 percent.
6. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width.
7. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.
B. FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive;
complying with ASTM C 1136.
2. Width: 3 inches.
3. Thickness: 6.5 mils.
4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width.
5. Elongation: 2 percent.
6. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width.
7. FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape.
C. PVC Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching field-applied PVC jacket with acrylic adhesive.
Suitable for indoor and outdoor applications.
2. Width: 2 inches.
3. Thickness: 6 mils.
4. Adhesion: 64 ounces force/inch in width.
5. Elongation: 500 percent.
6. Tensile Strength: 18 lbf/inch in width.
2. Width: 2 inches.
3. Thickness: 3.7 mils.
4. Adhesion: 100 ounces force/inch in width.
5. Elongation: 5 percent.
6. Tensile Strength: 34 lbf/inch in width.
E. PVDC Tape for Indoor Applications: White vapor-retarder PVDC tape with acrylic adhesive.
2. Width: 3 inches.
3. Film Thickness: 4 mils.
4. Adhesive Thickness: 1.5 mils.
5. Elongation at Break: 145 percent.
6. Tensile Strength: 55 lbf/inch in width.
F. PVDC Tape for Outdoor Applications: White vapor-retarder PVDC tape with acrylic adhesive.
2. Width: 3 inches.
3. Film Thickness: 6 mils.
4. Adhesive Thickness: 1.5 mils.
5. Elongation at Break: 145 percent.
6. Tensile Strength: 55 lbf/inch in width.
2.12 SECUREMENTS
A. Bands:
2. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304 or Type 316; 0.015
inch thick, 1/2 inch wide with wing or closed seal.
b. Baseplate: Perforated, nylon sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 1-1/2 inches in diameter.
c. Spindle: Nylon, 0.106-inch- diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation
indicated, up to 2-1/2 inches.
d. Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Product with demonstrated
capability to bond insulation hanger securely to substrates indicated without
damaging insulation, hangers, and substrates.
b. Protect ends with capped self-locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to
ensure permanent retention of cap in exposed locations.
C. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch- wide, stainless steel or Monel.
a. C & F Wire.
b. Childers Products.
c. PABCO Metals Corporation.
d. RPR Products, Inc.
A. PVC Corner Angles: 30 mils thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch, PVC according to ASTM D 1784,
Class 16354-C. White or color-coded to match adjacent surface.
B. Aluminum Corner Angles: 0.040 inch thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch, aluminum according to
ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105 or 5005; Temper H-14.
C. Stainless-Steel Corner Angles: 0.024 inch thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch, stainless steel according
to ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304 or 316.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and other
conditions affecting performance of insulation application.
1. Verify that systems and equipment to be insulated have been tested and are free of
defects.
2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry.
3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will
adversely affect insulation application.
B. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be insulated. Before insulating, apply a
corrosion coating to insulated surfaces as follows:
C. Coordinate insulation installation with the trade installing heat tracing. Comply with
requirements for heat tracing that apply to insulation.
D. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with
stainless-steel surfaces, use demineralized water.
A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces;
free of voids throughout the length of equipment, ducts and fittings, and piping including
fittings, valves, and specialties.
B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required
for each item of equipment, duct system, and pipe system as specified in insulation system
schedules.
C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install
accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or
dry state.
D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.
E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.
H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with
adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers,
supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.
K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet
and dry film thicknesses.
4. Cover joints and seams with tape as recommended by insulation material manufacturer to
maintain vapor seal.
5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at
ends adjacent to duct and pipe flanges and fittings.
M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal
thickness.
N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking
due to thermal movement.
O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas.
Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar
to butt joints.
1. Vibration-control devices.
2. Testing agency labels and stamps.
3. Nameplates and data plates.
4. Manholes.
5. Handholes.
6. Cleanouts.
3.4 PENETRATIONS
D. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated):
Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.
1. Duct: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations that are not fire rated.
For penetrations through fire-rated assemblies, terminate insulation at fire damper sleeves
and externally insulate damper sleeve beyond floor to match adjacent duct insulation.
Overlap damper sleeve and duct insulation at least 2 inches.
2. Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations.
3. Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Comply with requirements in Division 7
Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems."
A. Mineral Fiber, Pipe and Tank Insulation Installation for Tanks and Vessels: Secure insulation
with adhesive and anchor pins and speed washers.
5. Secure each layer of insulation with stainless-steel or aluminum bands. Select band
material compatible with insulation materials.
6. Where insulation hangers on equipment and vessels are not permitted or practical and
where insulation support rings are not provided, install a girdle network for securing
insulation. Stretch prestressed aircraft cable around the diameter of vessel and make taut
with clamps, turnbuckles, or breather springs. Place one circumferential girdle around
equipment approximately 6 inches from each end. Install wire or cable between two
circumferential girdles 12 inches o.c. Install a wire ring around each end and around
outer periphery of center openings, and stretch prestressed aircraft cable radially from the
wire ring to nearest circumferential girdle. Install additional circumferential girdles along
the body of equipment or tank at a minimum spacing of 48 inches o.c. Use this network
for securing insulation with tie wire or bands.
7. Stagger joints between insulation layers at least 3 inches.
8. Install insulation in removable segments on equipment access doors, manholes,
handholes, and other elements that require frequent removal for service and inspection.
9. Bevel and seal insulation ends around manholes, handholes, ASME stamps, and
nameplates.
10. For equipment with surface temperatures below ambient, apply mastic to open ends,
joints, seams, breaks, and punctures in insulation.
B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation Installation for Tanks and Vessels: Install insulation
over entire surface of tanks and vessels.
A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more
specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles.
1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties with
continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from
same material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly
against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular
surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is
uniform with adjoining pipe insulation.
3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same
material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt
each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with
adhesive.
4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same
material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe
insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe
diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets,
valve stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with
insulating cement.
5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same
material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe
insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe
diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating
cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and
replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable
insulation cover. For below ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor
barrier.
6. Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation.
Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe
insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker.
7. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a
mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below ambient services and a breather mastic for
above ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric-reinforcing mesh. Trowel the
mastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour.
8. For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket except for flexible elastomeric
and polyolefin, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and
C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps,
test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes, vessels,
and equipment. Shape insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the
connection with insulating cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing
sealant.
D. Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. Installation shall conform to the
following:
1. Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same
thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as adjoining pipe
insulation.
2. When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend insulation
from flanges or union long at least two times the insulation thickness over adjacent pipe
insulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover in place with stainless-
steel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket.
3. Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges except divide
the two-part section on the vertical center line of valve body.
4. When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of
mitered blocks wired to stainless-steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its attached
insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches over adjacent pipe
insulation on each side of valve. Fill space between flange or union cover and pipe
insulation with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating cement applied
in two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel second coat to a smooth finish.
5. Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules, finish exposed
surfaces with a metal jacket.
A. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate
openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
1. Install preformed valve covers manufactured of same material as pipe insulation when
available.
2. When preformed valve covers are not available, install cut sections of pipe and sheet
insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow
valve operation without disturbing insulation.
3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with manufacturer's
recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to
surface being insulated.
1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten
bands without deforming insulation materials.
2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions
with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant.
3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above ambient surfaces, secure laps with
outward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c.
4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below ambient surfaces, do not staple
longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation
material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant.
1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when
available.
2. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered sections
of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation
materials with wire or bands.
E. Blanket Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation
pins.
1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area,
for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.
2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and
transitions.
3. Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head, capacitor-
discharge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as
follows:
a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along longitudinal
centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16
inches o.c.
b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, place pins 16 inches o.c. each
way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold
insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.
c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums.
d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation.
e. Impale insulation over pins and attach speed washers.
f. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with
insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation
facing.
4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous
unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with
insulation by removing 2 inches from 1 edge and 1 end of insulation segment. Secure
laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch outward-clinching staples, 1 inch o.c.
Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field-applied jacket, adhesive, vapor-barrier
mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions.
a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor-
barrier seal.
b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F at 18-foot
intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied in a Z-shaped
pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface.
Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to 2 times the
insulation thickness but not less than 3 inches.
5. Overlap unfaced blankets a minimum of 2 inches on longitudinal seams and end joints.
At end joints, secure with steel bands spaced a maximum of 18 inches o.c.
F. Board Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins.
1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area,
for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.
2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and
transitions.
3. Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head, capacitor-
discharge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as
follows:
a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along longitudinal
centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16
inches o.c.
b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, space pins 16 inches o.c. each
way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold
insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.
c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums.
d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation.
e. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with
insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation
facing.
4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous
unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with
insulation by removing 2 inches from 1 edge and 1 end of insulation segment. Secure
laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch outward-clinching staples, 1 inch o.c.
Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field-applied jacket, adhesive, vapor-barrier
mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions.
a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor-
barrier seal.
b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F at 18-foot
intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied in a Z-shaped
pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface.
Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to 2 times the
insulation thickness but not less than 3 inches.
5. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section
for each surface. Groove and score insulation to fit as closely as possible to outside and
inside radius of elbows. Install insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with
individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.
A. Where glass-cloth jackets are indicated, install directly over bare insulation or insulation with
factory-applied jackets.
1. Draw jacket smooth and tight to surface with 2-inch overlap at seams and joints.
2. Embed glass cloth between two 0.062-inch- thick coats of lagging adhesive.
3. Completely encapsulate insulation with coating, leaving no exposed insulation.
C. Where PVC jackets are indicated, install with 1-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end
joints; for horizontal applications, install with longitudinal seams along top and bottom of tanks
and vessels. Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
1. Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead under lap and the
finish bead along seam and joint edge.
D. Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end
joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof
sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless-steel bands 12
inches o.c. and at end joints.
1. Apply three separate wraps of filament tape per insulation section to secure pipe
insulation to pipe prior to installation of PVDC jacket.
2. Wrap factory-presized jackets around individual pipe insulation sections with one end
overlapping the previously installed sheet. Install presized jacket with an approximate
overlap at butt joint of 2 inches over the previous section. Adhere lap seal using adhesive
or SSL, and then apply 1-1/4 circumferences of appropriate PVDC tape around
overlapped butt joint.
3. Continuous jacket can be spiral wrapped around a length of pipe insulation. Apply
adhesive or PVDC tape at overlapped spiral edge. When electing to use adhesives, refer
to manufacturer's written instructions for application of adhesives along this spiral edge
to maintain a permanent bond.
3.10 FINISHES
A. Duct, Equipment, and Pipe Insulation with ASJ, Glass-Cloth, or Other Paintable Jacket
Material: Paint jacket with paint system identified below and as specified in Division 9 painting
Sections.
1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer that is compatible with jacket
material and finish coat paint. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew proof.
B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of
insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.
C. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual
inspection of the completed Work.
C. All insulation applications will be considered defective Work if sample inspection reveals
noncompliance with requirements.
1. Fibrous-glass ducts.
2. Metal ducts with duct liner of sufficient thickness to comply with energy code and
ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.
3. Factory-insulated flexible ducts.
4. Factory-insulated plenums and casings.
5. Flexible connectors.
6. Vibration-control devices.
7. Factory-insulated access panels and doors.
A. Concealed, Supply-Air Duct and Plenum Insulation: Mineral-fiber blanket, 1-1/2 inches thick
and 0.75-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.
B. Concealed, Return-Air Duct and Plenum Insulation: Mineral-fiber Mineral-fiber blanket, 1-1/2
inches thick and 0.75-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.
D. Concealed, Exhaust-Air Duct and Plenum Insulation: Mineral- Mineral-fiber blanket, 1-1/2
inches thick and 0.75-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.
E. Exposed, Supply-Air Duct and Plenum Insulation: Mineral-fiber Mineral-fiber blanket, 1-1/2
inches thick and 0.75-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.
F. Exposed, Return-Air Duct and Plenum Insulation: Mineral-fiber Mineral-fiber blanket, 1-1/2
inches thick and 0.75-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.
H. Exposed, Exhaust-Air Duct and Plenum Insulation: Mineral-fiber Mineral-fiber blanket, 1-1/2
inches thick and 0.75-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.
A. Insulation materials and thicknesses are identified below. If more than one material is listed for
a type of equipment, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.
B. Insulate indoor and outdoor equipment in paragraphs below that is not factory insulated.
C. Chillers: Insulate cold surfaces on chillers, including, but not limited to, evaporator bundles,
suction piping, compressor inlets, tube sheets, water boxes, and nozzles with one of the
following:
1. Mineral-Fiber Board: 1 inch thick and 2-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.
2. Mineral-Fiber Pipe and Tank: 1 inch thick.
D. Heat-exchanger (water-to-water for cooling service) insulation shall be one of the following:
1. Mineral-Fiber Board: 1 inch thick and 2-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.
2. Mineral-Fiber Pipe and Tank: 1 inch thick.
A. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for
each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system,
selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.
B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following:
B. Heating-Hot-Water Supply and Return, 200 Deg F and below: Insulation shall be the
following:
1. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe, Type I: 1 inch thick for pipe sizes less than or equal to
1-1/2 inches and 2 inches thick for pipe sizes greater than 1-1/2 inches.
D. Condenser Water: Mineral Fiber, Performed Pipe, Type I: 1 inch thick for pipe sizes less than
or equal to 1-1/2 inches and 1-1/2 inches thick for pipe sizes greater than 1-1/2 inches.
A. Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory-applied jacket, install the
field-applied jacket over the factory-applied jacket.
B. If more than one material is listed, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.
E. Equipment, Exposed, Larger Than 48 Inches in Diameter or with Flat Surfaces Larger Than 72
Inches:
1. Aluminum, Stucco Embossed with 1-1/4-Inch- Deep Corrugations: 0.032 inches thick.
F. Piping, Exposed:
1. PVC: 20 mils thick.
A. Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory-applied jacket, install the
field-applied jacket over the factory-applied jacket.
B. If more than one material is listed, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.
C. Piping, Exposed:
VALVES
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Division 2 piping Sections for general-duty and specialty valves for site construction
piping.
2. Division 13 fire-suppression piping and fire pump Sections for fire-protection valves.
3. Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification" for valve tags and charts.
4. Division 15 Section "HVAC Instrumentation and Controls" for control valves and
actuators.
5. Division 15 piping Sections for specialty valves applicable to those Sections only.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of valve indicated. Include body, seating, and trim materials;
valve design; pressure and temperature classifications; end connections; arrangement;
dimensions; and required clearances. Include list indicating valve and its application. Include
A. ASME Compliance: ASME B31.1 for power piping valves and ASME B31.9 for building
services piping valves.
1. Exceptions: Domestic hot- and cold-water, sanitary waste, and storm drainage piping
valves unless referenced.
B. ASME Compliance for Ferrous Valves: ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for dimension and
design criteria.
C. Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use
handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following
requirements apply for product selection:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the
manufacturers specified.
B. Bronze Valves: NPS 2 and smaller with threaded ends, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Brass Valves: NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller with Vic Press 304™ ends, unless otherwise
indicated.
D. Ferrous Valves: NPS 2-1/2 and larger with flanged or grooved ends, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system
pressures and temperatures.
G. Valve Actuators:
1. Chainwheel: For attachment to valves, of size and mounting height, as indicated in the
"Valve Installation" Article in Part 3.
2. Gear Drive: For quarter-turn valves NPS 8 and larger.
3. Handwheel: For valves other than quarter-turn types.
4. Lever Handle: For quarter-turn valves NPS 6 and smaller, except plug valves.
5. Wrench: For plug valves with square heads. Furnish Owner with 1 wrench for every 10
plug valves, for each size square plug head.
I. Valve Flanges: ASME B16.1 for cast-iron valves, ASME B16.5 for steel valves, and
ASME B16.24 for bronze valves.
1. Caution: Use solder with melting point below 840 deg F for angle, check, gate, and
globe valves; below 421 deg F for ball valves.
2. Threaded: With threads according to ASME B1.20.1.
A. Available Manufacturers:
B. Manufacturers:
D. One-Piece, Copper-Alloy Ball Valves: Brass or bronze body with chrome-plated bronze ball,
PTFE or TFE seats, and 400-psig minimum CWP rating.
E. Two-Piece, Copper-Alloy Ball Valves: Bronze body with regular-port, chrome-plated bronze
ball; PTFE or TFE seats; and 600-psig minimum CWP rating and blowout-proof stem.
F. Three-Piece, Copper-Alloy Ball Valves: Bronze body with regular-port, chrome-plated bronze
ball; PTFE or TFE seats; and 600-psig minimum CWP rating and blowout-proof stem.
A. Available Manufacturers:
B. Manufacturers:
C. Ferrous-Alloy Butterfly Valves, General: MSS SP-67, Type I, for tight shutoff, with disc and
lining suitable for potable water, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Flangeless, 150-psig CWP Rating, Ferrous-Alloy Butterfly Valves: Wafer type with one-piece
stem.
E. Single-Flange, 150-psig CWP Rating, Ferrous-Alloy Butterfly Valves: Wafer-lug type with
one-piece stem.
F. Flanged, 150-psig CWP Rating, Ferrous-Alloy Butterfly Valves: Flanged-end type with one-
piece stem.
G. Grooved-End, 300-psig CWP Rating, Ferrous-Alloy Butterfly Valves: Ductile-iron. body with
grooved or shouldered ends in accordance with ASME/AWWA C606.
B. Each valve shall have two 1/4” NPT brass metering ports with check valves and gasketted caps
located on both sides of valve seat. Two additional 1/4” NPT connections with brass plugs are
to be provided on the opposite side of the metering ports for use as drain connections. Drain
connections and metering ports are to be interchangeable to allow for measurement flexibility
when valves are installed in tight locations.
C. Valves are to be of the “Y” pattern, modified, equal percentage globe style and provide three
functions: 1) Precise flow measurement 2) Precision flow balancing 3) Positive drip-tight
shut-off valve shall provide multi-turn, 360° adjustment with a micrometer type indicator lo-
cated on valve handwheel. Valve handwheel shall have hidden memory feature which will pro-
vide a means for locking the valve position after the ystem is balanced. 90° turn adjustable
valves are not acceptable.
1. Valve body shall be bronze with ultra-high strength engineered resin plug. The plug
shall have precision-contoured channels to distribute flow uniformly across valve seat.
Bronze stem and high strength resin hardwheel and sleeve. Valve shall have a minimum
of four full 360° handwheel turns.
2. The valve shall be installed with flow in the direction of the arrow on the valve body and
installed at least five pipe diameters downstream from any fitting, and at least ten pipe
diameters downstream from any pump. Two pipe diameters downstream from the valve
should be free of any fittings. When installed, easy and unobstructed access to the valve
handwheel and metering ports for adjustment and measurement are to be provided.
Mounting of valve in piping must prevent sediment build-up in metering ports.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine piping system for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other
conditions affecting performance.
1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove
special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and
handling.
C. Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats made
accessible by such operations.
D. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.
E. Examine grooved ends for conditions that might cause leakage. Ends should be free from
indentations or projections in the area from valve end to groove.
F. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper
size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material composition is
suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage.
A. Refer to piping Sections for specific valve applications. If valve applications are not indicated,
use the following:
1. Ball Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: One-piece, 400-psig CWP rating, copper alloy, full port.
2. Butterfly Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged, 150-psig CWP rating, ferrous alloy,
with EPDM liner.
3. Grooved-End, Ductile-Iron Butterfly Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: 175-psig CWP
rating.
E. Heating Water Piping (up to 230°F): Use the following types of valves:
1. Ball Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: One-piece, 400-psig CWP rating, copper alloy, full port.
2. Butterfly Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flangeless, 150-psig CWP rating, ferrous alloy,
with EPDM liner.
3. Grooved-End, Ductile-Iron Butterfly Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: 300-psig CWP
rating.
F. Select valves, except wafer and flangeless types, with the following end connections:
1. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 and Smaller: Solder-joint or threaded ends, except provide
valves with threaded ends for heating hot water.
2. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged or threaded ends.
3. For Copper Tubing, NPS 5 and Larger: Flanged ends.
4. For Grooved-End, Copper Tubing and Steel Piping: Valve ends may be grooved. Do not
use for steam or steam condensate piping.
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Install valves with grooved joint couplings, unions or flanges at each piece of equipment
arranged to allow service, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.
C. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping joint
construction.
B. Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with keyed coupling housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts
according to coupling and fitting manufacturer's written instructions. All grooved couplings,
fittings, valves, and specialties shall be of the same manufacturer. Grooving tools shall be of
the same manufacturer as the grooved components. Grooved ends shall be clean and free from
indentations, projections, and roll marks in the area from pipe end to groove. Grooved coupling
manufacturer’s factory trained field representative shall provide on-site training for contractor’s
field personnel in the proper use of grooving tools, application of groove, and installation of
grooved piping products. Factory trained representative shall periodically inspect the product
installation. Contractor shall remove and replace any improperly installed products.
C. Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flux; ASTM B 32, lead-free-
alloy solder; and ASTM B 828 procedure, unless otherwise indicated.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but
before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 2 water distribution piping Sections for general-duty and specialty valves for
site construction piping.
2. Division 15 plumbing piping Sections for specialty valves applicable to those Sections
only.
3. Division 15 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for valve tags
and schedules.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Source Limitations for Valves: Obtain each type of valve from single source from single
manufacturer.
B. ASME Compliance:
1. ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and design criteria.
2. ASME B31.1 for power piping valves.
3. ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves.
C. Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use
handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
B. Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system
pressures and temperatures.
1. Gear Actuator: For quarter-turn valves NPS 8 (DN 200) and larger.
2. Handwheel: For valves other than quarter-turn types.
3. Handlever: For quarter-turn valves NPS 6 (DN 150) and smaller.
4. Wrench: For plug valves with square heads. Furnish Owner with 1 wrench for every 5
plug valves, for each size square plug-valve head.
5. Chainwheel: Device for attachment to valve handwheel, stem, or other actuator; of size
and with chain for mounting height, as indicated in the "Valve Installation" Article.
E. Valves in Insulated Piping: With 2-inch (50-mm) stem extensions and the following features:
F. Valve-End Connections:
a. Hammond Valve.
b. Milwaukee Valve Company.
2. Description:
2. Description:
2. Description:
2. Description:
2. Description:
2. Description:
2. Description:
2. Description:
2. Description:
2. Description:
A. 200 CWP, Iron, Single-Flange Butterfly Valves with EPDM Seat and Aluminum-Bronze Disc:
2. Description:
B. 200 CWP, Iron, Single-Flange Butterfly Valves with NBR Seat and Aluminum-Bronze Disc:
2. Description:
C. 200 CWP, Iron, Single-Flange Butterfly Valves with EPDM Seat and Ductile-Iron Disc:
2. Description:
D. 200 CWP, Iron, Single-Flange Butterfly Valves with NBR Seat and Ductile-Iron Disc:
2. Description:
E. 200 CWP, Iron, Single-Flange Butterfly Valves with EPDM Seat and Stainless-Steel Disc:
2. Description:
F. 200 CWP, Iron, Single-Flange Butterfly Valves with NBR Seat and Stainless-Steel Disc:
2. Description:
2. Description:
2. Description:
2. Description:
2. Description:
2. Description:
2. Description:
a. Hammond Valve.
b. Kitz Corporation.
c. Milwaukee Valve Company.
d. NIBCO INC.
e. Powell Valves.
f. Red-White Valve Corporation.
g. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
2. Description:
2. Description:
2. Description:
2. Description:
2. Description:
2. Description:
2. Description:
2. Description:
2. Description:
2. Description:
2. Description:
2. Description:
2. Description:
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove
special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and
handling.
B. Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats made
accessible by such operations.
C. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.
D. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper
size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material composition is
suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage.
A. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service,
maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but
before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs.
a. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Bronze swing check valves with bronze disc.
b. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger for Domestic Water: Iron swing check valves with
lever and weight or with spring or iron, center-guided, metal-seat check valves.
c. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger for Sanitary Waste and Storm Drainage: Iron
swing check valves with lever and weight or spring.
B. If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are not available, the same types of valves
with higher SWP classes or CWP ratings may be substituted.
C. Select valves, except wafer types, with the following end connections:
1. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded ends except where solder-
joint valve-end option is indicated in valve schedules below.
2. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): Flanged ends except where
threaded valve-end option is indicated in valve schedules below.
3. For Copper Tubing, NPS 5 (DN 125) and Larger: Flanged ends.
4. For Steel Piping, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded ends.
5. For Steel Piping, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): Flanged ends except where
threaded valve-end option is indicated in valve schedules below.
6. For Steel Piping, NPS 5 (DN 125) and Larger: Flanged ends.
7. For Grooved-End Copper Tubing and Steel Piping: Valve ends may be grooved.
1. Bronze and Brass Valves: May be provided with solder-joint ends instead of threaded
ends.
2. Bronze Angle Valves: Class 125, bronze disc.
3. Ball Valves: Two piece, full port, brass or bronze with brass stainless-steel trim.
4. Bronze Swing Check Valves: Class 125, bronze disc.
5. Bronze Gate Valves: Class 125, NRS.
6. Bronze Globe Valves: Class 125, bronze disc.
1. Iron Valves, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): May be provided with threaded
ends instead of flanged ends.
2. Iron Ball Valves: Class 150.
3. Iron, Single-Flange Butterfly Valves: 200 CWP, EPDM seat, aluminum-bronze
stainless-steel disc.
4. Iron, Grooved-End Butterfly Valves: 175 CWP.
5. Iron Swing Check Valves: Class 125, metal seats.
6. Iron Swing Check Valves with Closure Control: Class 125, lever and spring].
7. Iron, Grooved-End Swing Check Valves: 300 CWP.
8. Iron, Center-Guided Check Valves: Class 125, , metal seat.
9. Iron, Plate-Type Check Valves: Class 125; single plate; metal seat.
10. Iron Gate Valves: Class 125, OS&Y.
11. Iron Globe Valves: Class 125.
1. Bronze and Brass Valves: May be provided with solder-joint ends instead of threaded
ends.
2. Bronze Angle Valves: Class 125, bronze disc.
3. Ball Valves: Two piece, full port, brass or bronze with stainless-steel trim.
4. Bronze Swing Check Valves: Class 125, bronze disc.
5. Bronze Gate Valves: Class 125, NRS.
6. Bronze Globe Valves: Class 125, bronze disc.
1. Iron Valves, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): May be provided with threaded
ends instead of flanged ends.
2. Iron Ball Valves: Class 150.
3. Iron Swing Check Valves: Class 125, metal seats.
4. Iron Swing Check Valves with Closure Control: Class 125, lever and spring.
5. Iron, Grooved-End Swing Check Valves: 300 CWP.
6. Iron Gate Valves: Class 125, OS&Y.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Thermometers.
2. Gages.
3. Test plugs.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 2 Section "Water Distribution" for domestic and fire-protection water service
meters outside the building.
2. Division 15 Section "Domestic Water Piping" for domestic and fire-protection water
service meters inside the building.
3. Division 15 Section "Facility Natural-Gas Piping" for gas meters.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated; include performance curves.
B. Shop Drawings: Schedule for thermometers and gages indicating manufacturer's number, scale
range, and location for each.
C. Product Certificates: For each type of thermometer and gage, signed by product manufacturer.
F. Window: Plastic.
G. Connector: Adjustable type, 180 degrees in vertical plane, 360 degrees in horizontal plane, with
locking device.
H. Stem: Copper-plated steel, aluminum, or brass for thermowell installation and of length to suit
installation.
I. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range or plus or minus 1 scale division to maximum of
1.5 percent of range.
J. Connector: Adjustable type, 180 degrees in vertical plane, 360 degrees in horizontal plane, with
locking device.
L. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range or plus or minus 1 scale division to maximum of
1.5 percent of range.
C. Case: Dry type, drawn steel or cast aluminum, 4-1/2-inch (114-mm) diameter with holes for
panel mounting.
I. Ring: Metal.
L. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range or plus or minus 1 scale division to maximum of
1.5 percent of range.
L. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range or plus or minus 1 scale division to maximum of
1.5 percent of range.
2.5 THERMOWELLS
D. Description: Pressure-tight, socket-type metal fitting made for insertion into piping and of type,
diameter, and length required to hold thermometer.
1. Case: Dry type, drawn steel or cast aluminum, 4-1/2-inch (114-mm) diameter with Insert
other for panel mounting.
2. Pressure-Element Assembly: Bourdon tube, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Pressure Connection: Brass, NPS 1/4 (DN 8), bottom-outlet type unless back-outlet type
is indicated.
4. Movement: Mechanical, with link to pressure element and connection to pointer.
5. Dial: Satin-faced, nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings.
6. Pointer: Red or other dark-color metal.
7. Window: Glass or plastic.
8. Ring: Metal.
9. Accuracy: Grade A, plus or minus 1 percent of middle half scale.
E. Pressure-Gage Fittings:
C. Description: Corrosion-resistant brass or stainless-steel body with core inserts and gasketed and
threaded cap, with extended stem for units to be installed in insulated piping.
D. Minimum Pressure and Temperature Rating: 500 psig at 200 deg F (3450 kPa at 93 deg C).
1. Insert material for water service at 20 to 200 deg F (minus 7 to plus 93 deg C) shall be
CR.
2. Insert material for water service at minus 30 to plus 275 deg F (minus 35 to plus 136
deg C) shall be EPDM.
F. Test Kit: Furnish one test kit(s) containing one pressure gage and adaptor, one thermometer(s),
and carrying case. Pressure gage, adapter probes, and thermometer sensing elements shall be of
diameter to fit test plugs and of length to project into piping.
1. Pressure Gage: Small bourdon-tube insertion type with 2- to 3-inch- (51- to 76-mm-)
diameter dial and probe. Dial range shall be 0 to 200 psig (0 to 1380 kPa).
2. Low-Range Thermometer: Small bimetallic insertion type with 1- to 2-inch- (25- to 51-
mm-) diameter dial and tapered-end sensing element. Dial ranges shall be 25 to 125
deg F (minus 4 to plus 52 deg C).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
1. Domestic Hot Water: 30 to 180 deg F, with 2-degree scale divisions (Minus 1 to plus 82
deg C, with 1-degree scale divisions).
2. Domestic Cold Water: 0 to 100 deg F, with 2-degree scale divisions (Minus 18 to plus 38
deg C, with 1-degree scale divisions).
3.3 INSTALLATIONS
B. Install remote-mounting dial thermometers on panel, with tubing connecting panel and
thermometer bulb supported to prevent kinks. Use minimum tubing length.
C. Install thermowells with socket extending a minimum of 2 inches (51 mm) into fluid and in
vertical position in piping tees where thermometers are indicated.
D. Install direct-mounting pressure gages in piping tees with pressure gage located on pipe at most
readable position.
F. Install needle-valve and snubber fitting in piping for each pressure gage.
J. Install thermometers and gages adjacent to machines and equipment to allow service and
maintenance for thermometers, gages, machines, and equipment.
K. Adjust faces of thermometers and gages to proper angle for best visibility.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Under-building slab and aboveground domestic water pipes, tubes, fittings, and
specialties inside the building.
2. Encasement for piping.
3. Specialty valves.
4. Flexible connectors.
5. Water meters furnished by utility company for installation by Contractor.
6. Escutcheons.
7. Sleeves and sleeve seals.
8. Wall penetration systems.
B. Related Section:
1. Division 2 Section "Water Distribution" for water-service piping outside the building
from source to the point where water-service piping enters the building.
A. Seismic Performance: Domestic water piping and support and installation shall withstand
effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
1. Specialty valves.
2. Transition fittings.
3. Dielectric fittings.
4. Flexible connectors.
5. Backflow preventers and vacuum breakers.
6. Escutcheons.
B. LEED Submittal:
1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For solvent cements and adhesive primers, including
printed statement of VOC content.
D. Coordination Drawings: For piping in equipment rooms and other congested areas, drawn to
scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input
from Installers of the items involved:
1. Fire-suppression-water piping.
2. Domestic water piping.
3. HVAC hydronic piping.
A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.
B. Comply with NSF 14 for plastic, potable domestic water piping and components.
C. Comply with NSF 61 for potable domestic water piping and components.
A. Interruption of Existing Water Service: Do not interrupt water service to facilities occupied by
Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging
to provide temporary water service according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Construction Manager Owner no fewer than two days in advance of proposed
interruption of water service.
2. Do not proceed with interruption of water service without Construction Manager's
Owner's written permission.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.
A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting
materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes.
A. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type M (ASTM B 88M, Type C) water tube, drawn temper.
b. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Wrought-copper fitting with EPDM-rubber O-ring
seal in each end.
c. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): Cast-bronze or wrought-copper fitting
with EPDM-rubber O-ring seal in each end.
1) NVent LLC.
1) Anvil International.
2) Victaulic Company.
B. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B) water tube, annealed temper.
b. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Wrought-copper fitting with EPDM-rubber O-ring
seal in each end.
c. NPS 3 and NPS 4 (DN 80 and DN 100): Cast-bronze or wrought-copper fitting
with EPDM-rubber O-ring seal in each end.
A. Mechanical-Joint, Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, with mechanical-joint bell and plain spigot
end unless grooved or flanged ends are indicated.
a. Glands, Gaskets, and Bolts: AWWA C111, ductile- or gray-iron glands, rubber
gaskets, and steel bolts.
B. Push-on-Joint, Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, with push-on-joint bell and plain spigot end
unless grooved or flanged ends are indicated.
1) Anvil International.
2) Victaulic Company.
A. Galvanized-Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, , Standard Weight. Include ends
matching joining method.
1) Anvil International.
2) Victaulic Company.
B. CPVC Piping System: ASTM D 2846/D 2846M, SDR 11, pipe and socket fittings.
C. CPVC Tubing System: ASTM D 2846/D 2846M, SDR 11, tube and socket fittings.
A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick or
ASME B16.21, nonmetallic and asbestos free, unless otherwise indicated; full-face or ring type
unless otherwise indicated.
B. Metal, Pipe-Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated.
C. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to
ASTM B 813.
D. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-
duty brazing unless otherwise indicated.
E. Solvent Cements for Joining CPVC Piping and Tubing: ASTM F 493.
1. Use CPVC solvent cement that has a VOC content of 490 g/L or less when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
2. Use adhesive primer that has a VOC content of 550 g/L or less when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
F. Solvent Cements for Joining PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to
ASTM F 656.
1. Use PVC solvent cement that has a VOC content of 510 g/L or less when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
2. Use adhesive primer that has a VOC content of 550 g/L or less when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
G. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gaskets, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping
system manufacturer unless otherwise indicated.
B. Form: Tube.
D. Color: Natural.
A. Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping"
for general-duty metal valves.
B. Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for
balancing valves, drain valves, backflow preventers, and vacuum breakers.
2. Description:
2. Description:
2. Description:
a. Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa) at 73 deg F (23 deg C).
b. Body Material: CPVC.
c. Body Design: Lug or wafer type.
d. Seat: EPDM rubber.
e. Seals: PTFE or EPDM-rubber O-rings.
f. Disc: CPVC.
g. Stem: Stainless steel.
h. Handle: Lever.
2. Description:
a. Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa) at 73 deg F (23 deg C).
b. Body Material: CPVC.
c. Body Design: Union-type ball check.
2. Description:
a. Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa) at 73 deg F (23 deg C).
b. Body Material: CPVC.
c. Body Design: Nonrising stem.
d. End Connections for Valves NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Socket.
e. End Connections for Valves NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): Flanged.
f. Gate and Stem: Plastic.
g. Seals: EPDM rubber.
h. Handle: Wheel.
A. General Requirements:
A. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials or ferrous material
body with separating nonconductive insulating material suitable for system fluid, pressure, and
temperature.
B. Dielectric Unions:
2. Description:
a. Pressure Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa) at 180 deg F (82 deg C).
b. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.
C. Dielectric Flanges:
2. Description:
D. Dielectric-Flange Kits:
2. Description:
E. Dielectric Couplings:
a. Calpico, Inc.
b. Lochinvar Corporation.
2. Description:
a. Galvanized-steel coupling.
b. Pressure Rating: 300 psig (2070 kPa) at 225 deg F (107 deg C).
c. End Connections: Female threaded.
d. Lining: Inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic.
F. Dielectric Nipples:
2. Description:
A. General: Manufactured ceiling, floor, and wall escutcheons and floor plates.
C. One Piece, Deep Pattern: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with chrome-plated finish.
E. Split Casting, Cast Brass: Polished, chrome-plated finish with concealed hinge and setscrew.
F. Split Plate, Stamped Steel: Chrome-plated finish with concealed hinge, spring clips.
2.14 SLEEVES
A. Cast-Iron Wall Pipes: Fabricated of cast iron, and equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with
plain ends and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated.
C. Molded-PE Sleeves: Reusable, PE, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth outer surface with nailing
flange for attaching to wooden forms.
D. Molded-PVC Sleeves: Permanent, with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.
F. Galvanized-Steel-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc-
coated, with plain ends.
G. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include
clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing.
B. Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, used to fill annular
space between pipe and sleeve.
1. Sealing Elements: EPDM-rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include
type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.
2. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel.
3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, with corrosion-resistant coating, of length
required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements.
1. SIGMA.
B. Description: Wall-sleeve assembly, consisting of housing and gland, gaskets, and pipe sleeve.
2.17 GROUT
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EARTHWORK
A. Comply with requirements in Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for excavating, trenching, and
backfilling.
A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of domestic
water piping. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction
loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to
layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.
B. Install copper tubing under building slab according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."
C. Install ductile-iron piping under building slab with restrained joints according to AWWA C600
and AWWA M41.
E. Install shutoff valve, hose-end drain valve, strainer, pressure gage, and test tee with valve,
inside the building at each domestic water service entrance. Comply with requirements in
Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" for pressure gages and
Division 15 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for drain valves and strainers.
H. Install domestic water piping level with 0.25 percent slope downward toward drain and plumb.
I. Rough-in domestic water piping for water-meter installation according to utility company's
requirements.
K. Install piping concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants
unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.
L. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right
angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated
otherwise.
M. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal, and
coordinate with other services occupying that space.
N. Install piping adjacent to equipment and specialties to allow service and maintenance.
S. Install PEX piping with loop at each change of direction of more than 90 degrees.
T. Install unions in copper tubing at final connection to each piece of equipment, machine, and
specialty.
U. Install pressure gages on suction and discharge piping from each plumbing pump and packaged
booster pump. Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages for
Plumbing Piping" for pressure gages.
W. Install thermometers on inlet and outlet piping from each water heater. Comply with
requirements in Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" for thermometers.
A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before
assembly.
C. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut
threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore
full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
D. Brazed Joints: Join copper tube and fittings according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook,"
"Brazed Joints" Chapter.
E. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux to end of tube. Join copper tube and
fittings according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."
F. Pressure-Sealed Joints: Join copper tube and pressure-seal fittings with tools recommended by
fitting manufacturer.
G. Copper-Tubing, Push-on Joints: Clean end of tube. Measure insertion depth with
manufacturer's depth gage. Join copper tube and push-on-joint fittings by inserting tube to
measured depth.
I. Copper-Tubing Grooved Joints: Roll groove end of tube. Assemble coupling with housing,
gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Join copper tube and grooved-end fittings according to
AWWA C606 for roll-grooved joints.
J. Ductile-Iron-Piping Grooved Joints: Cut groove end of pipe. Assemble coupling with housing,
gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Join ductile-iron pipe and grooved-end fittings according to
AWWA C606 for ductile-iron-pipe, cut-grooved joints.
K. Steel-Piping Grooved Joints: Cut or roll groove end of pipe. Assemble coupling with housing,
gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Join steel pipe and grooved-end fittings according to AWWA C606
for steel-pipe grooved joints.
L. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate asbestos-free, nonmetallic gasket material in size, type, and
thickness suitable for domestic water service. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to
ASME B31.9.
M. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings
according to the following:
1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent
cements. Apply primer.
2. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 2846M Appendix.
3. PVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855.
O. Dissimilar-Material Piping Joints: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials of both
piping systems.
B. Install shutoff valve close to water main on each branch and riser serving plumbing fixtures or
equipment, on each water supply to equipment, and on each water supply to plumbing fixtures
that do not have supply stops. Use ball or gate valves for piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller.
Use butterfly or gate valves for piping NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.
C. Install drain valves for equipment at base of each water riser, at low points in horizontal piping,
and where required to drain water piping. Drain valves are specified in Division 15 Section
"Domestic Water Piping Specialties."
1. Hose-End Drain Valves: At low points in water mains, risers, and branches.
2. Stop-and-Waste Drain Valves: Instead of hose-end drain valves where indicated.
E. Install calibrated balancing valves in each hot-water circulation return branch and discharge side
of each pump and circulator. Set calibrated balancing valves partly open to restrict but not stop
flow. Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties"
for calibrated balancing valves.
C. Transition Fittings in Aboveground Domestic Water PipingNPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller:
Plastic-to-metal transition unions.
A. Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing.
B. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Use dielectric couplings or nipples.
C. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): Use dielectric flanges.
D. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 5 (DN 125) and Larger: Use dielectric flange kits.
A. Install flexible connectors in suction and discharge piping connections to each domestic water
pump and in suction and discharge manifold connections to each domestic water booster pump.
A. Rough-in domestic water piping, and install water meters according to utility company's
requirements.
C. Install water meters according to AWWA M6, utility company's requirements, and the
following:
D. Install compound-type water meters with shutoff valves on water-meter inlet and outlet and on
valved bypass around meter. Support meters, valves, and piping on brick or concrete piers.
E. Install fire-service water meters with shutoff valves on water-meter inlet and outlet and on full-
size valved bypass around meter. Support meter, valves, and piping on brick or concrete piers.
F. Install remote registration system according to standards of utility company and of authorities
having jurisdiction.
A. Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for
Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for seismic-restraint devices.
B. Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping
and Equipment" for pipe hanger and support products and installation.
a. 100 Feet (30 m) and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.
b. Longer Than 100 Feet (30 m): MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers.
c. Longer Than 100 Feet (30 m) If Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.
3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet (30 m) or Longer: MSS Type 44,
pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze.
4. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.
D. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, to a minimum of 3/8 inch
(10 mm).
E. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum
rod diameters:
1. NPS 3/4 (DN 20) and Smaller: 60 inches (1500 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod.
2. NPS 1 and NPS 1-1/4 (DN 25 and DN 32): 72 inches (1800 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm)
rod.
3. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2 (DN 40 and DN 50): 96 inches (2400 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm)
rod.
4. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65): 108 inches (2700 mm) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod.
5. NPS 3 to NPS 5 (DN 80 to DN 125): 10 feet (3 m) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod.
6. NPS 6 (DN 150): 10 feet (3 m) with 5/8-inch (16-mm) rod.
G. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum
rod diameters:
1. NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32) and Smaller: 84 inches (2100 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod.
2. NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40): 108 inches (2700 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod.
3. NPS 2 (DN 50): 10 feet (3 m) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod.
4. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65): 11 feet (3.4 m) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod.
5. NPS 3 and NPS 3-1/2 (DN 80 and DN 90): 12 feet (3.7 m) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod.
6. NPS 4 and NPS 5 (DN 100 and DN 125): 12 feet (3.7 m) with 5/8-inch (16-mm) rod.
7. NPS 6 (DN 150): 12 feet (3.7 m) with 3/4-inch (19-mm) rod.
8. NPS 8 to NPS 12 (DN 200 to DN 300): 12 feet (3.7 m) with 7/8-inch (22-mm) rod.
H. Install supports for vertical steel piping every 15 feet (4.5 m).
I. Install vinyl-coated hangers for CPVC piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing
and minimum rod diameters:
1. NPS 1 (DN 25) and Smaller: 36 inches (900 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod.
2. NPS 1-1/4 to NPS 2 (DN 32 to DN 50): 48 inches (1200 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm)
rod.
3. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 3-1/2 (DN 65 to DN 90): 48 inches (1200 mm) with 1/2-inch (13-mm)
rod.
4. NPS 4 and NPS 5 (DN 100 and DN 125): 48 inches (1200 mm) with 5/8-inch (16-mm)
rod.
5. NPS 6 (DN 150): 48 inches (1200 mm) with 3/4-inch (19-mm) rod.
6. NPS 8 (DN 200): 48 inches (1200 mm) with 7/8-inch (22-mm) rod.
J. Install supports for vertical CPVC piping every 60 inches (1500 mm) for NPS 1 (DN 25) and
smaller, and every 72 inches (1800 mm) for NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32) and larger.
K. Install vinyl-coated hangers for PEX piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing
and minimum rod diameters:
1. NPS 1 (DN 25) and Smaller: 32 inches (815 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod.
L. Install hangers for vertical PEX piping every 48 inches (1200 mm).
M. Install vinyl-coated hangers for PVC piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing
and minimum rod diameters:
1. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: 48 inches (1200 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod.
2. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 3-1/2 (DN 65 to DN 90): 48 inches (1200 mm) with 1/2-inch (13-mm)
rod.
3. NPS 4 and NPS 5 (DN 100 and DN 125): 48 inches (1200 mm) with 5/8-inch (16-mm)
rod.
4. NPS 6 (DN 150): 48 inches (1200 mm) with 3/4-inch (19-mm) rod.
N. Install supports for vertical PVC piping every 48 inches (1200 mm).
O. Support piping and tubing not listed in this article according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's
written instructions.
3.10 CONNECTIONS
B. Install piping adjacent to equipment and machines to allow service and maintenance.
C. Connect domestic water piping to exterior water-service piping. Use transition fitting to join
dissimilar piping materials.
D. Connect domestic water piping to water-service piping with shutoff valve; extend and connect
to the following:
1. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One piece, deep pattern.
2. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One piece, cast brass
with polished chrome-plated finish stamped steel with spring clips.
3. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One piece, cast brass with
polished chrome-plated finish One piece or split plate, stamped steel with set screw.
4. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One piece, cast brass with rough-brass finish
stamped steel with spring clips.
5. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One piece, cast brass stamped steel with set screw or
spring clips.
6. Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: One-piece floor plate.
A. General Requirements: Install sleeves for pipes and tubes passing through penetrations in
floors, partitions, roofs, and walls.
C. Permanent sleeves are not required for holes formed by removable PE sleeves.
D. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces unless otherwise indicated.
E. Install sleeves in new partitions, slabs, and walls as they are built.
F. For interior wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation
using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements
in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for joint sealants.
G. For exterior wall penetrations above grade, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe using
joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements in
Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for joint sealants.
H. For exterior wall penetrations below grade, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe using
wall penetration systems specified in this Section.
I. Seal space outside of sleeves in concrete slabs and walls with grout.
J. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear space between
sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation unless otherwise indicated.
1. Sleeves for Piping Passing through Concrete Floor Slabs: Steel pipe.
2. Sleeves for Piping Passing through Concrete Floor Slabs of Mechanical Equipment Areas
or Other Wet Areas: Steel pipe.
a. PVC pipe sleeves for pipes smaller than NPS 6 (DN 150).
b. Galvanized-steel sheet sleeves for pipes NPS 6 (DN 150) and larger.
c. Exception: Sleeves are not required for water supply tubes and waste pipes for
individual plumbing fixtures if escutcheons will cover openings.
4. Sleeves for Piping Passing through Concrete Roof Slabs: Steel pipe.
a. Steel pipe sleeves for pipes smaller than NPS 6 (DN 150).
b. Cast-iron wall pipe sleeves for pipes NPS 6 (DN 150) and larger.
c. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space
between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation when sleeve seals are used.
d. Do not use sleeves when wall penetration systems are used.
a. Steel pipe sleeves for pipes smaller than NPS 6 (DN 150).
b. Galvanized-steel sheet sleeves for pipes NPS 6 (DN 150) and larger.
L. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors
at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Comply with requirements
in Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for firestop materials and
installations.
A. Install sleeve seals in sleeves in exterior concrete walls at water-service piping entries into
building.
B. Select type and number of sealing elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in
center of sleeve. Assemble sleeve seal components and install in annular space between pipe
and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and
make watertight seal.
B. Assemble wall penetration system components with sleeve pipe. Install so that end of sleeve
pipe and face of housing are flush with wall. Adjust locking devices to secure sleeve pipe in
housing.
3.15 IDENTIFICATION
1. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it has been inspected and
approved by authorities having jurisdiction.
2. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least one day before
inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having
jurisdiction:
3. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass tests or
inspections, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.
4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having
jurisdiction.
C. Piping Tests:
1. Fill domestic water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air bound
and that piping is full of water.
2. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been
altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit a separate
report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.
3. Leave new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water piping uncovered and
unconcealed until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or
concealed before it was tested.
4. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig (345 kPa) above operating
pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test
source and allow to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute
defects that must be repaired.
5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping or portion thereof until
satisfactory results are obtained.
6. Prepare reports for tests and for corrective action required.
D. Domestic water piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
3.17 ADJUSTING
5. Remove plugs used during testing of piping and for temporary sealing of piping during
installation.
6. Remove and clean strainer screens. Close drain valves and replace drain plugs.
7. Remove filter cartridges from housings and verify that cartridges are as specified for
application where used and are clean and ready for use.
8. Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation.
3.18 CLEANING
A. Clean and disinfect potable and non-potable domestic water piping as follows:
1. Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or
repaired before using.
2. Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction; if
methods are not prescribed, use procedures described in either AWWA C651 or
AWWA C652 or follow procedures described below:
a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at
outlets.
b. Fill and isolate system according to either of the following:
1) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 50 ppm
(50 mg/L) of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours.
2) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 200
ppm (200 mg/L) of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for three hours.
c. Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water coming from
system after the standing time.
d. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat
procedures if biological examination shows contamination.
1. Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or
repaired before using.
2. Use purging procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or; if methods are
not prescribed, follow procedures described below:
a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at
outlets.
b. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat
procedures if biological examination shows contamination.
A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used
in applications below unless otherwise indicated.
B. Flanges and unions may be used for aboveground piping joints unless otherwise indicated.
C. Fitting Option: Extruded-tee connections and brazed joints may be used on aboveground
copper tubing.
D. Under-building-slab, domestic water, building service piping, NPS 3 (DN 80) and smaller, shall
be the following:
1. Soft copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B); copper pressure-seal
fittings; and pressure-sealed joints.
1. Soft copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B); wrought-copper solder-
joint fittings; and brazed joints.
2. Mechanical-joint, ductile-iron pipe; standard- pattern mechanical-joint fittings; and
mechanical joints.
3. Push-on-joint, ductile-iron pipe; standard- pattern push-on-joint fittings; and gasketed
joints.
4. Plain-end, ductile-iron pipe; grooved-joint, ductile-iron-pipe appurtenances; and grooved
joints.
F. Under-building-slab, domestic water piping, NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller, shall be the following:
1. Hard or soft copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B); copper
pressure-seal-joint fittings; and pressure-sealed joints.
G. Aboveground domestic water piping, NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller, shall be the following:
1. Galvanized-steel pipe and nipples; galvanized, gray-iron threaded fittings; and threaded
joints.
2. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type M (ASTM B 88M, Type C); cast- copper solder-
joint fittings; and soldered joints.
3. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type M (ASTM B 88M, Type C); copper pressure-seal-
joint fittings; and pressure-sealed joints.
4. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type M (ASTM B 88M, Type C); copper push-on-joint
fittings; and push-on joints.
5. CPVC, Schedule 40 pipe; CPVC, Schedule 40 socket fittings; and solvent-cemented
joints.
6. CPVC, Schedule 80 pipe; CPVC, Schedule 80 threaded fittings; and threaded joints.
H. Aboveground domestic water piping, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100), shall be the
following:
1. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type M (ASTM B 88M, Type C); cast- copper solder-
joint fittings; and soldered joints.
2. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type M (ASTM B 88M, Type C); copper pressure-seal-
joint fittings; and pressure-sealed joints.
3. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type M (ASTM B 88M, Type C); grooved-joint copper-
tube appurtenances; and grooved joints.
4. Galvanized-steel pipe and nipples; galvanized, gray-iron threaded fittings; and threaded
joints.
5. Galvanized-steel pipe; grooved-joint, galvanized-steel-pipe appurtenances; and grooved
joints.
6. CPVC, Schedule 40 pipe; CPVC, Schedule 40 socket fittings; and solvent-cemented
joints.
7. CPVC, Schedule 80 pipe; CPVC, Schedule 80 threaded fittings; and threaded joints.
I. Aboveground domestic water piping, NPS 5 to NPS 8 (DN 125 to DN 200), shall be the
following:
1. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type M (ASTM B 88M, Type C); cast- copper solder-
joint fittings; and soldered joints.
2. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type M (ASTM B 88M, Type C); grooved-joint copper-
tube appurtenances; and grooved joints.
3. Galvanized-steel pipe and nipples; galvanized, gray-iron threaded fittings; and threaded
joints.
4. Galvanized-steel pipe; grooved-joint, galvanized-steel-pipe appurtenances; and grooved
joints.
5. CPVC, Schedule 40 pipe; CPVC, Schedule 40 socket fittings; and solvent-cemented
joints.
6. CPVC, Schedule 80 pipe; CPVC, Schedule 80 threaded fittings; and threaded joints.
A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the
following requirements apply:
1. Shutoff Duty: Use ball or gate valves for piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller. Use
butterfly, ball, or gate valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.
2. Throttling Duty: Use ball or globe valves for piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller. Use
butterfly or ball valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.
3. Hot-Water Circulation Piping, Balancing Duty: Memory-stop balancing valves.
4. Drain Duty: Hose-end drain valves.
B. Use check valves to maintain correct direction of domestic water flow to and from equipment.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Vacuum breakers.
2. Backflow preventers.
3. Water pressure-reducing valves.
4. Balancing valves.
5. Temperature-actuated water mixing valves.
6. Strainers.
7. Outlet boxes.
8. Hose stations.
9. Hose bibbs.
10. Wall hydrants.
11. Ground hydrants.
12. Post hydrants.
13. Drain valves.
14. Water hammer arresters.
15. Air vents.
16. Trap-seal primer valves.
17. Trap-seal primer systems.
1. Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages" for thermometers, pressure gages, and flow
meters in domestic water piping.
2. Division 15 Section "Domestic Water Piping" for water meters.
3. Division 15 Section "Medical Plumbing Fixtures" for thermostatic mixing valves for sitz
baths, thermostatic mixing-valve assemblies for hydrotherapy equipment, and outlet
boxes for dialysis equipment.
4. Division 15 Section "Emergency Plumbing Fixtures" for water tempering equipment.
5. Division 15 Section "Drinking Fountains and Water Coolers" for water filters for water
coolers.
6. Division 15 Section "Water Filtration Equipment" for water filters in domestic water
piping.
A. Minimum Working Pressure for Domestic Water Piping Specialties: 125 psig (860 kPa), unless
otherwise indicated.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For domestic water piping specialties to include in
emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
B. NSF Compliance:
1. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials," for plastic
domestic water piping components.
2. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; Sections 1
through 9."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
a. Ames Co.
b. Cash Acme.
c. Conbraco Industries, Inc.
d. FEBCO; SPX Valves & Controls.
e. Rain Bird Corporation.
f. Toro Company (The); Irrigation Div.
a. Ames Co.
b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.
c. FEBCO; SPX Valves & Controls.
d. Flomatic Corporation.
e. Toro Company (The); Irrigation Div.
f. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
a. Cash Acme.
b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.
c. FEBCO; SPX Valves & Controls.
d. Honeywell Water Controls.
e. Legend Valve.
f. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
g. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div.
a. Ames Co.
b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.
c. FEBCO; SPX Valves & Controls.
d. Flomatic Corporation.
e. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div.
a. Valves: Ball type with threaded ends on inlet and outlet ofNPS 2 (DN 50) and
smaller; outside screw and yoke gate-type with flanged ends on inlet and outlet of
NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.
b. Air-Gap Fitting: ASME A112.1.2, matching backflow-preventer connection.
a. Cash Acme.
b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.
c. FEBCO; SPX Valves & Controls.
d. Legend Valve.
e. Mueller Co.; Water Products Div.
f. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
g. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div.
a. Ames Co.
b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.
c. FEBCO; SPX Valves & Controls.
d. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
e. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div.
a. Valves: Outside screw and yoke gate-type with flanged ends on inlet and outlet.
b. Bypass: With displacement-type water meter, shutoff valves, and reduced-
pressure backflow preventer.
4. Description: Factory calibrated, with gages, fittings, hoses, and carrying case with test-
procedure instructions.
A. Water Regulators:
a. Cash Acme.
b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.
c. Honeywell Water Controls.
d. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
e. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div.
3. Body: Bronze with chrome-plated finish for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; cast iron with
interior lining complying with AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved for NPS 2-1/2 and
NPS 3 (DN 65 and DN 80).
4. Valves for Booster Heater Water Supply: Include integral bypass.
5. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; flanged for NPS 2-1/2 and
NPS 3 (DN 65 and DN 80).
a. Size:
b. Pattern: Angle-valve design.
c. Trim: Stainless steel.
7. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; flanged for NPS 2-1/2
(DN 65) and larger.
A. Y-Pattern Strainers:
1. Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa) minimum, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Body: Bronze for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; cast iron with interior lining complying
with AWWA C550 or FDA-approved, epoxy coating and for NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and
larger.
3. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller;flanged for NPS 2-1/2
(DN 65) and larger.
4. Screen: Stainless steel with round perforations, unless otherwise indicated.
5. Perforation Size:
A. Hose Bibbs:
a. Josam Company.
b. MIFAB, Inc.
c. Prier Products, Inc.
d. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.
e. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.
f. Watts Drainage Products Inc.
g. Woodford Manufacturing Company.
h. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation.
i. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.
a. AMTROL, Inc.
b. Josam Company.
c. MIFAB, Inc.
d. PPP Inc.
e. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc.
f. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.
g. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.
h. Watts Drainage Products Inc.
i. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.
1. Body: Bronze.
2. Pressure Rating: 125-psig (860-kPa) minimum pressure rating at 140 deg F (60 deg C).
3. Float: Replaceable, corrosion-resistant metal.
4. Mechanism and Seat: Stainless steel.
5. Size: NPS 1/2 (DN 15) minimum inlet.
6. Inlet and Vent Outlet End Connections: Threaded.
a. MIFAB, Inc.
b. PPP Inc.
c. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc.
d. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.
e. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
3. Standard: ASSE 1044, lavatory P-trap with NPS 3/8 (DN 10) minimum, trap makeup
connection.
4. Size: NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32) minimum.
5. Material: Chrome-plated, cast brass.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for piping joining
materials, joint construction, and basic installation requirements.
B. Install backflow preventers in each water supply to mechanical equipment and systems and to
other equipment and water systems that may be sources of contamination. Comply with
authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Install water regulators with inlet and outlet shutoff valves and bypass with memory-stop
balancing valve. Install pressure gages on inlet and outlet.
D. Install water control valves with inlet and outlet shutoff valves and bypass with globe valve.
Install pressure gages on inlet and outlet.
F. Install temperature-actuated water mixing valves with check stops or shutoff valves on inlets
and with shutoff valve on outlet.
G. Install Y-pattern strainers for water on supply side of each water pressure-reducing valve, and
pump.
K. Install air vents at high points of water piping. Install drain piping and discharge onto floor
drain.
L. Install supply-type, trap-seal primer valves with outlet piping pitched down toward drain trap a
minimum of 1 percent, and connect to floor-drain body, trap, or inlet fitting. Adjust valve for
proper flow.
M. Install drainage-type, trap-seal primer valves as lavatory trap with outlet piping pitched down
toward drain trap a minimum of 1 percent, and connect to floor-drain body, trap, or inlet fitting.
N. Install trap-seal primer systems with outlet piping pitched down toward drain trap a minimum of
1 percent, and connect to floor-drain body, trap, or inlet fitting. Adjust system for proper flow.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping and specialties.
B. Distinguish among multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety
and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations, in addition to
identifying unit. Nameplates and signs are specified in Division 15 Section "Mechanical
Identification."
B. Remove and replace malfunctioning domestic water piping specialties and retest as specified
above.
3.5 ADJUSTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following for soil, waste, and vent piping inside the building:
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working
pressure, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: 10-foot head of water (30 kPa).
2. Sanitary Sewer, Force-Main Piping: 50 psig (345 kPa).
1.5 SUBMITTALS
B. LEED Submittal:
1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For solvent cements and adhesive primers, including
printed statement of VOC content.
C. Shop Drawings:
1. Design Calculations: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer for selecting
seismic restraints.
2. Sovent Drainage System: Include plans, elevations, sections, and details.
A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.
B. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Systems Components and Related Materials," for plastic
piping components. Include marking with "NSF-dwv" for plastic drain, waste, and vent piping;
"NSF-drain" for plastic drain piping; "NSF-tubular" for plastic continuous waste piping; and
"NSF-sewer" for plastic sewer piping.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and joining
materials.
C. Calking Materials: ASTM B 29, pure lead and oakum or hemp fiber.
a. Manufacturers:
1) ANACO.
2) Fernco, Inc.
3) Ideal Div.; Stant Corp.
4) Mission Rubber Co.
5) Tyler Pipe; Soil Pipe Div.
a. Manufacturers:
1) ANACO.
2) Clamp-All Corp.
3) Ideal Div.; Stant Corp.
4) Mission Rubber Co.
5) Tyler Pipe; Soil Pipe Div.
a. Manufacturers:
1. Manufacturers:
1. Copper Drainage Fittings: ASME B16.23, cast copper or ASME B16.29, wrought
copper, solder-joint fittings.
B. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Types L and M (ASTM B 88M, Types B and C), water tube,
drawn temper.
C. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B), water tube, annealed temper.
1. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665, socket type, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste,
and vent patterns.
1. Use PVC solvent cement that has a VOC content of 510 g/L or less when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
2. Use adhesive primer that has a VOC content of 550 g/L or less when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
A. Flexible, Nonpressure Pipe Couplings: Comply with ASTM C 1173, elastomeric, sleeve-type,
reducing or transition pattern. Include shear ring, ends of same sizes as piping to be joined, and
corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.
1. Manufacturers:
2. Sleeve Materials:
B. Shielded Nonpressure Pipe Couplings: ASTM C 1460, elastomeric or rubber sleeve with full-
length, corrosion-resistant outer shield and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and
tightening mechanism on each end.
1. Manufacturers:
1. Manufacturers:
a. ANACO.
D. Pressure Pipe Couplings: AWWA C219 metal, sleeve-type same size as, with pressure rating at
least equal to, and ends compatible with, pipes to be joined.
1. Manufacturers:
E. Flexible Ball Joints: Ductile-iron fitting with combination of flanged and mechanical-joint ends
complying with AWWA C110 or AWWA C153. Include gasketed ball-joint section and
ductile-iron gland, rubber gasket, and steel bolts.
1. Manufacturers:
G. Wall-Penetration Fittings: Compound, ductile-iron coupling fitting with sleeve and flexing
sections for up to 20-degree deflection, gaskets, and restrained-joint ends complying with
AWWA C110 or AWWA C153. Include AWWA C111, ductile-iron glands, rubber gaskets,
and steel bolts.
1. Manufacturers:
a. SIGMA Corp.
B. Form: tube.
C. Color: natural.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXCAVATION
A. Flanges and unions may be used on aboveground pressure piping, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Aboveground, soil and waste piping NPS 4 (DN 100) and smaller shall be the following:
1. Service class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints.
2. Hubless cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; heavy-duty shielded, stainless-steel couplings;
and hubless-coupling joints.
C. Aboveground, soil and waste piping NPS 5 (DN 125) and larger shall be the following:
1. Service class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints.
2. Hubless cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; standard, shielded, stainless-steel couplings; and
hubless-coupling joints.
D. Aboveground, vent piping NPS 4 (DN 100) and smaller shall be the following:
1. Service class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints.
2. Hubless cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; standard, shielded, stainless-steel couplings; and
hubless-coupling joints.
3. Copper DWV tube, copper drainage fittings, and soldered joints.
a. Option for Vent Piping, NPS 2-1/2 and NPS 3-1/2 (DN 65 and DN 90): Hard
copper tube, Type M (Type C); copper pressure fittings; and soldered joints.
E. Underground, soil, waste, and vent piping NPS 4 (DN 100) and smaller shall be the following:
F. Underground, soil and waste piping NPS 5 (DN 125) and larger shall be the following:
G. Aboveground sanitary-sewage force mains NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2 (DN 40 and DN 50) shall be
the following:
1. Hard copper tube, Type L (Type B); copper pressure fittings; and soldered joints.
2. Steel pipe, pressure fittings, and threaded joints.
H. Aboveground sanitary-sewage force mains NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 6 (DN 65 to DN 150) shall be the
following:
1. Hard copper tube, Type L (Type B); copper pressure fittings; and soldered joints.
2. Steel pipe, pressure fittings, and threaded joints.
3. Grooved-end steel pipe, grooved-joint system fittings and couplings, and grooved joints.
A. Sanitary sewer piping outside the building is specified in Division 2 Section "Sanitary
Sewerage."
D. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building sanitary drains connect to building
sanitary sewers.
E. Install cleanout fitting with closure plug inside the building in sanitary force-main piping.
G. Install underground, ductile-iron, force-main piping according to AWWA C600. Install buried
piping inside the building between wall and floor penetrations and connection to sanitary sewer
piping outside the building with restrained joints. Anchor pipe to wall or floor. Install thrust-
block supports at vertical and horizontal offsets.
H. Install underground, copper, force-main tubing according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."
J. Install cast-iron sleeve with water stop and mechanical sleeve seal at each service pipe
penetration through foundation wall. Select number of interlocking rubber links required to
make installation watertight. Sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals are specified in Division 15
Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods."
K. Install wall-penetration fitting at each service pipe penetration through foundation wall. Make
installation watertight.
L. Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook,"
Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."
M. Make changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent piping using appropriate
branches, bends, and long-sweep bends. Sanitary tees and short-sweep 1/4 bends may be used
on vertical stacks if change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. Use long-turn,
double Y-branch and 1/8-bend fittings if 2 fixtures are installed back to back or side by side
with common drain pipe. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines. Do not
change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers and
reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction
of flow is prohibited.
O. Install soil and waste drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes, unless
otherwise indicated:
1. Building Sanitary Drain: 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3
(DN 80) and smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 4
(DN 100) and larger.
2. Horizontal Sanitary Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow.
3. Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack.
P. Install engineered soil and waste drainage and vent piping systems as follows:
1. Combination Waste and Vent: Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Sovent Drainage System: Comply with ASSE 1043 and sovent fitting manufacturer's
written installation instructions.
3. Reduced-Size Venting: Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction.
Q. Sleeves are not required for cast-iron soil piping passing through concrete slabs-on-grade if slab
is without membrane waterproofing.
R. Install ABS soil and waste drainage and vent piping according to ASTM D 2661.
S. Install PVC soil and waste drainage and vent piping according to ASTM D 2665.
T. Install underground PVC soil and waste drainage piping according to ASTM D 2321.
U. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by
authorities having jurisdiction.
A. Basic piping joint construction requirements are specified in Division 15 Section "Basic
Mechanical Materials and Methods."
B. Join hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil piping with gasket joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil
Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for compression joints.
C. Join hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil piping with calked joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil
Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for lead and oakum calked joints.
D. Join hubless cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI 310 and CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and
Fittings Handbook" for hubless-coupling joints.
F. Grooved Joints: Assemble joint with keyed coupling, gasket, lubricant, and bolts according to
coupling and fitting manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Install gate or full-port ball valve for piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller.
2. Install gate valve for piping NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.
C. Check Valves: Install swing check valve, between pump and shutoff valve, on each sewage
pump discharge.
1. Horizontal Piping: Horizontal backwater valves. Use normally closed type, unless
otherwise indicated.
2. Floor Drains: Drain outlet backwater valves, unless drain has integral backwater valve.
3. Install backwater valves in accessible locations.
4. Backwater valve are specified in Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties."
B. Pipe hangers and supports are specified in Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports." Install
the following:
a. 100 Feet (30 m) and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.
b. Longer Than 100 Feet (30 m): MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers.
c. Longer Than 100 Feet (30 m), if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.
3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet (30 m) or Longer: MSS Type 44,
pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze.
4. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.
E. Rod diameter may be reduced 1 size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch (10-mm) minimum
rods.
F. Install hangers for cast-iron soil piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and
minimum rod diameters:
1. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2 (DN 40 and DN 50): 60 inches (1500 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm)
rod.
2. NPS 3 (DN 80): 60 inches (1500 mm) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod.
3. NPS 4 and NPS 5 (DN 100 and DN 125): 60 inches (1500 mm) with 5/8-inch (16-mm)
rod.
4. NPS 6 (DN 150): 60 inches (1500 mm) with 3/4-inch (19-mm) rod.
5. NPS 8 to NPS 12 (DN 200 to DN 300): 60 inches (1500 mm) with 7/8-inch (22-mm)
rod.
G. Install supports for vertical cast-iron soil piping every 15 feet (4.5 m).
H. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum
rod diameters:
1. NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32): 84 inches (2100 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod.
2. NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40): 108 inches (2700 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod.
3. NPS 2 (DN 50): 10 feet (3 m) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod.
4. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65): 11 feet (3.4 m) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod.
5. NPS 3 (DN 80): 12 feet (3.7 m) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod.
6. NPS 4 and NPS 5 (DN 100 and DN 125): 12 feet (3.7 m) with 5/8-inch (16-mm) rod.
7. NPS 6 (DN 150): 12 feet (3.7 m) with 3/4-inch (19-mm) rod.
8. NPS 8 to NPS 12 (DN 200 to DN 300): 12 feet (3.7 m) with 7/8-inch (22-mm) rod.
I. Install supports for vertical steel piping every 15 feet (4.5 m).
J. Install hangers for stainless-steel piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and
minimum rod diameters:
1. NPS 2 (DN 50): 84 inches (2100 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod.
2. NPS 3 (DN 80): 96 inches (2400 mm) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod.
3. NPS 4 (DN 100): 108 inches (2700 mm) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod.
4. NPS 6 (DN 150): 10 feet (3 m) with 5/8-inch (16-mm) rod.
L. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum
rod diameters:
1. NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32): 72 inches (1800 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod.
2. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2 (DN 40 and DN 50): 96 inches (2400 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm)
rod.
3. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65): 108 inches (2700 mm) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod.
N. Install hangers for PVC piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum
rod diameters:
1. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2 (DN 40 and DN 50): 48 inches (1200 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm)
rod.
2. NPS 3 (DN 80): 48 inches (1200 mm) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod.
3. NPS 4 and 5 (DN 100 and 125): 48 inches (1200 mm) with 5/8-inch (16-mm) rod.
4. NPS 6 (DN 150): 48 inches (1200 mm) with 3/4-inch (19-mm) rod.
5. NPS 8 to NPS 12 (DN 200 to DN 300): 48 inches (1200 mm) with 7/8-inch (22-mm)
rod.
O. Install supports for vertical PVC piping every 48 inches (1200 mm).
P. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written
instructions.
3.7 CONNECTIONS
B. Connect soil and waste piping to exterior sanitary sewerage piping. Use transition fitting to join
dissimilar piping materials.
1. Plumbing Fixtures: Connect drainage piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than
required by plumbing code.
2. Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment: Connect atmospheric vent piping in sizes indicated,
but not smaller than required by authorities having jurisdiction.
3. Plumbing Specialties: Connect drainage and vent piping in sizes indicated, but not
smaller than required by plumbing code.
4. Equipment: Connect drainage piping as indicated. Provide shutoff valve, if indicated,
and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for connections NPS 2-1/2
(DN 65) and larger.
A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection
must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection,
make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.
C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Test sanitary drainage and vent piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction
or, in absence of published procedures, as follows:
1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been
altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report
for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.
2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced drainage and vent
piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed
before it was tested.
3. Roughing-in Plumbing Test Procedure: Test drainage and vent piping, except outside
leaders, on completion of roughing-in. Close openings in piping system and fill with
water to point of overflow, but not less than 10-foot head of water (30 kPa). From 15
minutes before inspection starts to completion of inspection, water level must not drop.
Inspect joints for leaks.
4. Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After plumbing fixtures have been set and traps
filled with water, test connections and prove they are gastight and watertight. Plug vent-
stack openings on roof and building drains where they leave building. Introduce air into
piping system equal to pressure of 1-inch wg (250 Pa). Use U-tube or manometer
inserted in trap of water closet to measure this pressure. Air pressure must remain
constant without introducing additional air throughout period of inspection. Inspect
plumbing fixture connections for gas and water leaks.
5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until
satisfactory results are obtained.
6. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.
E. Test force-main piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in absence
of published procedures, as follows:
1. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced force-main piping
until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before
it was tested.
2. Cap and subject piping to static-water pressure of 50 psig (345 kPa) above operating
pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test
source and allow to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute
defects that must be repaired.
3.9 CLEANING
B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris
and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.
C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.
3.10 PROTECTION
A. Exposed PVC Piping: Protect plumbing vents exposed to sunlight with two coats of water-
based latex paint.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Backwater valves.
2. Cleanouts.
3. Floor drains.
4. Trench drains.
5. Air-admittance valves.
6. Roof flashing assemblies.
7. Through-penetration firestop assemblies.
8. Miscellaneous sanitary drainage piping specialties.
9. Flashing materials.
10. Solids interceptors.
1. Division 15 Section "Storm Drainage Piping Specialties" for trench drains for storm
water, channel drainage systems for storm water, roof drains, and catch basins.
2. Division 15 Section "Plumbing Fixtures" for hair interceptors.
3. Division 15 Section "Medical Plumbing Fixtures" for plaster sink interceptors.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for frost-resistant vent terminals.
1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of
assembled components or on calculation.
a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of
any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified."
b. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of
any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the
unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."
2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate
and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based
and their installation requirements.
D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For drainage piping specialties to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals.
A. Drainage piping specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing
agency.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
C. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials," for plastic sanitary
piping specialty components.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete,
reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3.
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.2 CLEANOUTS
4. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M for cast iron for cleanout test tee.
5. Size: Same as connected drainage piping
6. Body Material: Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe test tee as required to match connected
piping.
7. Closure: Countersunk, brass plug.
8. Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout size.
9. Closure: Stainless-steel plug with seal.
A. Trench Drains:
a. Ayrlett, LLC.
b. Durgo, Inc.
c. Oatey.
d. ProSet Systems Inc.
e. RectorSeal.
f. Studor, Inc.
3. Standard: ASSE 1051, Type A for single fixture or Type B for branch piping.
4. Housing: Plastic.
5. Operation: Mechanical sealing diaphragm.
6. Size: Same as connected fixture or branch vent piping.
a. Durgo, Inc.
b. Oatey.
c. Studor, Inc.
B. Description: Manufactured assembly made of 4.0-lb/sq. ft. (20-kg/sq. m), 0.0625-inch- (1.6-
mm-) thick, lead flashing collar and skirt extending at least 6 inches (150 mm) from pipe, with
galvanized-steel boot reinforcement and counterflashing fitting.
A. Open Drains:
1. Description: Shop or field fabricate from ASTM A 74, Service class, hub-and-spigot,
cast-iron, soil-pipe fittings. Include P-trap, hub-and-spigot riser section; and where
required, increaser fitting joined with ASTM C 564, rubber gaskets.
2. Size: Same as connected waste piping.
1. Description: Cast iron, with threaded inlet and threaded or spigot outlet, and trap-seal
primer valve connection.
2. Size: Same as floor drain outlet with NPS 1/2 (DN 15) side inlet.
C. Air-Gap Fittings:
1. Standard: ASME A112.1.2, for fitting designed to ensure fixed, positive air gap between
installed inlet and outlet piping.
2. Body: Bronze or cast iron.
3. Inlet: Opening in top of body.
4. Outlet: Larger than inlet.
5. Size: Same as connected waste piping and with inlet large enough for associated indirect
waste piping.
1. Description: Manufactured, cast-iron fitting, with clamping device, that forms sleeve for
pipe floor penetrations of floor membrane. Include galvanized-steel pipe extension in top
F. Vent Caps:
1. Description: Cast-iron body with threaded or hub inlet and vandal-proof design. Include
vented hood and setscrews to secure to vent pipe.
2. Size: Same as connected stack vent or vent stack.
H. Expansion Joints:
A. Lead Sheet: ASTM B 749, Type L51121, copper bearing, with the following minimum weights
and thicknesses, unless otherwise indicated:
B. Copper Sheet: ASTM B 152/B 152M, of the following minimum weights and thicknesses,
unless otherwise indicated:
C. Zinc-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with 0.20 percent copper content and 0.04-
inch (1.01-mm) minimum thickness, unless otherwise indicated. Include G90 (Z275) hot-dip
galvanized, mill-phosphatized finish for painting if indicated.
F. Metal Accessories: Sheet metal strips, clamps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory units
required for installation; matching or compatible with material being installed.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for piping joining
materials, joint construction, and basic installation requirements.
B. Install backwater valves in building drain piping. For interior installation, provide cleanout
deck plate flush with floor and centered over backwater valve cover, and of adequate size to
remove valve cover for servicing.
C. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the following,
unless otherwise indicated:
1. Size same as drainage piping up to NPS 4 (DN 100). Use NPS 4 (DN 100) for larger
drainage piping unless larger cleanout is indicated.
2. Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees.
3. Locate at minimum intervals of 50 feet (15 m) for piping NPS 4 (DN 100) and smaller
and 100 feet (30 m) for larger piping.
4. Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack.
D. For floor cleanouts for piping below floors, install cleanout deck plates with top flush with
finished floor.
E. For cleanouts located in concealed piping, install cleanout wall access covers, of types
indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished wall.
F. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains flush with
finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.
a. Radius, 30 Inches (750 mm) or Less: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not less
than 1/4-inch (6.35-mm) total depression.
3. Install floor-drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain and
adjoining flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated.
4. Install individual traps for floor drains connected to sanitary building drain, unless
otherwise indicated.
G. Install trench drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains flush with
finished surface, unless otherwise indicated.
H. Assemble and install ASME A112.3.1, stainless-steel channel drainage systems according to
ASME A112.3.1. Install on support devices so that top will be flush with surface.
M. Install stack air-admittance valves at top of stack vent and vent stack piping.
O. Install roof flashing assemblies on sanitary stack vents and vent stacks that extend through roof.
P. Install flashing fittings on sanitary stack vents and vent stacks that extend through roof.
R. Assemble open drain fittings and install with top of hub 1 inch (25 mm) above floor.
S. Install deep-seal traps on floor drains and other waste outlets, if indicated.
T. Install floor-drain, trap-seal primer fittings on inlet to floor drains that require trap-seal primer
connection.
X. Install frost-resistant vent terminals on each vent pipe passing through roof. Maintain 1-inch
(25-mm) clearance between vent pipe and roof substrate.
Y. Install expansion joints on vertical stacks and conductors. Position expansion joints for easy
access and maintenance.
Z. Install frost-proof vent caps on each vent pipe passing through roof. Maintain 1-inch (25-mm)
clearance between vent pipe and roof substrate.
AA. Assemble components of FOG disposal systems and install on floor. Install trap, vent, fresh-air
inlet, and flow-control fitting according to authorities having jurisdiction. Install shelf fastened
to reinforcement in wall construction and adjacent to unit, unless otherwise indicated. Install
culture bottle, culture metering pump, timer, and control on shelf. Install tubing between
culture bottle, metering pump, and chamber.
BB. Install grease interceptors, including trapping, venting, and flow-control fitting, according to
authorities having jurisdiction and with clear space for servicing.
1. Above-Floor Installation: Set unit with bottom resting on floor, unless otherwise
indicated.
2. Flush with Floor Installation: Set unit and extension, if required, with cover flush with
finished floor.
3. Recessed Floor Installation: Set unit in receiver housing having bottom or cradle
supports, with receiver housing cover flush with finished floor.
4. Install cleanout immediately downstream from interceptors not having integral cleanout
on outlet.
CC. Install grease removal devices on floor. Install trap, vent, and flow-control fitting according to
authorities having jurisdiction. Install control panel adjacent to unit, unless otherwise indicated.
DD. Install oil interceptors, including trapping, venting, and flow-control fitting, according to
authorities having jurisdiction and with clear space for servicing. Coordinate oil-interceptor
storage tank and gravity drain with Division 15 Section "Facility Fuel-Oil Piping."
EE. Install solids interceptors with cleanout immediately downstream from interceptors that do not
have integral cleanout on outlet. Install trap on interceptors that do not have integral trap and
are connected to sanitary drainage and vent systems.
GG. Install traps on plumbing specialty drain outlets. Omit traps on indirect wastes unless trap is
indicated.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
C. FOG Disposal Systems: Connect inlet and outlet to unit, connect flow-control fitting and fresh-
air inlet piping to unit inlet piping, and connect vent piping between trap and media chamber.
Connect electrical power.
D. Grease Interceptors: Connect inlet and outlet to unit, and connect flow-control fitting and vent
to unit inlet piping. Install valve on outlet of automatic drawoff-type unit.
F. Oil Interceptors: Connect inlet, outlet, vent, and gravity drawoff piping to unit; flow-control
fitting and vent to unit inlet piping; and gravity drawoff and suction piping to oil storage tank.
A. Fabricate flashing from single piece unless large pans, sumps, or other drainage shapes are
required. Join flashing according to the following if required:
1. Lead Sheets: Burn joints of lead sheets 6.0-lb/sq. ft. (30-kg/sq. m), 0.0938-inch (2.4-mm)
thickness or thicker. Solder joints of lead sheets 4.0-lb/sq. ft. (20-kg/sq. m), 0.0625-inch
(1.6-mm) thickness or thinner.
2. Copper Sheets: Solder joints of copper sheets.
B. Install sheet flashing on pipes, sleeves, and specialties passing through or embedded in floors
and roofs with waterproof membrane.
1. Pipe Flashing: Sleeve type, matching pipe size, with minimum length of 10 inches (250
mm), and skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches (200 mm) around pipe.
2. Sleeve Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches (200 mm)
around sleeve.
3. Embedded Specialty Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches
(200 mm) around specialty.
E. Install flashing for piping passing through roofs with counterflashing or commercially made
flashing fittings, according to Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."
F. Extend flashing up vent pipe passing through roofs and turn down into pipe, or secure flashing
into cast-iron sleeve having calking recess.
G. Fabricate and install flashing and pans, sumps, and other drainage shapes.
B. Distinguish among multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety
and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations, in addition to
identifying unit. Nameplates and signs are specified in Division 15 Section "Identification for
Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest
until no leaks exist.
2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt or debris and
to prevent damage from traffic or construction work.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following storm drainage piping inside the building:
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working-
pressure, unless otherwise indicated:
B. Seismic Performance: Soil, waste, and vent piping and support and installation shall be capable
of withstanding the effects of seismic events determined according to ASCE 7, "Minimum
Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures."
B. LEED Submittal:
1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For solvent cements and adhesive primers, including
printed statement of VOC content.
C. Shop Drawings:
1. Design Calculations: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer for selecting
seismic restraints.
2. Controlled-Flow Storm Drainage System: Include calculations, plans, and details.
A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.
B. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Systems Components and Related Materials," for plastic
piping components. Include marking with "NSF-drain" for plastic drain piping and "NSF-
sewer" for plastic sewer piping.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and joining
materials.
C. Calking Materials: ASTM B 29, pure lead and oakum or hemp fiber.
a. Manufacturers:
1) ANACO.
2) Fernco, Inc.
3) Ideal Div.; Stant Corp.
4) Mission Rubber Co.
5) Tyler Pipe; Soil Pipe Div.
a. Manufacturers:
1) ANACO.
2) Clamp-All Corp.
3) Ideal Div.; Stant Corp.
4) Mission Rubber Co.
5) Tyler Pipe; Soil Pipe Div.
a. Manufacturers:
1. Manufacturers:
a. ANACO.
A. Flexible, Nonpressure Pipe Couplings: Comply with ASTM C 1173, elastomeric, sleeve-type,
reducing or transition pattern. Include shear ring, ends of same sizes as piping to be joined, and
corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.
1. Manufacturers:
2. Sleeve Materials:
B. Shielded Nonpressure Pipe Couplings: ASTM C 1460, elastomeric or rubber sleeve with full-
length, corrosion-resistant outer shield and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and
tightening mechanism on each end.
1. Manufacturers:
1. Manufacturers:
a. ANACO.
D. Pressure Pipe Couplings: AWWA C219 metal, sleeve-type same size as, with pressure rating at
least equal to, and ends compatible with, pipes to be joined.
1. Manufacturers:
E. Flexible Ball Joints: Ductile-iron fitting with combination of flanged and mechanical-joint ends
complying with AWWA C110 or AWWA C153. Include gasketed ball-joint section and
ductile-iron gland, rubber gasket, and steel bolts.
1. Manufacturers:
1. Manufacturers:
G. Wall-Penetration Fittings: Compound, ductile-iron coupling fitting with sleeve and flexing
sections for up to 20-degree deflection, gaskets, and restrained-joint ends complying with
AWWA C110 or AWWA C153. Include AWWA C111, ductile-iron glands, rubber gaskets,
and steel bolts.
1. Manufacturers:
a. SIGMA Corp.
B. Form: tube.
C. Color: natural.
3.1 EXCAVATION
A. Flanges and unions may be used on aboveground pressure piping, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Aboveground storm drainage piping NPS 6 (DN 150) and smaller shall be the following:
1. Service class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints.
2. Hubless cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; standard, shielded, stainless-steel couplings; and
coupled joints.
C. Aboveground, storm drainage piping NPS 8 (DN 200) and larger shall be the following:
1. Service class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints.
2. Hubless cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; standard, shielded, stainless-steel couplings; and
coupled joints.
D. Underground storm drainage piping NPS 6 (DN 150) and smaller shall be the following:
1. Service class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints.
2. Solid-wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.
3. Dissimilar Pipe-Material Couplings: Flexible, nonpressure pipe couplings for joining
dissimilar pipe materials with small difference in OD.
E. Underground, storm drainage piping NPS 8 (DN 200) and larger shall be the following:
1. Service class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints.
2. Solid-wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.
3. Dissimilar Pipe-Material Couplings: Flexible, nonpressure pipe couplings for joining
dissimilar pipe materials with small difference in OD.
F. Aboveground storm drainage force mains NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2 (DN 40 and DN 50) shall be
the following:
1. Hard copper tube, Type L (Type B); copper pressure fittings; and soldered joints.
2. Steel pipe, pressure fittings, and threaded joints.
G. Aboveground storm drainage force mains NPS 2-1/2 and NPS 6 (DN 65 and DN 150) shall be
the following:
1. Hard copper tube, Type L (Type B); copper pressure fittings; and soldered joints.
2. Steel pipe, pressure fittings, and threaded joints.
3. Grooved-end steel pipe, grooved-joint system fittings and couplings, and grooved joints.
A. Storm sewer and drainage piping outside the building are specified in Division 2 Section "Storm
Drainage."
B. Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical
Materials and Methods."
D. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building storm drains connect to building storm
sewers. Cleanouts are specified in Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties."
E. Install cleanout fitting with closure plug inside the building in storm drainage force-main
piping.
G. Install underground, ductile-iron, force-main piping according to AWWA C600. Install buried
piping inside building between wall and floor penetrations and connection to storm sewer
piping outside building with restrained joints. Anchor pipe to wall or floor. Install thrust-block
supports at vertical and horizontal offsets.
H. Install underground, copper, force-main tubing according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."
J. Install cast-iron sleeve with water stop and mechanical sleeve seal at each service pipe
penetration through foundation wall. Select number of interlocking rubber links required to
make installation watertight. Sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals are specified in Division 15
Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods."
K. Install wall-penetration fitting system at each service pipe penetration through foundation wall.
Make installation watertight.
L. Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook,"
Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."
M. Make changes in direction for storm drainage piping using appropriate branches, bends, and
long-sweep bends. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of
N. Lay buried building storm drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to
grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping
upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of
lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past
each joint as completed.
O. Install storm drainage piping at the following minimum slopes, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Building Storm Drain: 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3
(DN 80) and smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 4
(DN 100) and larger.
2. Horizontal Storm-Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow.
R. Sleeves are not required for cast-iron soil piping passing through concrete slabs-on-grade if slab
is without membrane waterproofing.
V. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by
authorities having jurisdiction.
A. Basic piping joint construction requirements are specified in Division 15 Section "Basic
Mechanical Materials and Methods."
B. Hub-and-Spigot, Cast-Iron Soil Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to CISPI's "Cast Iron
Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for compression joints.
C. Hub-and-Spigot, Cast-Iron Soil Piping Calked Joints: Join according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil
Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for lead and oakum calked joints.
D. Hubless Cast-Iron Soil Piping Coupled Joints: Join according to CISPI 310 and CISPI's "Cast
Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for hubless-coupling joints.
E. Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flux; ASTM B 32, lead-free-
alloy solder; and ASTM B 828 procedure, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Install gate or full-port ball valve for piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller.
2. Install gate valve for piping NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.
C. Check Valves: Install swing check valve, between pump and shutoff valve, on each sump pump
discharge.
B. Pipe hangers and supports are specified in Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports." Install
the following:
a. 100 Feet (30 m) and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.
b. Longer Than 100 Feet (30 m): MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers.
c. Longer Than 100 Feet (30 m), if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.
3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet (30 m) or Longer: MSS Type 44,
pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze.
4. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.
E. Rod diameter may be reduced 1 size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch (10-mm) minimum
rods.
1. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2 (DN 40 and DN 50): 60 inches (1500 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm)
rod.
2. NPS 3 (DN 80): 60 inches (1500 mm) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod.
3. NPS 4 and NPS 5 (DN 100 and DN 125): 60 inches (1500 mm) with 5/8-inch (16-mm)
rod.
4. NPS 6 (DN 150): 60 inches (1500 mm) with 3/4-inch (19-mm) rod.
5. NPS 8 to NPS 12 (DN 200 to DN 300): 60 inches (1500 mm) with 7/8-inch (22-mm)
rod.
6. Spacing for 10-foot (3-m) lengths may be increased to 10 feet (3 m). Spacing for fittings
is limited to 60 inches (1500 mm).
G. Install supports for vertical cast-iron soil piping every 15 feet (4.5 m).
H. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum
rod diameters:
1. NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32): 84 inches (2100 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod.
2. NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40): 108 inches (2700 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod.
3. NPS 2 (DN 50): 10 feet (3 m) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod.
4. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65): 11 feet (3.4 m) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod.
5. NPS 3 (DN 80): 12 feet (3.7 m) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod.
6. NPS 4 and NPS 5 (DN 100 and DN 125): 12 feet (3.7 m) with 5/8-inch (16-mm) rod.
7. NPS 6 (DN 150): 12 feet (3.7 m) with 3/4-inch (19-mm) rod.
8. NPS 8 to NPS 12 (DN 200 to DN 300): 12 feet (3.7 m) with 7/8-inch (22-mm) rod.
I. Install supports for vertical steel piping every 15 feet (4.5 m).
J. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum
rod diameters:
1. NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32): 72 inches (1800 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod.
2. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2 (DN 40 and DN 50): 96 inches (2400 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm)
rod.
3. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65): 108 inches (2700 mm) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod.
4. NPS 3 to NPS 5 (DN 80 to DN 125): 10 feet (3 m) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod.
5. NPS 6 (DN 150): 10 feet (3 m) with 5/8-inch (16-mm) rod.
6. NPS 8 (DN 200): 10 feet (3 m) with 3/4-inch (19-mm) rod.
L. Install hangers for PVC piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum
rod diameters:
1. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2 (DN 40 and DN 50): 48 inches (1200 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm)
rod.
2. NPS 3 (DN 80): 48 inches (1200 mm) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod.
M. Install supports for vertical PVC piping every 48 inches (1200 mm).
N. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written
instructions.
3.7 CONNECTIONS
B. Connect interior storm drainage piping to exterior storm drainage piping. Use transition fitting
to join dissimilar piping materials.
C. Connect storm drainage piping to roof drains and storm drainage specialties.
A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection
must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection,
make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.
C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Test storm drainage piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in
absence of published procedures, as follows:
1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been
altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report
for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.
E. Test force-main piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in absence
of published procedures, as follows:
1. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced force-main piping
until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before
it was tested.
2. Cap and subject piping to static-water pressure of 50 psig (345 kPa) above operating
pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test
source and allow to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute
defects that must be repaired.
3. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until
satisfactory results are obtained.
4. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.
3.9 CLEANING
B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris
and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.
C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Backwater valves.
2. Cleanouts.
3. Trench drains.
4. Roof drains.
5. Miscellaneous storm drainage piping specialties.
6. Flashing materials.
1. Division 15 Section "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties" for backwater valves, floor
drains, trench drains and channel drainage systems connected to sanitary sewer, air
admittance valves, FOG disposal systems, grease interceptors and removal devices, oil
interceptors, and solid interceptors.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Drainage piping specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing
agency.
1.6 COORDINATION
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
4. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M for cast iron for cleanout test tee.
5. Size: Same as connected drainage piping
6. Body Material: Hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil pipe T-branch as required to match
connected piping.
7. Closure: Countersunk, brass plug.
8. Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout size.
9. Closure: Stainless-steel plug with seal.
A. Trench Drains:
A. Copper Sheet: ASTM B 152/B 152M, 12 oz./sq. ft. (3.7 kg/sq. m or 0.41-mm) thickness.
B. Zinc-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with 0.20 percent copper content and 0.04-
inch (1.01-mm) minimum thickness, unless otherwise indicated. Include G90 (Z275) hot-dip
galvanized, mill-phosphatized finish for painting if indicated.
C. Elastic Membrane Sheet: ASTM D 4068, flexible, chlorinated polyethylene, 40-mil (1.01-mm)
minimum thickness.
E. Metal Accessories: Sheet metal strips, clamps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory units
required for installation; matching or compatible with material being installed.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for piping joining
materials, joint construction, and basic installation requirements.
B. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the following,
unless otherwise indicated:
C. For floor cleanouts for piping below floors, install cleanout deck plates with top flush with
finished floor.
D. For cleanouts located in concealed piping, install cleanout wall access covers, of types
indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished wall.
E. Install trench drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains flush with
finished surface, unless otherwise indicated.
F. Assemble and install ASME A112.3.1, stainless-steel channel drainage systems according to
ASME A112.3.1. Install on support devices so that top will be flush with surface.
K. Install roof drains at low points of roof areas according to roof membrane manufacturer's
written installation instructions. Roofing materials are specified in Division 7.
1. Install roof-drain flashing collar or flange so that there will be no leakage between drain
and adjoining roofing. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated.
2. Position roof drains for easy access and maintenance.
L. Install sleeve flashing device with each riser and stack passing through floors with waterproof
membrane.
M. Install expansion joints on vertical stacks and conductors. Position expansion joints for easy
access and maintenance.
N. Install manufactured, gray-iron downspout boots at grade with top 6 inches (152 mm) above
grade. Secure to building wall.
O. Install conductor nozzles at exposed bottom of conductors where they spill onto grade.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
A. Fabricate flashing from single piece unless large pans, sumps, or other drainage shapes are
required. Join flashing according to the following if required:
1. Lead Sheets: Burn joints of lead sheets 6.0-lb/sq. ft. (30-kg/sq. m), 0.0938-inch (2.4-mm)
thickness or thicker. Solder joints of lead sheets 4.0-lb/sq. ft. (20-kg/sq. m), 0.0625-inch
(1.6-mm) thickness or thinner.
2. Copper Sheets: Solder joints of copper sheets.
B. Install sheet flashing on pipes, sleeves, and specialties passing through or embedded in floors
and roofs with waterproof membrane.
1. Pipe Flashing: Sleeve type, matching pipe size, with minimum length of 10 inches (250
mm), and skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches (200 mm) around pipe.
2. Sleeve Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches (200 mm)
around sleeve.
3. Embedded Specialty Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches
(200 mm) around specialty.
E. Fabricate and install flashing and pans, sumps, and other drainage shapes.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt or debris and
to prevent damage from traffic or construction work.
B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops.
HYDRONIC PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes pipe and fitting materials, joining methods, special-duty valves, and
specialties for the following:
1. Division 15 Section "Hydronic Pumps" for pumps, motors, and accessories for hydronic
piping.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. PTFE: Polytetrafluoroethylene.
A. Hydronic piping components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following
minimum working pressure and temperature:
1.5 SUBMITTALS
B. LEED Submittal:
1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For solvent cements and adhesive primers, including
printed statement of VOC content.
C. Shop Drawings: Detail, at 1/4 scale, the piping layout, fabrication of pipe anchors, hangers,
supports for multiple pipes, alignment guides, expansion joints and loops, and attachments of
the same to the building structure. Detail location of anchors, alignment guides, and expansion
joints and loops.
D. Welding certificates.
G. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air control devices, hydronic specialties, and special-duty
valves to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
H. Water Analysis: Submit a copy of the water analysis to illustrate water quality available at
Project site.
A. Installer Qualifications:
B. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M,
"Structural Welding Code - Steel."
C. Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code: Section IX.
1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping."
2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes
involved and that certification is current.
D. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials,
products, and installation. Safety valves and pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate ASME
label. Fabricate and stamp air separators and expansion tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.
A. Water-Treatment Chemicals: Furnish enough chemicals for initial system startup and for
preventive maintenance for one year from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Differential Pressure Meter: For each type of balancing valve and automatic flow control valve,
include flowmeter, probes, hoses, flow charts, and carrying case.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
3. Tongue and recess couplings will be acceptable only with the use of a torque wrench per
manufacturer’s installation instructions. Contractor shall remove and replace any
improperly installed grooved joints.
4. Grooved-End-Tube Couplings: Copper-tube dimensions, rigid pattern with offsetting
angle-pattern, bolt pads, unless otherwise indicated; gasketed fitting. Ductile-iron
housing with key matching pipe and fitting grooves, prelubricated FlushSeal® EPDM
gasket rated for minimum 230 deg F for use with housing, and steel bolts and nuts,
Victaulic Series 607 “Quick Vic”.
A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel with plain ends; type, grade, and wall thickness as
indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article.
B. Cast-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4; Classes 125 and 250 as indicated in Part 3 "Piping
Applications" Article.
C. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Classes 150 and 300 as indicated in Part 3
"Piping Applications" Article.
D. Malleable-Iron Unions: ASME B16.39; Classes 150, 250, and 300 as indicated in Part 3
"Piping Applications" Article.
E. Cast-Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.1, Classes 25, 125, and 250; raised
ground face, and bolt holes spot faced as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article.
F. Wrought-Steel Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M, wall thickness to match adjoining pipe.
G. Wrought Cast- and Forged-Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, including bolts,
nuts, and gaskets of the following material group, end connections, and facings:
2. Joint Fittings: ASTM A 536, Grade 65-45-12 ductile iron; ASTM A 47/A 47M,
Grade 32510 malleable iron; ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type F, E, or S, Grade B fabricated
I. Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of same materials and wall thicknesses as pipe in
which they are installed.
A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system
contents.
1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness unless
thickness or specific material is indicated.
a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges.
b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges.
B. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping
system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to
ASTM B 813.
E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for joining copper
with copper; or BAg-1, silver alloy for joining copper with bronze or steel.
F. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12/D10.12M for welding materials appropriate
for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.
a. Use CPVC solvent cement that has a VOC content of 490 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
b. Use adhesive primer that has a VOC content of 550 g/L or less when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
1. Use fiberglass adhesive that has a VOC content of 80 g/L or less when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
I. Gasket Material: Thickness, material, and type suitable for fluid to be handled and working
temperatures and pressures.
2. CPVC and PVC one-piece fitting with one threaded brass or copper insert and one
Schedule 80 solvent-cement-joint end.
2. MSS SP-107, CPVC and PVC union. Include brass or copper end, Schedule 80 solvent-
cement-joint end, rubber gasket, and threaded union.
A. Description: Combination fitting of copper-alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solder-
joint, plain, or weld-neck end connections that match piping system materials.
D. Dielectric Flanges:
E. Dielectric-Flange Kits:
F. Dielectric Couplings:
G. Dielectric Nipples:
2. Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; plain,
threaded, or grooved ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.
2.6 VALVES
A. Gate, Globe, Check, Ball, and Butterfly Valves: Comply with requirements specified in
Division 15 Section "Valves."
a. Amtrol, Inc.
b. Armstrong Pumps, Inc.
c. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; a division of ITT Industries.
d. Conbraco Industries, Inc.
e. Spence Engineering Company, Inc.
f. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
a. Amtrol, Inc.
b. Armstrong Pumps, Inc.
c. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; a division of ITT Industries.
d. Conbraco Industries, Inc.
e. Spence Engineering Company, Inc.
f. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
1. Amtrol, Inc.
2. Armstrong Pumps, Inc.
3. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; a division of ITT Industries.
4. Taco.
1. Body: Bronze.
2. Internal Parts: Nonferrous.
3. Operator: Screwdriver or thumbscrew.
4. Inlet Connection: NPS 1/2.
5. Discharge Connection: NPS 1/8.
6. CWP Rating: 150 psig.
7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 225 deg F.
D. Expansion Tanks:
1. Tank: Welded steel, rated for 125-psig working pressure and 375 deg F maximum
operating temperature, with taps in bottom of tank for tank fitting and taps in end of tank
for gage glass. Tanks shall be factory tested with taps fabricated and labeled according to
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.
2. Air-Control Tank Fitting: Cast-iron body, copper-plated tube, brass vent tube plug, and
stainless-steel ball check, 100-gal. unit only; sized for compression-tank diameter.
Provide tank fittings for 125-psig working pressure and 250 deg F maximum operating
temperature.
3. Tank Drain Fitting: Brass body, nonferrous internal parts; 125-psig working pressure and
240 deg F maximum operating temperature; constructed to admit air to compression tank,
drain water, and close off system.
4. Gage Glass: Full height with dual manual shutoff valves, 3/4-inch- diameter gage glass,
and slotted-metal glass guard.
1. Tank: Welded steel; ASME constructed and labeled for 125-psig minimum working
pressure and 375 deg F maximum operating temperature.
2. Air Collector Tube: Perforated stainless steel, constructed to direct released air into
expansion tank.
3. Tangential Inlet and Outlet Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged
connections for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
4. Blowdown Connection: Threaded.
5. Size: Match system flow capacity.
1. Tank: One-piece cast iron with an integral weir constructed to decelerate system flow to
maximize air separation.
2. Maximum Working Pressure: Up to 175 psig.
3. Maximum Operating Temperature: Up to 300 deg F.
H. Air Purgers:
1. Body: Cast iron with internal baffles that slow the water velocity to separate the air from
solution and divert it to the vent for quick removal.
2. Maximum Working Pressure: 150 psig.
3. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F.
A. Bypass Chemical Feeder: Welded steel construction; 125-psig working pressure; 5-gal.
capacity; with fill funnel and inlet, outlet, and drain valves.
A. Y-Pattern Strainers:
1. Body: ASTM A 126, Class B, cast iron with bolted cover and bottom drain connection.
2. End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged ends for NPS 2-1/2 and
larger.
B. Basket Strainers:
1. Body: ASTM A 126, Class B, high-tensile cast iron with bolted cover and bottom drain
connection.
2. End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged ends for NPS 2-1/2 and
larger.
3. Strainer Screen: 60-mesh startup strainer, and perforated stainless-steel basket with 50
percent free area.
4. CWP Rating: 125 psig.
C. T-Pattern Strainers:
1. Body: Ductile or malleable iron with removable access coupling and end cap for strainer
maintenance.
2. End Connections: Grooved ends.
3. Strainer Screen: 60-mesh startup strainer, and perforated stainless-steel basket with 57
percent free area.
4. CWP Rating: 750 psig.
F. Expansion fittings are specified in Division 15 Section "Pipe Expansion Fittings and Loops."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Hot-water heating piping, aboveground, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be the following:
B. Hot-water heating piping, aboveground, NPS 2-1/2 and larger, shall be any of the following:
1. Schedule 40 steel pipe, wrought-steel fittings and wrought-cast or forged-steel flanges
and flange fittings, and welded and flanged joints.
2. Schedule 40 steel pipe; grooved, mechanical joint coupling and fittings; and grooved,
mechanical joints.
D. Chilled-water piping, aboveground, NPS 2-1/2 and larger, shall be any of the following:
1. Schedule 40 steel pipe, wrought-steel fittings and wrought-cast or forged-steel flanges
and flange fittings, and welded and flanged joints.
2. Schedule 40 steel pipe; grooved, mechanical joint coupling and fittings; and grooved,
mechanical joints.
F. Condenser-water piping, aboveground, NPS 2-1/2 and larger, shall be any of the following:
1. Schedule 40 steel pipe, wrought-steel fittings and wrought-cast or forged-steel flanges
and flange fittings, and welded and flanged joints.
2. Schedule 40 steel pipe; grooved, mechanical joint coupling and fittings; and grooved,
mechanical joints.
H. Condensate-Drain Piping: Schedule 40 PVC plastic pipe and fittings and solvent welded joints.
I. Blowdown-Drain Piping: Same materials and joining methods as for piping specified for the
service in which blowdown drain is installed.
J. Air-Vent Piping:
1. Inlet: Same as service where installed with metal-to-plastic transition fittings for plastic
piping systems according to the piping manufacturer's written instructions.
2. Outlet: Type K, annealed-temper copper tubing with soldered or flared joints.
K. Safety-Valve-Inlet and -Outlet Piping for Hot-Water Piping: Same materials and joining
methods as for piping specified for the service in which safety valve is installed with metal-to-
plastic transition fittings for plastic piping systems according to the piping manufacturer's
written instructions.
A. Install shutoff-duty valves at each branch connection to supply mains, and at supply connection
to each piece of equipment.
C. Install calibrated-orifice, balancing valves in the return pipe of each heating or cooling terminal.
D. Install check valves at each pump discharge and elsewhere as required to control flow direction.
E. Install safety valves at hot-water generators and elsewhere as required by ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code. Install drip-pan elbow on safety-valve outlet and pipe without valves to
the outdoors; and pipe drain to nearest floor drain or as indicated on Drawings. Comply with
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1, for installation
requirements.
A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping
systems. Indicate piping locations and arrangements if such were used to size pipe and
calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping
as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.
B. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms
and service areas.
C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right
angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated
otherwise.
D. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.
J. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating
pressure.
K. Install groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation and servicing
of valves.
N. Reduce pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fitting installed with level side up.
O. Install branch connections to mains using tee fittings in main pipe, with the branch connected to
the bottom of the main pipe. For up-feed risers, connect the branch to the top of the main pipe.
Q. Install unions in piping, NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to valves, at final connections of
equipment, and elsewhere as indicated.
R. Install flanges in piping, NPS 2-1/2 and larger, at final connections of equipment and elsewhere
as indicated.
S. Install strainers on inlet side of each control valve, pressure-reducing valve, solenoid valve, in-
line pump, and elsewhere as indicated. Install NPS 3/4 nipple and ball valve in blowdown
connection of strainers NPS 2 and larger. Match size of strainer blowoff connection for
strainers smaller than NPS 2.
T. Install expansion loops, expansion joints, anchors, and pipe alignment guides as specified in
Division 15 Section "Pipe Expansion Fittings and Loops."
A. Hanger, support, and anchor devices are specified in Division 15 Section "Hangers and
Supports." Comply with the following requirements for maximum spacing of supports.
1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal piping less than 20 feet long.
2. Adjustable roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal piping 20 feet or
longer.
3. Pipe Roller: MSS SP-58, Type 44 for multiple horizontal piping 20 feet or longer,
supported on a trapeze.
4. Spring hangers to support vertical runs.
5. Provide copper-clad hangers and supports for hangers and supports in direct contact with
copper pipe.
6. On plastic pipe, install pads or cushions on bearing surfaces to prevent hanger from
scratching pipe.
C. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:
1. NPS 3/4: Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.
D. Install hangers for drawn-temper copper piping with the following maximum spacing and
minimum rod sizes:
1. NPS 3/4: Maximum span, 5 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.
2. NPS 1: Maximum span, 6 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.
3. NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
4. NPS 2: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
5. NPS 2-1/2: Maximum span, 9 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
6. NPS 3: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
E. Plastic Piping Hanger Spacing: Space hangers according to pipe manufacturer's written
instructions for service conditions. Avoid point loading. Space and install hangers with the
fewest practical rigid anchor points.
F. Fiberglass Piping Hanger Spacing: Space hangers according to pipe manufacturer's written
instructions for service conditions. Avoid point loading. Space and install hangers with the
fewest practical rigid anchor points.
G. Support vertical runs at roof, at each floor, and at 10-foot intervals between floors.
A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 15 Sections
specifying piping systems.
B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before
assembly.
D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube
end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using
lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.
F. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut
threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore
full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal
threading is specified.
2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or
damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.
G. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12/D10.12M, using qualified processes
and welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.
H. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service
application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.
I. Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with coupling and gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Cut or roll
grooves in ends of pipe based on pipe and coupling manufacturer's written instructions for pipe
wall thickness. Use grooved-end fittings and rigid, grooved-end-pipe couplings.
A. Install manual air vents at high points in piping, at heat-transfer coils, and elsewhere as required
for system air venting.
B. Install automatic air vents at high points of system piping in mechanical equipment rooms only.
Manual vents at heat-transfer coils and elsewhere as required for air venting.
C. Install piping from boiler air outlet, air separator, or air purger to expansion tank with a 2
percent upward slope toward tank.
D. Install in-line air separators in pump suction. Install drain valve on air separators NPS 2 and
larger.
E. Install tangential air separator in pump suction. Install blowdown piping with gate or full-port
ball valve; extend full size to nearest floor drain.
F. Install bypass chemical feeders in each hydronic system where indicated, in upright position
with top of funnel not more than 48 inches above the floor. Install feeder in minimum NPS 3/4
bypass line, from main with full-size, full-port, ball valve in the main between bypass
connections. Install NPS 3/4 pipe from chemical feeder drain, to nearest equipment drain and
include a full-size, full-port, ball valve.
G. Install expansion tanks above the air separator. Install tank fitting in tank bottom and charge
tank. Use manual vent for initial fill to establish proper water level in tank.
H. Install expansion tanks on the floor. Vent and purge air from hydronic system, and ensure tank
is properly charged with air to suit system Project requirements.
A. Sizes for supply and return piping connections shall be the same as or larger than equipment
connections.
C. Install bypass piping with globe valve around control valve. If parallel control valves are
installed, only one bypass is required.
D. Install ports for pressure gages and thermometers at coil inlet and outlet connections according
to Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages."
1. Leave joints, including welds, uninsulated and exposed for examination during test.
2. Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints that cannot sustain reactions due to test
pressure. If temporary restraints are impractical, isolate expansion joints from testing.
3. Flush hydronic piping systems with clean water; then remove and clean or replace
strainer screens.
4. Isolate equipment from piping. If a valve is used to isolate equipment, its closure shall be
capable of sealing against test pressure without damage to valve. Install blinds in flanged
joints to isolate equipment.
5. Install safety valve, set at a pressure no more than one-third higher than test pressure, to
protect against damage by expanding liquid or other source of overpressure during test.
1. Use ambient temperature water as a testing medium unless there is risk of damage due to
freezing. Another liquid that is safe for workers and compatible with piping may be
used.
2. While filling system, use vents installed at high points of system to release air. Use
drains installed at low points for complete draining of test liquid.
3. Isolate expansion tanks and determine that hydronic system is full of water.
4. Subject piping system to hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than 1.5 times the
system's working pressure. Test pressure shall not exceed maximum pressure for any
vessel, pump, valve, or other component in system under test. Verify that stress due to
pressure at bottom of vertical runs does not exceed 90 percent of specified minimum
HYDRONIC PUMPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1.3 DEFINITIONS
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include certified performance curves and rated capacities, operating
characteristics, furnished specialties, final impeller dimensions, and accessories for each type of
product indicated. Indicate pump's operating point on curves.
B. Shop Drawings: Show pump layout and connections. Include setting drawings with templates
for installing foundation and anchor bolts and other anchorages.
2. Grooved joint couplings and fittings shall be shown on drawings and product submittals,
and be specifically identified with the applicable Victaulic style number.
C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For pumps to include in emergency, operation, and
maintenance manuals.
A. Source Limitations: Obtain hydronic pumps through one source from a single manufacturer.
B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of hydronic
pumps and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product
Requirements."
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
A. Manufacturer's Preparation for Shipping: Clean flanges and exposed machined metal surfaces
and treat with anticorrosion compound after assembly and testing. Protect flanges, pipe
openings, and nozzles with wooden flange covers or with screwed-in plugs.
C. Retain protective covers for flanges and protective coatings during storage.
D. Protect bearings and couplings against damage from sand, grit, and other foreign matter.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete,
reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3.
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
A. Manufacturers:
1.American-Marsh Pumps.
2.1. Armstrong Pumps Inc. Formatted: Bullets and Numbering
3.Aurora Pump; Division of Pentair Pump Group.
4.2. Bell & Gossett; Div. of ITT Industries.
5.Buffalo Pumps, Inc.; an Ampco Pittsburgh Co.
6.Burks Pumps; Div. of Crane Pumps & Systems.
7.Deming Pumps; Div. of Crane Pumps & Systems.
8.Flowserve Corporation; Div. of Ingersoll-Dresser Pumps.
9.MEPCO (Marshall Engineered Products Co.).
10.PACO Pumps.
11.Scot Pump; Div. of Ardox Corp.
12.3. Taco, Inc.
13.4. Thrush Company Inc.
14.5. Weinman; Div. of Crane Pumps & Systems.
C. Pump Construction:
1. Casing: Cast iron, with replaceable bronze wear rings, threaded gage tappings at inlet
and outlet, drain plug at bottom and air vent at top of volute, and flanged
connections. Provide integral mount on volute to support the casing, and attached piping
D. Shaft Coupling: Molded rubber insert and interlocking spider capable of absorbing vibration.
Couplings shall be drop-out type to allow disassembly and removal without removing pump
shaft or motor and EPDM coupling sleeve for variable-speed applications.
E. Coupling Guard: Dual rated; ANSI B15.1, Section 8; OSHA 1910.219 approved; steel;
removable; attached to mounting frame.
F. Mounting Frame: Welded-steel frame and cross members, factory fabricated from
ASTM A 36/A 36M channels and angles. Fabricate to mount pump casing, coupling guard, and
motor.
G. Motor: Single speed, with permanently lubricated ball bearings, unless otherwise indicated;
secured to mounting frame, with adjustable alignment. Comply with requirements in
Division 15 Section "Motors."
Formatted: Bullets and Numbering
A. Suction Diffuser: Angle pattern, 175-psig pressure rating, cast or ductile-iron body and end cap,
pump-inlet fitting; with bronze startup and bronze or stainless-steel permanent strainers; bronze
or stainless-steel straightening vanes; drain plug; and factory-fabricated support.
B. Grooved End Suction Diffuser: 300-psig pressure rating, ductile-iron body, 304 stainless steel
frame and perforated sheet diffuser with 5/32” diameter holes 3”-12” inlet sizes, or 3/16”
diameter holes 14”-16” inlet sizes. Removable 20 mesh stainless steel start-up prefilter, outlets
for pressure/temperature drain connections, and base support boss. Victaulic Series 731-G.
C. Triple-Duty Valve: Angle or straight pattern, 175-psig pressure rating, cast or ductile-iron body,
pump-discharge fitting; with drain plug and bronze-fitted shutoff, balancing, and check valve
features. Brass gage ports with integral check valve, and orifice for flow measurement.
D. Tri-Service Valve Assembly: Straight pattern, combination shut-off, throttling and non-slam
check valve. Vic®-300 MasterSeal™ butterfly valve assembled with Style 779 Venturi Check
and grooved joint couplings (style to be determined by system requirements). Working pressures
to 300 PSI. (Optional: Vic-Plug valve Series 377 assembled with Venturi Check Style 779,
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Formatted: Bullets and Numbering
3.13.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine equipment foundations and anchor-bolt locations for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.
B. Examine roughing-in for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before
pump installation.
C. Examine foundations and inertia bases for suitable conditions where pumps are to be installed.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
A. Install concrete bases of dimensions indicated for pumps and controllers. Refer to Division 15
Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods."
1. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated,
install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around full perimeter of base.
2. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete
base and anchor into structural concrete floor.
3. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams,
instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
4. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.
C.B. Independently support pumps and piping so weight of piping is not supported by pumps and
weight of pumps is not supported by piping.
D.C. Vibration isolation devices are specified in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration
Isolation”. Fabricate brackets or supports as required. Hanger and support materials are
specified in Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports."
Formatted: Bullets and Numbering
F.D. Set base-mounted pumps on concrete foundation. Disconnect coupling before setting. Do not
reconnect couplings until alignment procedure is complete.
3.4 ALIGNMENT
A. Align pump and motor shafts and piping connections after setting on foundation, grout has been
set and foundation bolts have been tightened, and piping connections have been made.
C. Adjust pump and motor shafts for angular and offset alignment.
D. After alignment is correct, tighten foundation bolts evenly but not too firmly. Completely fill
baseplate with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout while metal blocks and shims or wedges are in
place. After grout has cured, fully tighten foundation bolts.
3.5 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
C. Connect piping to pumps. Install valves that are same size as piping connected to pumps.
D. Install suction and discharge pipe sizes equal to or greater than diameter of pump nozzles.
G. Install flexible connectors on suction and discharge sides of base-mounted pumps between
pump casing and valves.
H. Install pressure gages on pump suction and discharge, at integral pressure-gage tapping, or
install single gage with multiple input selector valve.
Formatted: Bullets and Numbering
J.I. Install electrical connections for power, controls, and devices.
L. Grooved Joint Installation: Grooved joint piping systems shall be installed in accordance with
the manufacturer’s guidelines and recommendations. All grooved piping specialties shall be the
products of a single manufacturer. Grooved coupling manufacturer’s factory trained field
5. Prime pump by opening suction valves and closing drains, and prepare pump for
operation.
6. Start motor.
7. Open discharge valve slowly.
3.7 DEMONSTRATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1.3 DEFINITIONS
B. Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment operating at less than 50 V or
for remote-control, signaling power-limited circuits.
A. Water quality for HVAC systems shall minimize corrosion, scale buildup, and biological
growth for optimum efficiency of HVAC equipment without creating a hazard to operating
personnel or the environment.
B. Base HVAC water treatment on quality of water available at Project site, HVAC system
equipment material characteristics and functional performance characteristics, operating
personnel capabilities, and requirements and guidelines of authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Closed hydronic systems, including hot-water heating and chilled water, shall have the
following water qualities:
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and
accessories for the following products:
1. Bypass feeders.
2. Chemical test equipment.
3. Chemical material safety data sheets.
4. Centrifugal separators.
B. Shop Drawings: Pretreatment and chemical treatment equipment showing tanks, maintenance
space required, and piping connections to HVAC systems. Include plans, elevations, sections,
details, and attachments to other work.
D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For sensors, injection pumps, water filtration units, and
controllers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
A. Scope of Maintenance Service: Provide chemicals and service program to maintain water
conditions required above to inhibit corrosion, scale formation, and biological growth for
cooling, chilled-water piping and heating, hot-water piping and equipment. Services and
chemicals shall be provided for a period of one year from date of Substantial Completion, and
shall include the following:
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
1. ARC
2. Aquagy
3. Anderson Chemical Co, Inc.
4. Aqua-Chem, Inc.; Cleaver-Brooks Div.
5. Barclay Chemical Co.; Water Management, Inc.
6. Boland Trane Services
7. GE Betz.
8. GE Osmonics
9. H-O-H Chemicals, Inc.
10. Metro Group. Inc. (The); Metropolitan Refining Div.
11. G.F. Morin Company
12. ONDEO Nalco Company.
13. Watcon, Inc.
A. Bypass Feeders: Steel, with corrosion-resistant exterior coating, minimum 3-1/2-inch fill
opening in the top, and NPS 3/4 bottom inlet and top side outlet. Quarter turn or threaded fill
cap with gasket seal and diaphragm to lock the top on the feeder when exposed to system
pressure in the vessel.
1. Capacity: 5 gal..
2. Minimum Working Pressure: 125 psig.
B. Stainless-Steel Fittings: Complying with ASTM A 815/A 815M, Type 316, Grade WP-S.
C. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Stainless-Steel Ball Valves: ASTM A 351, Type 316 stainless-steel
body; ASTM A 276, Type 316 stainless-steel stem and vented ball, carbon-filled TFE seats,
threaded body design with adjustable stem packing, threaded ends, and 250-psig SWP and 600-
psig CWP ratings.
2.5 CHEMICALS
A. Centrifugal Separators:
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product
indicated on Drawings or a comparable product.
2. Description: Simplex separator housing with baffles and chambers for removing
particles from water by centrifugal action and gravity.
3. Housing: With manufacturer's proprietary system of baffles and chambers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Perform an analysis of supply water to determine quality of water available at Project site.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install chemical application equipment on concrete bases, level and plumb. Maintain
manufacturer's recommended clearances. Arrange units so controls and devices that require
servicing are accessible. Anchor chemical tanks and floor-mounting accessories to substrate.
B. Install water testing equipment on wall near water chemical application equipment.
C. Bypass Feeders: Install in closed hydronic systems, including hot-water heating and chilled
water, and equipped with the following:
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
D. Install shutoff valves on HVAC water-treatment equipment inlet and outlet. Metal general-duty
valves are specified in Division 15 Section "Valves."
E. Refer to Division 15 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for backflow preventers
required in makeup water connections to potable-water systems.
3.5 DEMONSTRATION
B. Training: Provide a "how-to-use" self-contained breathing apparatus video that details exact
operating procedures of equipment.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces,
pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings,
unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.
B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied
spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.
1. Piping and Valves: 100 psig (690 kPa) minimum unless otherwise indicated.
2. Service Regulators: 100 psig (690 kPa) minimum unless otherwise indicated.
3. Minimum Operating Pressure of Service Meter: 3.5” water column.
C. Delegated Design: Design restraints and anchors for natural-gas piping and equipment,
including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using
performance requirements and design criteria indicated.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
1. Piping specialties.
2. Corrugated, stainless-steel tubing with associated components.
3. Valves. Include pressure rating, capacity, settings, and electrical connection data of
selected models.
4. Pressure regulators. Indicate pressure ratings and capacities.
5. Service meters. Indicate pressure ratings and capacities. Include bypass fittings and
meter bars supports.
6. Dielectric fittings.
7. Mechanical sleeve seals.
8. Escutcheons.
9. Natural Gas Booster System. Indicate pressure ratings and capacities.
B. Shop Drawings: For facility natural-gas piping layout. Include plans, piping layout and
elevations, sections, and details for fabrication of pipe anchors, hangers, supports for multiple
pipes, alignment guides, expansion joints and loops, and attachments of the same to building
structure. Detail location of anchors, alignment guides, and expansion joints and loops.
C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For natural-gas piping and equipment indicated to comply with
performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the
qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
D. Coordination Drawings: Plans and details, drawn to scale, on which natural-gas piping is
shown and coordinated with other installations, using input from installers of the items
involved.
E. Site Survey: Plans, drawn to scale, on which natural-gas piping is shown and coordinated with
other services and utilities.
G. Welding certificates.
I. Operation and Maintenance Data: For pressure regulators and service meters to include in
emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code.
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
A. Handling Flammable Liquids: Remove and dispose of liquids from existing natural-gas piping
according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping,
storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and
moisture.
C. Store and handle pipes and tubes having factory-applied protective coatings to avoid damaging
coating, and protect from direct sunlight.
A. Perform site survey, research public utility records, and verify existing utility locations. Contact
utility-locating service for area where Project is located.
1. Notify Construction Manager no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption
of natural-gas service.
2. Do not proceed with interruption of natural-gas service without Construction Manager's
written permission.
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.
B. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for valves installed concealed behind
finished surfaces. Comply with requirements in Division 8 Section "Access Doors and
Frames."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel, Schedule 40, Type E or S, Grade B.
6. Mechanical Couplings:
a. OmegaFlex, Inc.
b. Parker Hannifin Corporation; Parflex Division.
c. Titeflex.
d. Tru-Flex Metal Hose Corp.
4. Fittings: Copper-alloy mechanical fittings with ends made to fit and listed for use with
corrugated stainless-steel tubing and capable of metal-to-metal seal without gaskets.
Include brazing socket or threaded ends complying with ASME B1.20.1.
5. Striker Plates: Steel, designed to protect tubing from penetrations.
6. Manifolds: Malleable iron or steel with factory-applied protective coating. Threaded
connections shall comply with ASME B1.20.1 for pipe inlet and corrugated tubing
outlets.
7. Operating-Pressure Rating: 5 psig (34.5 kPa).
C. Drawn-Temper Copper Tube: Comply with ASTM B 88, Type K (ASTM B 88M, Type A).
a. Gasket Material: ASME B16.20, metallic, flat, asbestos free, aluminum o-rings,
and spiral-wound metal gaskets.
b. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel or stainless steel.
D. Annealed-Temper Copper Tube: Comply with ASTM B 88, Type K (ASTM B 88M, Type A).
E. Tin-Lined Copper Tube: ASTM B 280, seamless, annealed, with interior tin-plated lining.
C. Y-Pattern Strainers:
D. Basket Strainers:
1. Body: ASTM A 126, Class B, high-tensile cast iron with bolted cover and bottom drain
connection.
2. End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; flanged ends for
NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.
3. Strainer Screen: 40 -mesh startup strainer, and perforated stainless-steel basket with 50
percent free area.
4. CWP Rating: 125 psig (862 kPa).
E. T-Pattern Strainers:
1. Body: Ductile or malleable iron with removable access coupling and end cap for strainer
maintenance.
2. End Connections: Grooved ends.
3. Strainer Screen: 40 -mesh startup strainer, and perforated stainless-steel basket with 57
percent free area.
4. CWP Rating: 750 psig (5170 kPa).
F. Weatherproof Vent Cap: Cast- or malleable-iron increaser fitting with corrosion-resistant wire
screen, with free area at least equal to cross-sectional area of connecting pipe and threaded-end
connection.
B. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12/D10.12M for welding materials appropriate
for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.
C. Brazing Filler Metals: Alloy with melting point greater than 1000 deg F (540 deg C) complying
with AWS A5.8/A5.8M. Brazing alloys containing more than 0.05 percent phosphorus are
prohibited.
A. See "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas
Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles for where each valve type is applied in various services.
B. General Requirements for Metallic Valves, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Comply with
ASME B16.33.
C. General Requirements for Metallic Valves, NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Comply with
ASME B16.38.
E. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim: MSS SP-110.
F. Two-Piece, Regular-Port Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim: MSS SP-110.
a. Flowserve.
b. Homestead Valve; a division of Olson Technologies, Inc.
c. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co.
d. Milliken Valve Company.
e. Mueller Co.; Gas Products Div.
f. R&M Energy Systems, A Unit of Robbins & Myers, Inc.
A. General Requirements:
a. Actaris.
b. American Meter Company.
c. Fisher Control Valves and Regulators; Division of Emerson Process Management.
d. Invensys.
e. Richards Industries; Jordan Valve Div.
A. Dielectric Unions:
B. Dielectric Flanges:
C. Dielectric-Flange Kits:
2.7 SLEEVES
A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain
ends.
B. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe,
with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.
A. Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space
between pipe and sleeve.
2. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type
and number required for pipe material and size of pipe and sleeve.
3. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel.
4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating of length
required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one nut and bolt for each
sealing element.
2.9 ESCUTCHEONS
A. General Requirements for Escutcheons: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor
plates, with ID to fit around pipe or tube, and OD that completely covers opening.
F. Split-Plate, Stamped-Steel Escutcheons: With hinge, spring clips, and chrome-plated finish.
H. Split-Casting, Floor-Plate Escutcheons: Cast brass with concealed hinge and set screw.
2.10 GROUT
A. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-cement grout.
A. Description: Provide hermetic gas booster of multistage centrifugal design built in overhung con-
struction where the impellers are mounted on an extended motor shaft.
1. Design: Booster shall compress a maximum 9,000 ICFH of natural gas at 13.8" w.c.
boost pressure with inlet conditions of 70°F and 14.7 PbSIA. The specific gravity of the
gas shall be 0.6.
2. The pressure shall remain practically constant from the surge limit to the full volume rat-
ing while the power consumption shall increase in direct proportion to the volume of gas
handled at operating speed. The gas booster performance and design shall be approved
and listed by Underwriters Laboratories.
B. Motor: The motor shall be capable of operating continuously in the natural gas environment.
1. Rating: The motor shall be rated at 1.0 HP and suitable for operation on
230/460V/3PH/60HZ at 3500 RPM.
2. Enclosure: Shall be explosion proof per NEMA Class 1, Division 1, Group D classifica-
tion with thermal overload protection.
C. Gas Booster Casing: Shall be cylindrical fabricated steel construction. The enclosing
heads shall be of similar metal, properly braced for strength. The inlet and outlet connections
shall be flanged. The casing shall be leak tight to 10-3 cc/sec, with drive fans contained within
casing shell.
D. Impellers: The impeller peripheral speed shall not exceed 25,000 FPM. There shall be at least
1/8 inch clearance between each impeller and all stationary parts. Impellers shall be fabricated
from high strength aluminum alloy, and shall be attached to the shaft by a clamped or tapered
bushing hub.
E. Deflectors: Fabricated steel deflectors with properly curved guide vanes for directing the gas to
each succeeding impeller shall be provided.
G. Vibration and Performance Test: Each motor and compressor assembly shall be balanced for
minimum vibration (1.5 mils or less for 3500 RPM units) and shall be capable of operation
throughout its’ design range without the need for hold down or mounting bolts. Each unit shall
be given a complete factory performance test over its full range. The results of this test shall be
comparable to ASME Code Test requirements. A multiple orifice plate shall be installed on the
end of a fabricated still pipe section. For this test the pipe section will be at least one and one
-half pipe diameters long and the same diameter as the blower outlet on which it will be installed.
The outlet sections shall be sized for maximum velocity of 4600 FPM and 100% rated flow.
Pressure taps flush with the inside diameter of the test section shall be installed at least one-half
pipe diameter before the orifice plate. Sharp-edged orifices shall be opened to atmosphere, a few
at a time and pressure, temperature, speed, voltage, amperage, and kilowatt readings shall be rec-
orded for each test point. The air volume at a particular discharge pressure shall then be read
from a calibrated orifice chart and this volume shall be multiplied by the number of open orifices.
On request, certified performance curves shall then be supplied showing the exact performance
and efficiencies of each specific machine. Prior tests on similar or identical machines shall not be
acceptable.
H. Flexible Joints: To the inlet and discharge of each gas booster shall be installed a flanged expan-
sion joint suitable for natural gas service. Flexible joints shall be of the same diameter as the gas
booster’s inlet and discharge (4”) and shall serve as vibration isolation between the gas booster
and the gas train piping.
I. Isolation Valves: A lubricated plug valve shall be installed on the inlet and discharge of each gas
booster. Valves shall be gas tight and approved for natural gas service. Valves shall be of the
same diameter as the gas booster inlet and discharge (4”) and shall serve to isolated gas flow to
and from each gas booster. A valve shall also be installed between the inlet and discharge piping
to act as a service by-pass to allow gas to flow down stream if the booster is ever taken out of
service.
J. Check Valve: A check valve (4”) shall be installed on the common inlet main to the gas booster
and on the inlet piping to each gas booster. Valves shall be low-pressure drop type, approved for
natural gas service and shall be of the same diameter as the gas booster inlet. Valves shall be
mounted in a horizontal position and shall serve to prevent reversal of gas flow.
K. Gas Pressure Regulator: A gas pressure regulator shall be installed on the discharge piping of the
gas booster. The regulator shall be of the service type with lock-up feature and approved for natural
gas service. The regulator shall serve to limit the discharge pressure to 13.5 Inches W.C.G. Two (2)
flanged isolation of lubricated plug type shall be installed at a point 2-feet upstream and 2-feet
downstream of the regulator.
L. Low Pressure Switch: Provide one (1) UL Approved, manual reset type low inlet pressure
switch. The switch shall be used to shut down the on-line booster in the event of below
normal supply pressure. The switch shall be housed in a NEMA 1 enclosure, and preset at
3.5” w.c.
N. Manual Bypass Valve (For Low/No Flow Operation): Install a booster recirculating by-pass line
from the common booster discharge main to the common booster inlet main. The by-pass line
shall include a 2-inch diameter shut-off valve designed for natural gas service. The by-pass shall
serve to insure a nominal amount of gas flow is maintained through the booster and that slight
heat rise of gas is dissipated during low/no flow operation.
O. Control Panel (Single Operation): Provide a NEMA 12 Control Panel for the operation of one (1)
Spencer Natural Gas Booster. The control panel shall be manufactured by the gas booster
manufacturer and shall be built in accordance with UL508A Standards for Industrial Control
Panels and shall include:
1. One (1) OSHA type lock-out/tag-out circuit breaker disconnect switch.
2. One (1) ATL magnetic, non-reversing motor starter for 1.0 HP, 230/460V/3PH/60HZ GB
motor.
3. One (1) Control transformer.
4. One (1) Hand – Off – Auto selector switch to control Gas Booster.
• Hand - Allows start/shutdown from local pushbuttons only.
• Off - Off
• Auto – Allows start/shutdown of on-line booster via remote signal (dry contact).
5. Loss of Power Sequencing: In the event of supply power loss to the Spencer Control
Panel (SCP), the SCP shall “power up” automatically upon restoration of power supply
when the Hand-Off-Auto selector switch is in the Hand position (i.e.: facility power out-
age and restoration by an emergency supply). When in the Auto position, the booster
shall “power up” automatically only if a remote dry contact from the process controls is
maintained in the “closed” position (i.e.: calling for booster to run).
6. One (1) Set of Start/Stop push buttons.
7. Provisions (dry contacts) for remote start/shutdown of booster via a signal from process
controls.
8. Provisions for a low inlet gas pressure switch to shutdown the on-line booster, energize a
warning light, and energize the common alarm relay upon low supply pressure.
9. Provision for a N.C. motor high temperature switch to shut down the on-line booster,
energize a warning light, and energize the common alarm relay.
10. Provisions for a motor starter overload relay to shut down the on-line booster, flash the
booster running pilot light, and energize the common alarm relay.
11. One (1) Lamp Test push button to energize all pilot lights for a lamp test.
12. Panel Display lights for:
• Power “ON”
• Booster “Running”
• Low Supply Pressure
• High Motor Temperature
• Starter Overload Fault
13. One (1) Alarm horn (mounted in panel door) with reset and silence push buttons
A. Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant, PE film warning tape manufactured for
marking and identifying underground utilities, a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) wide and 4
mils (0.1 mm) thick, continuously inscribed with a description of utility, with metallic core
encased in a protective jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is
buried up to 30 inches (750 mm) deep; colored yellow.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing-in for natural-gas piping system to verify actual locations of piping
connections before equipment installation.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Close equipment shutoff valves before turning off natural gas to premises or piping section.
B. Install underground, natural-gas piping buried at least 36 inches (900 mm) below finished
grade. Comply with requirements in Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for excavating, trenching,
and backfilling.
1. If natural-gas piping is installed less than 36 inches (900 mm) below finished grade,
install it in containment conduit.
1. Apply joint cover kits to pipe after joining to cover, seal, and protect joints.
2. Repair damage to PE coating on pipe as recommended in writing by protective coating
manufacturer.
3. Replace pipe having damaged PE coating with new pipe.
1. Apply joint cover kits over tubing to cover, seal, and protect joints.
2. Repair damage to PE coating on pipe as recommended in writing by protective coating
manufacturer.
G. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical
sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between pipe
and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches (150 mm) in diameter.
2. Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves 6 inches (150 mm) and larger in diameter.
H. Underground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Seal
pipe penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch (25-mm)
annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
I. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements required for
pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and
install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that
cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.
J. Install pressure gage downstream from each service regulator. Pressure gages are specified in
Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages."
B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping
systems. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction loss,
expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to
layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.
C. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, sleeves, and openings in building structure during
progress of construction, to allow for mechanical installations.
E. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right
angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated
otherwise.
F. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.
H. Install natural-gas piping at uniform grade of 2 percent down toward drip and sediment traps.
1. New Piping:
a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-pattern type.
b. Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass
type with polished chrome-plated finish.
c. Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, stamped-
steel type.
d. Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type with
polished chrome-plated finish.
e. Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel type
and set screw.
f. Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type with rough-brass
finish.
g. Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel type with set
screw or spring clips.
h. Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, cast-brass type.
i. Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, stamped-steel type with set screw or
spring clips.
j. Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, floor-plate type.
2. Existing Piping:
L. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors
at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Comply with requirements
in Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems."
N. Comply with requirements in Sections specifying gas-fired appliances and equipment for
roughing-in requirements.
O. Drips and Sediment Traps: Install drips at points where condensate may collect, including
service-meter outlets. Locate where accessible to permit cleaning and emptying. Do not install
where condensate is subject to freezing.
1. Construct drips and sediment traps using tee fitting with bottom outlet plugged or capped.
Use nipple a minimum length of 3 pipe diameters, but not less than 3 inches (75 mm)
long and same size as connected pipe. Install with space below bottom of drip to remove
plug or cap.
P. Extend relief vent connections for service regulators, line regulators, and overpressure
protection devices to outdoors and terminate with weatherproof vent cap.
Q. Conceal pipe installations in walls, pipe spaces, utility spaces, above ceilings, below grade or
floors, and in floor channels unless indicated to be exposed to view.
1. Above Accessible Ceilings: Natural-gas piping, fittings, valves, and regulators may be
installed in accessible spaces without containment conduit.
2. In Floors: Install natural-gas piping with welded or brazed joints and protective coating
in cast-in-place concrete floors. Cover piping to be cast in concrete slabs with minimum
of 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) of concrete. Piping may not be in physical contact with other
metallic structures such as reinforcing rods or electrically neutral conductors. Do not
embed piping in concrete slabs containing quick-set additives or cinder aggregate.
3. In Floor Channels: Install natural-gas piping in floor channels. Channels must have
cover and be open to space above cover for ventilation.
4. In Walls or Partitions: Protect tubing installed inside partitions or hollow walls from
physical damage using steel striker barriers at rigid supports.
5. Prohibited Locations:
a. Do not install natural-gas piping in or through circulating air ducts, clothes or trash
chutes, chimneys or gas vents (flues), ventilating ducts, or dumbwaiter or elevator
shafts.
b. Do not install natural-gas piping in solid walls or partitions.
S. Use eccentric reducer fittings to make reductions in pipe sizes. Install fittings with level side
down.
U. Install unions in pipes NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller, adjacent to each valve, at final connection to
each piece of equipment. Unions are not required at flanged connections.
W. Install strainer on inlet of each line-pressure regulator and automatic or electrically operated
valve.
X. Install pressure gage upstream and downstream from each line regulator. Pressure gages are
specified in Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages."
B. Install metal shutoff valves upstream from service regulators. Shutoff valves are not required at
second regulators if two regulators are installed in series.
D. Install service regulators mounted outside with vent outlet horizontal or facing down. Install
screen in vent outlet if not integral with service regulator.
E. Install metal shutoff valves upstream from service meters. Install dielectric fittings downstream
from service meters.
G. Install metal bollards to protect meter assemblies. Comply with requirements in Division 5
Section "Metal Fabrications" for pipe bollards.
A. Install manual gas shutoff valve for each gas appliance ahead of corrugated stainless-steel
tubing, aluminum, or copper connector.
C. Install regulators and overpressure protection devices with maintenance access space adequate
for servicing and testing.
B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before
assembly.
C. Threaded Joints:
1. Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads complying with ASME B1.20.1.
2. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies.
3. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter of pipe.
4. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dryseal
threading is specified.
5. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or
damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.
D. Welded Joints:
E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube"
Chapter.
F. Flanged Joints: Install gasket material, size, type, and thickness appropriate for natural-gas
service. Install gasket concentrically positioned.
G. Flared Joints: Cut tubing with roll cutting tool. Flare tube end with tool to result in flare
dimensions complying with SAE J513. Tighten finger tight, then use wrench. Do not
overtighten.
A. Install seismic restraints on piping. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices
specified in Division 15 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and
Equipment."
B. Comply with requirements for pipe hangers and supports specified in Division 15 Section
"Hangers and Supports."
C. Install hangers for horizontal steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum
rod sizes:
1. NPS 1 (DN 25) and Smaller: Maximum span, 96 inches (2438 mm); minimum rod size,
3/8 inch (10 mm).
2. NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32): Maximum span, 108 inches (2743 mm); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch
(10 mm).
3. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2 (DN 40 and DN 50): Maximum span, 108 inches (2743 mm);
minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (10 mm).
4. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 3-1/2 (DN 65 to DN 90): Maximum span, 10 feet (3 m); minimum rod
size, 1/2 inch (13 mm).
5. NPS 4 (DN 100) and Larger: Maximum span, 10 feet (3 m); minimum rod size, 5/8 inch
(15.8 mm).
D. Install hangers for horizontal drawn-temper copper tubing with the following maximum spacing
and minimum rod sizes:
1. NPS 3/8 (DN 10): Maximum span, 48 inches (1220 mm); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch
(10 mm).
2. NPS 1/2 and NPS 5/8 (DN 15 and DN 18): Maximum span, 72 inches (1830 mm);
minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (10 mm).
3. NPS 3/4 and NPS 7/8 (DN 20 and DN 22): Maximum span, 84 inches (2134 mm);
minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (10 mm).
4. NPS 1 (DN 25): Maximum span, 96 inches (2440 mm); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (10
mm).
E. Install hangers for horizontal, corrugated stainless-steel tubing with the following maximum
spacing and minimum rod sizes:
1. NPS 3/8 (DN 10): Maximum span, 48 inches (1220 mm); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch
(10 mm).
2. NPS 1/2 (DN 15): Maximum span, 72 inches (1830 mm); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch
(10 mm).
3.9 CONNECTIONS
B. Install natural-gas piping electrically continuous, and bonded to gas appliance equipment
grounding conductor of the circuit powering the appliance according to NFPA 70.
D. Connect piping to appliances using manual gas shutoff valves and unions. Install valve within
72 inches (1800 mm) of each gas-fired appliance and equipment. Install union between valve
and appliances or equipment.
E. Sediment Traps: Install tee fitting with capped nipple in bottom to form drip, as close as
practical to inlet of each appliance.
A. Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification" for piping and
valve identification.
B. Install detectable warning tape directly above gas piping, 12 inches (300 mm) below finished
grade, except 6 inches (150 mm) below subgrade under pavements and slabs.
3.11 PAINTING
A. Comply with requirements in Division 9 painting Sections for painting interior and exterior
natural-gas piping.
B. Paint exposed, exterior metal piping, valves, service regulators, service meters and meter bars,
earthquake valves, and piping specialties, except components, with factory-applied paint or
protective coating.
C. Paint exposed, interior metal piping, valves, service regulators, service meters and meter bars,
earthquake valves, and piping specialties, except components, with factory-applied paint or
protective coating.
D. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-applied finishes with materials and
by procedures to match original factory finish.
A. Concrete Bases: Anchor equipment to concrete base according to seismic codes at Project.
1. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches (100 mm)
larger in both directions than supported unit.
2. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated,
install dowel rods on 18-inch (450-mm) centers around the full perimeter of the base.
3. Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through concrete
base, and anchor into structural concrete floor.
4. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting
drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be
embedded.
5. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.
6. Use 3000-psig (20.7-MPa), 28-day, compressive-strength concrete and reinforcement as
specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
1. Test, inspect, and purge natural gas according to NFPA 54 and authorities having
jurisdiction.
C. Natural-gas piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
1. PE pipe and fittings joined by heat fusion, or mechanical couplings; service-line risers
with tracer wire terminated in an accessible location.
2. Steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints, or mechanical couplings. Coat
pipe and fittings with protective coating for steel piping.
3. Annealed-temper copper tube with wrought-copper fittings and brazed joints. Coat pipe
and fittings with protective coating for copper tubing.
D. Containment Conduit: Steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints. Coat pipe and
fittings with protective coating for steel piping.
3.16 INDOOR PIPING SCHEDULE FOR SYSTEM PRESSURES LESS THAN 0.5 PSIG (3.45
kPa)
A. Aboveground, branch piping NPS 1 (DN 25) and smaller shall be the following:
1. Corrugated stainless-steel tubing with mechanical fittings having socket or threaded ends
to match adjacent piping.
2. Annealed-temper, tin-lined copper tube with flared joints and fittings.
3. Annealed-temper, copper tube with wrought-copper fittings and brazed joints.
4. Aluminum tube with flared fittings and joints.
5. Steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded joints.
D. Containment Conduit: Steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints. Coat pipe and
fittings with protective coating for steel piping.
E. Containment Conduit Vent Piping: Steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded or
wrought-steel fittings with welded joints. Coat underground pipe and fittings with protective
coating for steel piping.
3.17 INDOOR PIPING SCHEDULE FOR SYSTEM PRESSURES MORE THAN 0.5 PSIG (3.45
kPa) AND LESS THAN 5 PSIG (34.5 kPa)
A. Aboveground, branch piping NPS 1 (DN 25) and smaller shall be the following:
1. Corrugated stainless-steel tubing with mechanical fittings having socket or threaded ends
to match adjacent piping.
2. Annealed-temper, tin-lined copper tube with flared joints and fittings.
3. Annealed-temper, copper tube with wrought-copper fittings and brazed joints.
4. Aluminum tube with flared fittings and joints.
5. Steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded joints.
D. Containment Conduit: Steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints. Coat
underground pipe and fittings with protective coating for steel piping.
E. Containment Conduit Vent Piping: Steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded or
wrought-steel fittings with welded joints. Coat underground pipe and fittings with protective
coating for steel piping.
A. Connections to Existing Gas Piping: Use valve and fitting assemblies made for tapping utility's
gas mains and listed by an NRTL.
B. Underground:
1. PE valves.
A. Valves for pipe sizes NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller at service meter shall be the following:
B. Valves for pipe sizes NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger at service meter shall be the following:
C. Distribution piping valves for pipe sizes NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller shall be the following:
D. Distribution piping valves for pipe sizes NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger shall be the following:
PLUMBING FIXTURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following conventional plumbing fixtures and related components:
1. Division 2 Section "Water Distribution" for exterior plumbing fixtures and hydrants.
2. Division 15 Section "Drinking Fountains and Water Coolers."
3. Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for backflow preventers, floor drains, and
specialty fixtures not included in this Section.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Accessible Fixture: Plumbing fixture that can be approached, entered, and used by people with
disabilities.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of plumbing fixture indicated. Include selected fixture and trim,
fittings, accessories, appliances, appurtenances, equipment, and supports. Indicate materials
and finishes, dimensions, construction details, and flow-control rates.
B. LEED Submittal:
1. Product Data for Credit WE 2: Documentation indicating flow and water consumption
requirements.
D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For plumbing fixtures to include in emergency, operation,
and maintenance manuals.
A. Source Limitations: Obtain plumbing fixtures, faucets, and other components of each category
through one source from a single manufacturer.
1. Exception: If fixtures, faucets, or other components are not available from a single
manufacturer, obtain similar products from other manufacturers specified for that
category.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in ICC A117.1, "Accessible and Usable
Buildings and Facilities" for plumbing fixtures for people with disabilities.
E. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components--Health Effects,"
for fixture materials that will be in contact with potable water.
F. Select combinations of fixtures and trim, faucets, fittings, and other components that are
compatible.
G. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for plumbing
fixtures:
H. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for lavatory
and sink faucets:
1. Backflow Protection Devices for Faucets with Side Spray: ASME A112.18.3M.
2. Backflow Protection Devices for Faucets with Hose-Thread Outlet: ASME A112.18.3M.
3. Faucets: ASME A112.18.1.
4. Hose-Connection Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1011.
5. Hose-Coupling Threads: ASME B1.20.7.
6. Integral, Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001.
7. NSF Potable-Water Materials: NSF 61.
8. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1.
9. Sensor-Actuated Faucets and Electrical Devices: UL 1951.
10. Supply Fittings: ASME A112.18.1.
11. Brass Waste Fittings: ASME A112.18.2.
I. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for
miscellaneous fittings:
J. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for
miscellaneous components:
1.6 WARRANTY
2. Warranty Period for Commercial Applications: One year(s) from date of Substantial
Completion.
3. Warranty Period for Residential Applications of Shells: Five years from date of
Substantial Completion.
4. Warranty Period for Residential Applications of Pumps and Blowers: Five years from
date of Substantial Completion.
5. Warranty Period for Residential Applications of Electronic Controls: Five years from
date of Substantial Completion.
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Faucet Washers and O-Rings: Equal to 10 percent of amount of each type and size
installed.
2. Faucet Cartridges and O-Rings: Equal to 5 percent of amount of each type and size
installed.
3. Flushometer Valve, Repair Kits: Equal to 10 percent of amount of each type installed,
but no fewer than 12 of each type.
4. Provide hinged-top wood or metal box, or individual metal boxes, with separate
compartments for each type and size of extra materials listed above.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Lavatory Faucets,:
A. Sink Faucets:
4. Description: Kitchen faucet without spray. Include hot- and cold-water indicators;
coordinate faucet inlets with supplies and fixture holes; coordinate outlet with spout and
fixture receptor.
A. Urinal Flushometers,:
4. Description: Flushometer for urinal water-closet-type fixture. Include brass body with
corrosion-resistant internal components, non-hold-open feature, control stop with check
valve, vacuum breaker, copper or brass tubing, and polished chrome-plated finish on
exposed parts.
A. Toilet Seats,:
3. Description: Manufactured plastic wraps for covering plumbing fixture hot- and cold-
water supplies and trap and drain piping. Comply with Americans with Disabilities Act
(ADA) requirements.
a. TRUEBRO, Inc.
3. Description: Manufactured plastic enclosure for covering plumbing fixture hot- and
cold-water supplies and trap and drain piping. Comply with ADA requirements.
C. Water-Closet Supports,:
D. Urinal Supports,:
1. Description: Type I, urinal carrier with fixture support plates and coupling with seal and
fixture bolts and hardware matching fixture for wall-mounting, urinal-type fixture.
Include steel uprights with feet.
2. Accessible-Fixture Support: Include rectangular steel uprights.
3. Description: Fitting suitable for use with domestic dishwashers and for deck mounting;
with plastic body, chrome-plated brass cover; and capacity of at least 5 gpm (0.32 L/s);
and inlet pressure of at least 5 psig (35 kPa) at a temperature of at least 140 deg F (60
deg C). Include 5/8-inch- (16-mm-) ID inlet and 7/8-inch- (22-mm-) ID outlet hose
connections.
4. Hoses: Rubber and suitable for temperature of at least 140 deg F (60 deg C).
2.8 DISPOSERS
A. Disposers,:
A. Water Closets,:
2.10 URINALS
A. Urinals,:
2.11 LAVATORIES
a. Type: Self-rimming.
b. Oval Lavatory Size: 19 by 16 inches (483 by 406 mm).
c. Faucet Hole Punching: One hole.
d. Faucet Hole Location: Top.
i. Drain Piping: NPS 1-1/4 by NPS 1-1/2 (DN 32 by DN 40) chrome-plated, cast-
brass P-trap;, 0.032-inch- (0.8-mm-) thick tubular brass waste to wall; and wall
escutcheon.
j. Drain Piping: Schedule 40 PVC, NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32) P-trap;, tubular waste to
wall; and wall escutcheon.
A. Kitchen Sinks,:
i. Sink Faucet:
j. Supplies: NPS 1/2 (DN 15) chrome-plated copper with stops.
k. Drain Piping: NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) chrome-plated, cast-brass P-trap; 0.045-inch-
(1.1-mm-) thick tubular brass waste to wall; and wall escutcheon(s).
l. Drain Piping: Schedule 40 PVC, NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) P-trap; tubular waste to wall;
continuous waste; and wall escutcheon(s).
m. Disposer: .
n. Dishwasher Air-Gap Fitting: Not required.
o. Hot-Water Dispenser: Not required
A. Service Basins,:
a. Shape: Square.
b. Size: 24 by 24 inches (610 by 610 mm).
c. Height: 6 inches (150 mm).
d. Tiling Flange: Not required.
e. Rim Guard: On all top surfaces.
f. Color: Not applicable.
g. Faucet: Sink.
h. Drain: Grid with NPS 3 (DN 80) outlet.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing-in of water supply and sanitary drainage and vent piping systems to verify
actual locations of piping connections before plumbing fixture installation.
B. Examine cabinets, counters, floors, and walls for suitable conditions where fixtures will be
installed.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
A. Assemble plumbing fixtures, trim, fittings, and other components according to manufacturers'
written instructions.
1. Use carrier supports with waste fitting and seal for back-outlet fixtures.
2. Use carrier supports without waste fitting for fixtures with tubular waste piping.
3. Use chair-type carrier supports with rectangular steel uprights for accessible fixtures.
C. Install back-outlet, wall-mounting fixtures onto waste fitting seals and attach to supports.
F. Install floor-mounting, back-outlet water closets attached to building floor substrate and wall
bracket and onto waste fitting seals.
I. Install water-supply piping with stop on each supply to each fixture to be connected to water
distribution piping. Attach supplies to supports or substrate within pipe spaces behind fixtures.
Install stops in locations where they can be easily reached for operation.
1. Exception: Use ball, gate, or globe valves if supply stops are not specified with fixture.
Valves are specified in Division 15 Section "Valves."
J. Install trap and tubular waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be directly connected to
sanitary drainage system.
K. Install tubular waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be indirectly connected to drainage
system.
L. Install flushometer valves for accessible water closets and urinals with handle mounted on wide
side of compartment. Install other actuators in locations that are easy for people with
disabilities to reach.
M. Install tanks for accessible, tank-type water closets with lever handle mounted on wide side of
compartment.
Q. Install water-supply flow-control fittings with specified flow rates in fixture supplies at stop
valves.
R. Install faucet flow-control fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts if
faucets are not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters if required.
S. Install shower flow-control fittings with specified maximum flow rates in shower arms.
U. Install disposer in outlet of each sink indicated to have disposer. Install switch where indicated
or in wall adjacent to sink if location is not indicated.
V. Install hot-water dispensers in back top surface of sink or in countertop with spout over sink.
W. Install escutcheons at piping wall ceiling penetrations in exposed, finished locations and within
cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings.
Escutcheons are specified in Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods."
X. Set service basins in leveling bed of cement grout. Grout is specified in Division 15 Section
"Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods."
Y. Seal joints between fixtures and walls, floors, and countertops using sanitary-type, one-part,
mildew-resistant silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Sealants are specified in
Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Connect fixtures with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil, waste, and vent
piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures.
A. Verify that installed plumbing fixtures are categories and types specified for locations where
installed.
C. Inspect installed plumbing fixtures for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components.
D. Test installed fixtures after water systems are pressurized for proper operation. Replace
malfunctioning fixtures and components, then retest. Repeat procedure until units operate
properly.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Operate and adjust faucets and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning fixtures, fittings,
and controls.
B. Operate and adjust disposers and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning units and
controls.
C. Adjust water pressure at faucets and flushometer valves to produce proper flow and stream.
D. Replace washers and seals of leaking and dripping faucets and stops.
3.6 CLEANING
A. Clean fixtures, faucets, and other fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods
and materials. Do the following:
1. Remove faucet spouts and strainers, remove sediment and debris, and reinstall strainers
and spouts.
2. Remove sediment and debris from drains.
B. After completing installation of exposed, factory-finished fixtures, faucets, and fittings, inspect
exposed finishes and repair damaged finishes.
3.7 PROTECTION
B. Do not allow use of plumbing fixtures for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by
Owner.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in ICC A117.1, "Accessible and Usable
Buildings and Facilities"; Public Law 90-480, "Architectural Barriers Act"; and Public
Law 101-336, "Americans with Disabilities Act"; for fixtures for people with disabilities.
C. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components--Health Effects,"
for fixture materials that will be in contact with potable water.
D. ARI Standard: Comply with ARI's "Directory of Certified Drinking Water Coolers" for style
classifications.
E. ARI Standard: Comply with ARI 1010, "Self-Contained, Mechanically Refrigerated Drinking-
Water Coolers," for water coolers and with ARI's "Directory of Certified Drinking Water
Coolers" for type and style classifications.
F. ASHRAE Standard: Comply with ASHRAE 34, "Designation and Safety Classification of
Refrigerants" for water coolers. Provide HFC 134a (tetrafluoroethane) refrigerant unless
otherwise indicated.
A. Water Coolers,:
4. Description: Accessible, ARI 1010, Type PB, pressure with bubbler, Style W, wall-
mounting water cooler for adult-mounting height.
1) Capacity: 8 gph (0.0084 L/s) of 50 deg F (10 deg C) cooled water from 80
deg F (27 deg C) inlet water and 90 deg F (32 deg C) ambient air
temperature.
2) Electrical Characteristics: 1/6 hp; 120-V ac; single phase; 60 Hz.
h. Support: Type II, water cooler carrier. Refer to "Fixture Supports" Article.
1. Josam Co.
2. MIFAB Manufacturing, Inc.
3. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.
4. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.
5. Watts Drainage Products Inc.; a div. of Watts Industries, Inc.
6. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.
C. Description: ASME A112.6.1M, water cooler carriers. Include vertical, steel uprights with feet
and tie rods and bearing plates with mounting studs matching fixture to be supported.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATIONS
A. Use carrier off-floor supports for wall-mounting fixtures, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Use chrome-plated brass or copper tube, fittings, and valves in locations exposed to view.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install off-floor supports affixed to building substrate and attach wall-mounting fixtures, unless
otherwise indicated.
B. Install fixtures level and plumb. For fixtures indicated for children, install at height required by
authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Install water-supply piping with shutoff valve on supply to each fixture to be connected to water
distribution piping. Use ball, gate, or globe valve. Install valves in locations where they can be
easily reached for operation. Valves are specified in Division 15 Section "Valves."
D. Install trap and waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be connected to sanitary drainage
system.
E. Install pipe escutcheons at wall penetrations in exposed, finished locations. Use deep-pattern
escutcheons where required to conceal protruding pipe fittings. Escutcheons are specified in
Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods."
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Connect fixtures with water supplies, traps, and risers, and with soil, waste, and vent piping.
Use size fittings required to match fixtures.
A. Water Cooler Testing: After electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with
requirements. Test and adjust controls and safeties.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust fixture flow regulators for proper flow and stream height.
SUMP PUMPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following sump pumps and accessories, inside the building, for
building storm drainage systems:
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type and size of sump pump specified. Include certified performance
curves with operating points plotted on curves, and rated capacities of selected models,
furnished specialties, and accessories.
C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each sump pump to include in emergency, operation, and
maintenance manuals.
A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of sump
pumps and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product
Requirements."
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
A. Retain shipping flange protective covers and protective coatings during storage.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases and pits. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork
requirements are specified in Division 3.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
A. Manufacturers:
C. Casing: Cast iron; with cast-iron inlet strainer, legs that elevate pump to permit flow into
impeller, and vertical discharge with companion flange for piping connection.
E. Casing: Stainless steel; with stainless-steel inlet strainer, legs that elevate pump to permit flow
into impeller, and vertical discharge with companion flange suitable for piping connection.
G. Casing and Impeller: Cast-iron casing with metal inlet strainer and brass, bronze, or cast-iron
impeller.
H. Casing and Impeller: Cast-iron or plastic casing with inlet strainer and metal or plastic impeller.
I. Pump and Motor Shaft: Stainless steel, with factory-sealed, grease-lubricated ball bearings.
J. Motor: Hermetically sealed, capacitor-start type, with built-in overload protection; three-
conductor waterproof power cable of length required, and with grounding plug and cable-
sealing assembly for connection at pump. Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section
"Motors."
K. Pump Discharge Piping: Factory or field fabricated, ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40,
galvanized-steel pipe or PVC.
L. Basin or Pit Cover: Cast iron or steel with bituminous coating and strong enough to support
controls. See Part 2 "Sump Pump Basins and Pits" Article for other requirements.
M. Controls: NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure, pedestal-mounted float switch; with float, float rod,
and rod buttons.
N. Controls: NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure, pedestal-mounted float switch; with float, float rod,
and rod buttons. Include automatic alternator to alternate operation of pump units on successive
cycles and to operate multiple units if one pump cannot handle load.
O. Controls: NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure, pedestal mounted unless wall mounting is indicated;
with two mercury-float switches in NEMA 250, Type 6 enclosures; mounting rod; and electric
cables.
P. Controls: NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure, pedestal mounted unless wall mounting is indicated;
with three mercury-float switches in NEMA 250, Type 6 enclosures; mounting rod; and electric
cables. Include automatic alternator to alternate operation of pump units on successive cycles
and to operate multiple units if one pump cannot handle load.
1. Float Guide: Pipe or other restraint for floats and rods in basins of depth greater than 60
inches (1500 mm).
2. High-Water Alarm: Cover-mounted, compression-probe alarm, with electric bell; 120-V
ac, with transformer and contacts for remote alarm bell.
Q. Controls: NEMA 250, Type 6, 120-V ac, float switch, mounted on discharge piping.
A. Description: Factory fabricated basin with sump, pipe connections, and separate cover.
1. Material: Fiberglass.
2. Reinforcement: Mounting plates for pumps, fittings, and accessories.
3. Anchor Flange: Same material as or compatible with sump, cast in or attached to sump,
in location and of size required to anchor basin in concrete slab.
C. Cover: Fabricate with openings having gaskets, seals, and bushings, for access to pumps, pump
shafts, control rods, discharge piping, vent connections, and power cables.
1. Material: Fiberglass.
2. Diameter: 48”
3. Depth: 60”
4. Inlet No. 1:
5. Inlet No. 2:
6. Cover:
A. Description: Concrete pit with sump, pipe connections, curb frame, and separate cover.
B. Sump: Construct of watertight, cast-in-place, reinforced concrete with sidewall openings for
pipe connections. Cast-in-place concrete, formwork, and reinforcement are specified in
Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
1. Pipe Connections: Sleeved openings large enough for mechanical sleeve seals for
drainage piping. Sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals are specified in Division 15
Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods," and drainage piping is specified in
Division 15 Section "Storm Drainage Piping."
a. Pattern: Z-cross-section shape with raised outer rim of height matching cover, for
recessed mounting having installed cover flush with top of floor slab.
A. Manufacturers:
1. Anamet, Inc.
2. Flex-Hose Co., Inc.
3. Flexicraft Industries.
4. Flex-Pression, Ltd.
5. Flex-Weld, Inc.
6. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc.
7. Mercer Rubber.
8. Metraflex, Inc.
9. Proco Products, Inc.
10. Tozen America Corporation.
11. Unaflex Inc.
B. Description: 125-psig (860-kPa) minimum working-pressure rating and ends matching pump
connection:
1. Bronze Flexible Connectors: Corrugated, bronze inner tubing covered with bronze wire
braid. Include copper-tube ends or bronze flanged ends, braze welded to tubing.
2. Stainless-Steel Flexible Connectors: Corrugated, stainless-steel inner tubing covered
with stainless-steel wire braid. Include stainless-steel nipples or flanges, welded to
tubing.
A. Provide auxiliary contacts in pump controllers for interface to building automation system.
Include the following:
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing-in of plumbing piping to verify actual locations of storm drainage piping
connections before sump pump installation.
3.2 CONCRETE
A. Install concrete bases of dimensions indicated for pumps and controllers. Refer to Division 15
Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods."
1. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated,
install dowel rods on 18-inch (450-mm) centers around full perimeter of base.
2. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete
base and anchor into structural concrete floor.
3. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams,
instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
4. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.
C. Install pumps and arrange to provide access for maintenance including removal of motors,
impellers, couplings, and accessories.
D. Set submersible sump pumps on basin or pit floor. Make direct connections to storm drainage
piping.
E. Install sump pump basins and connect to drainage piping. Brace interior of basins according to
manufacturer's written instructions to prevent distortion or collapse during concrete placement.
Set basin cover and fasten to basin top flange. Install cover so top surface is flush with finished
floor.
G. Install packaged, pedestal, drainage pump units and make direct connection to storm drainage
piping.
H. Install packaged, submersible, drainage pump unit basins on floor or concrete base unless
recessed installation is indicated. Make direct connections to storm drainage piping.
3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in Division 15 Section "Storm Drainage Piping."
Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
C. Connect storm drainage piping to pumps. Install discharge piping equal to or greater than size
of pump discharge piping. Refer to Division 15 Section "Storm Drainage Piping."
1. Start motors.
2. Open discharge valves slowly.
3. Check general mechanical operation of pumps and motors.
1. Pump Controls: Set pump controls for automatic start, stop, and alarm operation as
required for system application.
2. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated, or if not
indicated, for normal operation.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type and size of water heater indicated. Include rated capacities,
operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.
B. LEED Submittal:
1. Product Data for Prerequisite EA 2: Documentation indicating that units comply with
ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004, Section 7 - "Service Water Heating."
D. Product Certificates: For each type of commercial and instantaneous electric water heater,
signed by product manufacturer.
1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of
assembled components or on calculation.
a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of
any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified."
b. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of
any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the
unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."
H. Operation and Maintenance Data: For electric water heaters to include in emergency, operation,
and maintenance manuals.
A. Source Limitations: Obtain same type of electric water heaters through one source from a
single manufacturer.
B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of electric
water heaters and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1 Section
"Product Requirements."
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
E. ASME Compliance: Where indicated, fabricate and label commercial water heater storage
tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.
F. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; Sections 1
through 9," for all components that will be in contact with potable water.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases with Architectural and Structural Drawings.
1.6 WARRANTY
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
A. Flow-Control, Instantaneous Electric Water Heaters: Comply with UL 499 for tankless electric
(water heater) heating appliance.
1. Manufacturers:
2. Construction: Copper piping or tubing complying with NSF 61 barrier materials for
potable water, without storage capacity.
A. Commercial, Storage Electric Water Heaters: Comply with UL 1453 requirements for storage-
tank-type water heaters.
1. Available Manufacturers:
1) NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded ends according to ASME B1.20.1.
2) NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Flanged ends according to ASME B16.5
for steel and stainless-steel flanges, and according to ASME B16.24 for
copper and copper-alloy flanges.
a. Capacity: 30 gallon
b. Recovery: at 100 deg F (56 deg C) temperature rise.
c. Temperature Setting: 140 deg F (60 deg C).
d. Number of Heating Elements: Two.
A. Description: Steel pressure-rated tank constructed with welded joints and factory-installed
butyl-rubber diaphragm. Include air precharge to minimum system-operating pressure at tank.
1. Manufacturers:
a. AMTROL Inc.
b. Armstrong Pumps, Inc.
c. Honeywell Sparco.
d. Myers, F. E.; Pentair Pump Group (The).
e. Smith, A. O.; Aqua-Air Div.
f. State Industries, Inc.
g. Taco, Inc.
h. Watts Regulator Co.
2. Construction:
A. Combination Temperature and Pressure Relief Valves: ASME rated and stamped and
complying with ASME PTC 25.3. Include relieving capacity at least as great as heat input, and
include pressure setting less than water heater working-pressure rating. Select relief valves with
sensing element that extends into storage tank.
B. Pressure Relief Valves: ASME rated and stamped and complying with ASME PTC 25.3.
Include pressure setting less than water heater working-pressure rating.
D. Water Heater Stands: Water heater manufacturer's factory-fabricated steel stand for floor
mounting and capable of supporting water heater and water. Include dimension that will
support bottom of water heater a minimum of 18 inches (457 mm) above the floor.
E. Water Heater Mounting Brackets: Water heater manufacturer's factory-fabricated steel bracket
for wall mounting and capable of supporting water heater and water.
F. Drain Pans: Corrosion-resistant metal with raised edge. Include dimensions not less than base
of water heater and include drain outlet not less than NPS 3/4 (DN 20).
G. Piping Manifold Kits: Water heater manufacturer's factory-fabricated inlet and outlet piping
arrangement for multiple-unit installation. Include piping and valves for field assembly that are
capable of isolating each water heater and of providing balanced flow through each water
heater.
I. Water Regulators: ASSE 1003, water-pressure reducing valve. Set at 25-psig- (172.5-kPa-)
maximum outlet pressure, unless otherwise indicated.
J. Shock Absorbers: ASSE 1010 or PDI WH 201, Size A water hammer arrester.
A. Test and inspect water heater storage tanks, specified to be ASME-code construction, according
to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
B. Hydrostatically test commercial water heater storage tanks before shipment to minimum of one
and one-half times pressure rating.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
1. Exception: Omit concrete bases for commercial water heaters if installation on stand,
bracket, suspended platform, or direct on floor is indicated.
2. Concrete base construction requirements are specified in Division 15 Section "Basic
Mechanical Materials and Methods."
B. Install water heaters level and plumb, according to layout drawings, original design, and
referenced standards. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. Arrange units so
controls and devices needing service are accessible.
D. Install combination temperature and pressure relief valves in top portion of storage tanks. Use
relief valves with sensing elements that extend into tanks. Extend commercial-water-heater
relief-valve outlet, with drain piping same as domestic water piping in continuous downward
pitch, and discharge by positive air gap onto closest floor drain.
E. Install combination temperature and pressure relief valves in water piping for water heaters
without storage. Extend commercial-water-heater relief-valve outlet, with drain piping same as
domestic water piping in continuous downward pitch, and discharge by positive air gap onto
closest floor drain.
F. Install water-heater drain piping as indirect waste to spill by positive air gap into open drains or
over floor drains. Install hose-end drain valves at low points in water piping for water heaters
that do not have tank drains. Refer to Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for hose-end
drain valves.
G. Install thermometer on outlet piping of water heaters. Refer to Division 15 Section "Meters and
Gages" for thermometers.
I. Install pressure gage(s) on inlet and outlet of commercial electric water- heater piping. Refer to
Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages" for pressure gages.
J. Assemble and install inlet and outlet piping manifold kits for multiple water heaters. Fabricate,
modify, or arrange manifolds for balanced water flow through each water heater. Include
shutoff valve, thermometer in each water heater inlet and outlet, and throttling valve in each
water heater outlet. Refer to Division 15 Section "Valves" for general-duty valves and to
Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages" for thermometers.
L. Install piping-type heat traps on inlet and outlet piping of water heater storage tanks without
integral or fitting-type heat traps.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Install piping adjacent to water heaters to allow service and maintenance. Arrange piping for
easy removal of water heaters.
B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. Leak Test: After installation, test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.
2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, confirm proper operation.
3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
C. Remove and replace water heaters that do not pass tests and inspections and retest as specified
above.
3.4 DEMONSTRATION
CONDENSING BOILERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, including rated capacities of
selected model, weights (shipping, installed, and operating), installation and start-up
instructions, along with furnished accessory information.
F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For boilers to include in emergency, operation, and
maintenance manuals.
1. ASME Stamp Certification and Report: Submit "A," "S," or "PP" stamp certificate of
authorization, as required by authorities having jurisdiction, and document hydrostatic
testing of piping external to boiler.
B. The hot water boiler maximum working pressure will be 160 psig.
C. The entire boiler system and its installation shall conform to the manufacturer's instructions,
applicable codes and associated National Board requirements.
D. The equipment shall, as a minimum, be in strict compliance with the requirements of this
specification and shall be the manufacturer’s standard commercial product unless specified
otherwise. Additional equipment features, details, accessories, etc. which are not specifically
identified but which are a part of the manufacturer’s standard commercial product, shall be
included in the equipment being furnished.
E. The equipment shall be of the type, design, and size that the manufacturer currently offers for sale
and appears in the manufacturer’s current catalog.
F. The equipment shall fit within the allocated space, leaving ample allowance for maintenance and
inspection.
G. The equipment shall be new and fabricated from new materials. The equipment shall be free from
defects in materials and workmanship.
H. All units of the same classification shall be identical to the extent necessary to ensure
interchangeability of parts, assemblies, accessories, and space parts wherever possible.
I. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
J. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and label boilers to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code.
K. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 Compliance: Boilers shall have minimum efficiency according to "Gas
and Oil Fired Boilers - Minimum Efficiency Requirements."
M. DOE Compliance: Minimum efficiency shall comply with 10 CFR 430, Subpart B, Appendix N,
"Uniform Test Method for Measuring the Energy Consumption of Furnaces and Boilers."
N. UL Compliance: Test boilers for compliance with UL 795, "Commercial-Industrial Gas Heating
Equipment." Boilers shall be listed and labeled by a testing agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction.
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete,
reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Boiler manufacturer shall guarantee in writing equipment to be free of defects for one year af-
ter start-up date or 18 months from factory shipment, and to repair or replace at manufactur-
er's expense any defective parts. Unit shall receive such factory tests as are deemed advisable
by the manufacturer to check construction and operation.
B. The pressure vessel shall be guaranteed against thermal shock for 10 years when utilized in a
closed loop hydronic heating system with a maximum temperature differential rating of up to
170 °F. The boiler pressure vessel shall be guaranteed accordingly without a minimum flow
rate or return water temperature requirement. The boiler shall not require the use of flow
switches or other devices to ensure minimum flow.
C. The pressure vessel shall carry a 10-year warranty against material and workmanship defects.
D. The combustor and exhaust pipes (heat exchanger) shall be guaranteed against flue gas corro-
sion for a period of 10 years for carbon steel boilers and a period of 5 years for stainless steel
boilers.
E. All parts not covered by the above warranties shall carry a one-year warranty. This shall in-
clude all electrical and burner components.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. The exhaust decoupler shall be constructed of ¼”corrosion resistant Corten and include a flue
gas condensate drain.
D. The pulse combustor location shall be such that all combustor assembly components are lo-
cated within water-backed areas.
E. The boiler’s pressure vessel, combustor, and exhaust decoupler shall be encased in an 18
gauge metal cabinet with primer and finish coat of paint.
A. Boiler shall be fire-tube design, utilizing the principles of pulse combustion. The boiler shall
be self-aspirating and require no forced or induced draft fan to supply air for combustion after
ignition.
B. External convection and radiation heat losses to the boiler room from the boiler shall be less
than 0.5% of the rated boiler input. The boiler shall not contain any refractory, refractory lin-
ing or ceramic in the furnace or firebox.
C. The boiler shall be designed for operation in a condensing mode, in order to extract the latent
heat from the combustion products. The boiler shall have a minimum acceptable fuel-to-
water efficiency of 91% at a return water temperature of 80 °F and at the full rated input ca-
pacity of the boiler. Overall efficiency at the low fire rated input capacity will be 98%.
D. The boiler shall be able to operate without the use of a 3-way valves or primary/secondary
piping loops.
2.4 CONTROLS
A. The flame safeguard system shall be Fulton Model RM7865 with LED display module. The
control shall provide a 35-second pre-purge and post-purge. The control shall maintain a
running history of operating hours, number of cycles, and the most recent six faults. The con-
trol shall have the capability to be connected to a keyboard display module that will retrieve
this information.
C. A combustion control system shall be furnished which provides a turndown ratio of 5:1 per
ANSI Z21.13 (3:1 for LPG Fired Boilers) over the input range from high to low fire. The
supply temperature and setpoint temperature shall be displayed at all times by the operating
temperature control. Firing rate shall be controlled by a continuous 4-20mA analog signal to
a modulation motor.
D. All controls to be panel mounted and so located on the boiler as to provide ease of servicing
the boiler without disturbing the controls and also located to prevent possible damage by wa-
ter according to CSA requirements. Electrical power supply shall be 120 volts, 60 cycle, sin-
gle phase, 10 Amps maximum. Boiler shall draw less than 1 Amp while in run mode. No ad-
ditional electric power shall be required for devices such as forced draft fans.
E. A sequencing control system shall be provided to stage the boilers. The control shall include
automatic rotation of the lead boiler, an adjustable outdoor reset schedule, multiple setback
schedules, hydronic system interface, multiple setpoint control modes, BMS interface, alarm
status and history, SMS text messaging, and a digital display. The sequencing control system
shall stage each boiler on at low fire. After all boilers are running, the sequencing control
system will then modulate the boilers as a group. To ensure proper integration with the boiler
controls, the boiler manufacturer shall supply the sequencing control system.
A. The boiler shall have an integral gas train, factory assembled and installed. The main gas
train will include:
1. One manual shut-off valve at gas inlet.
2. Gas inlet trap.
3. Gas regulator rated for a maximum 14”wc supply pressure.
4. Two safety shut-off valves. One to be solenoid and one motorized valve.
5. Independent low and high gas pressure switches shall be supplied.
A. Boiler shall be supplied with a ASME Section IV approved, side outlet type safety valve.
The safety relief valve size shall be in accordance with ASME code requirements.
A. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Electrical devices and connections are specified in
Division 16 Sections.
B. Single-Point Field Power Connection: Factory-installed and -wired switches, motor controllers,
transformers, and other electrical devices necessary shall provide a single-point field power
connection to boiler.
2.8 VENTING
A. The boiler shall be CSA approved as a direct vent boiler. A conventional chimney or stack
shall not be required. Direct venting shall be accomplished with AL-29-4C stainless steel,
single (or double) wall. Vent piping shall be installed in accordance with applicable national
and local codes and per the boiler manufacturers’ recommendations.
B. The boiler shall have the outside combustion air intake supply ducted with PVC pipe. An air
intake muffler shall be provided by the boiler manufacturer and mounted within 10 feet of the
boiler intake connection.
C. An external muffler to be provided by the boiler manufacturer and mounted within 10 feet of
the boiler exhaust connection.
2.9 EMISSIONS
A. The boiler shall operate with CO emissions less than 100 PPM corrected to 3% O₂ and shall
with NOx emissions less than 50 PPM corrected to 3% O₂ over the entire turndown range.
A. Instructions for installation, operation and maintenance of the boiler shall be contained in a
manual provided with each boiler unit.
A. Burner and Hydrostatic Test. Factory adjust burner to eliminate excess oxygen, carbon dio-
xide, oxides of nitrogen emissions, and carbon monoxide in flue gas and to achieve combus-
tion efficiency; perform hydrostatic test.
B. Test and inspect factory-assembled boilers, before shipping. According to ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Before boiler installation, examine roughing-in for concrete equipment bases, anchor-bolt sizes
and locations, and piping and electrical connections to verify actual locations, sizes, and other
conditions affecting boiler performance, maintenance, and operations.
1. Final boiler locations indicated on Drawings are approximate. Determine exact locations
before roughing-in for piping and electrical connections.
B. Examine mechanical spaces for suitable conditions where boilers will be installed.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
A. Equipment and materials shall be installed in an approved manner and in accordance with the
boiler manufacturers’ installation requirements.
B. The installer shall construct a level continuous concrete pad (min. 3-1/2 inches high) for the
entire boiler system according to the boiler manufacturer's erecting instructions.
C. Assemble unit sections and parts shipped loose or unassembled for shipment purposes. Fol-
low manufacturer's installation recommendations and instructions, assemble and install boiler
trim.
D. Install electrical control items furnished by manufacturer per wiring diagram provided by
manufacturer. Install control wiring to field mounted electrical devices.
F. Provide air intake and exhaust piping, size and type as recommended by the manufacturer.
G. Provide boiler manufacturer recommended manifold pipe and fittings from each boiler to
nearest floor drain or as indicated.
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
C. Install piping from equipment drain connection to nearest floor drain. Piping shall be at least
full size of connection. Provide an isolation valve if required.
D. Connect piping to boilers, except safety relief valve connections, with flexible connectors of
materials suitable for service. Flexible connectors and their installation are specified in
Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods."
E. Connect gas piping to boiler gas-train inlet with union. Piping shall be at least full size of gas
train connection. Provide a reducer if required.
F. Connect hot-water piping to supply- and return-boiler tappings with shutoff valve and union or
flange at each connection.
H. Install piping from safety valves to drip-pan elbow and to nearest floor drain.
a. Check and adjust initial operating set points and high- and low-limit safety set
points of fuel supply, water level and water temperature.
b. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.
D. Arrange with National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors for inspection of boilers
and piping. Obtain certification for complete boiler units, delivered to Owner, and obtain receipt.
3.5 DEMONSTRATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
B. Related Sections:
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. COP: Coefficient of performance. The ratio of the rate of heat removal to the rate of energy
input using consistent units for any given set of rating conditions.
B. EER: Energy-efficiency ratio. The ratio of the cooling capacity given in terms of Btu/h to the
total power input given in terms of watts at any given set of rating conditions.
C. IPLV: Integrated part-load value. A single number part-load efficiency figure of merit
calculated per the method defined by ARI 550/590 and referenced to ARI standard rating
conditions.
D. kW/Ton: The ratio of total power input of the chiller in kilowatts to the net refrigerating
capacity in tons at any given set of rating conditions.
E. NPLV: Nonstandard part-load value. A single number part-load efficiency figure of merit
calculated per the method defined by ARI 550/590 and intended for operating conditions other
than the ARI standard rating conditions.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
B. LEED Submittal:
C. Shop Drawings: Complete set of manufacturer's prints of water chiller assemblies, control
panels, sections and elevations, and unit isolation. Include the following:
D. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown
and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:
1. Structural supports.
2. Piping roughing-in requirements.
3. Wiring roughing-in requirements, including spaces reserved for electrical equipment.
4. Access requirements, including working clearances for mechanical controls and electrical
equipment, and tube pull and service clearances.
H. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each water chiller to include in emergency, operation,
and maintenance manuals.
B. ARI Rating: Rate water chiller performance according to requirements in ARI 550/590, "Water
Chilling Packages Using the Vapor Compression Cycle."
E. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and stamp water chiller heat exchangers to comply with ASME
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
A. Ship water chillers from the factory fully charged with refrigerant and filled with oil.
B. Comply with the manufacturer’s instructions for rigging and handling equipment.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.
C. Coordinate sizes and locations of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations with
actual equipment provided.
A. The equipment manufacturer’s warranty shall be for a period of one year from date of
equipment start-up but not more than 18 months from shipment. The warranty shall cover
defective materials and workmanship within the above period, excluding refrigerant.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
1. Carrier.
2. Trane.
3. York.
2.2 UNIT DESCRIPTION
Provide and install as shown on the plans factory assembled, factory charged, and factory run
tested water-cooled scroll compressor packaged chillers in the quantity specified. Each chiller
shall consist of multiple hermetic scroll compressors, multi-circuit brazed plate or shell-and –tube
evaporator, shell-and-tube water-cooled condensers, control system and all components necessary
for controlled unit operation. Refrigerant shall be R-410A.
A. General: Provide a complete scroll packaged chiller as specified herein and as shown on
the drawings. The unit shall be in accordance with the standards referenced in section
1.02 and any local codes in effect.
B. Performance: Refer to the schedule of performance on the drawings. Performance shall
be in accordance with applicable ARI Standard.
C. Acoustics: Sound power levels (without sound insulation) for the unit shall not exceed
the following specified levels. The manufacturer shall provide the necessary sound treat-
ment to meet these levels if required. Sound data shall be provided with the quotation.
Test shall be in accordance with ARI Standard 575 octave band readings are flat dB.
Octave Band
B. Evaporator: On units 30 tons to 130 tons, the evaporator shall be direct expansion type
with stainless steel plates brazed together. It shall be insulated with 3/4 inch (19mm)
closed cell polyurethane insulation and have 653 psi (4500 kPa) water side working pres-
sure.
Units from 135 to 200 tons, the evaporator shall be shell-and-tube construction, insulated
with 3/4 inch (19mm) closed cell polyurethane insulation, and with 150 psi (1033kPa)
water-side working pressure.
C. Condenser: Horizontal shell and finned tube type with steel shell and integral finned
copper tubes rolled into steel tube sheets. The chiller shall be equipped with intermediate
tube supports. Construct condenser in accordance with the requirements of ASME Sec-
tion VIII Unfired Pressure Vessel Code and ANSI B9.1 Safety Code. It shall be designed
for 232 psi (1599 kPa) water side working pressure and 450 psig (3104 kPa) refrigerant
side pressure and be provided with ASME, ANSI B9.1 pressure relief valves.
D. Refrigerant Circuit: Each refrigerant circuit shall include a liquid line shutoff valve, rep-
laceable core or sealed filter-drier, sight glass with moisture indicator, liquid line solenoid
valve, thermal expansion valve, and insulated suction line.
E. Control Panel: The control panel shall contain a microprocessor controller providing op-
erating and equipment protection controls plus motor starting equipment, factory wired,
operationally tested, and ready for operation. Standard components shall include a control
transformer with primary and secondary fusing, microprocessor transformers with
integral fusing, compressor contactors, circuit breakers, single-point wiring arrangement
and switches for each circuit pumpdown and unit control power. The control panel shall
have a hinged tool-locked door.
The control system shall stage the compressors based on the leaving water temperature.
Equipment protection devices controlled by the microprocessor include motor protection,
high pressure, loss of refrigerant, loss of water flow, freeze protection, and low refrige-
rant pressure. Controls shall include auto/stop switch, chilled water setpoint adjustment,
anti-recycle timer, and digital display with water temperature and setpoint, operating
temperatures and pressures, and diagnostic messages. The following features and func-
tions shall be included:
1. The LCD-type display shall have a minimum of 20 characters with all messages
in plain English. Coded messages are not acceptable.
2. Critical parameters shall have their own section of control and shall be password
protected.
3. Resetting chilled water temperature by a remote 4-20mA DC signal.
4. A soft load function to prevent the system from operating at full load during the
chilled water pulldown period.
B. For water chillers located indoors, rate sound power level according to ARI 575 procedure.
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Before water chiller installation, examine roughing-in for equipment support, anchor-bolt sizes
and locations, piping, and electrical connections to verify actual locations, sizes, and other
conditions affecting water chiller performance, maintenance, and operations.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
A. Install water chillers on support structure indicated. Adjust and level chiller in alignment on
supports.
B. Equipment Mounting: Install water chiller on concrete bases using elastomeric mounts.
Comply with requirements for vibration isolation devices specified in Division 15 Section
"Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
1. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated,
install dowel rods on 18-inch (450-mm) centers around the full perimeter of concrete
base.
2. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete
base and anchor into structural concrete floor.
3. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams,
instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
4. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.
D. Charge water chiller with refrigerant if not factory charged and fill with oil if not factory
installed.
E. Install separate devices furnished by manufacturer and not factory installed. Provide all
appurtenances required to ensure a fully operations and functional chiller.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
C. Evaporator Fluid Connections: Connect to evaporator inlet with shutoff valve, strainer, flexible
connector, thermometer, and plugged tee with pressure gage. Connect to evaporator outlet with
shutoff valve, balancing valve, flexible connector, flow switch, thermometer, plugged tee with
pressure gage, flow meter, and drain connection with valve. Make connections to water chiller
with a union, flange, or mechanical coupling.
D. Condenser Fluid Connections: Connect to condenser inlet with shutoff valve, strainer, flexible
connector, thermometer, and plugged tee with pressure gage. Connect to condenser outlet with
shutoff valve, balancing valve, flexible connector, flow switch, thermometer, plugged tee with
pressure gage, and drain connection with valve. Make connections to water chiller with a
union, flange, or mechanical coupling.
E. Refrigerant Pressure Relief Valve Connections: For water chillers installed indoors, extend
vent piping to the outside without valves or restrictions. Comply with ASHRAE 15.
F. Connect each drain connection with a union and drain pipe and extend pipe, full size of
connection, to floor drain. Provide a shutoff valve at each connection if required.
G. Provide bypass piping, two-way valve, and controller to maintain minimum flow through
evaporator.
C. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions and
perform the following:
1. Verify that refrigerant charge is sufficient and water chiller has been leak tested.
2. Verify that pumps are installed and functional.
3. Verify that thermometers and gages are installed.
4. Operate water chiller for run-in period.
5. Check bearing lubrication and oil levels.
6. Verify that refrigerant pressure relief device for chillers installed indoors is vented
outside.
7. Verify proper motor rotation.
8. Verify static deflection of vibration isolators, including deflection during water chiller
startup and shutdown.
9. Verify and record performance of chilled- and condenser-water flow and low-temperature
interlocks.
10. Verify and record performance of water chiller protection devices.
11. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
3.5 DEMONSTRATION
COOLING TOWERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Delegated Design: Design cooling tower support structure and seismic restraints and wind
restraints, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer,
using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.
B. Structural Performance: Cooling tower support structure shall withstand the effects of gravity
loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated
according to SEI/ASCE 7.
1. Live Loads: 5330 lbs..
2. Deflection Limits: Design system to withstand design loads without deflections greater
than the following:
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, pressure drop, fan
performance data, rating curves with selected points indicated, furnished specialties, and
accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: Complete set of manufacturer's prints of cooling tower assemblies, control
panels, sections and elevations, and unit isolation. Include the following:
C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For cooling tower support structure indicated to comply with
performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the
qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
1. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and
attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include adjustable motor bases,
rails, and frames for equipment mounting.
2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and for
designing vibration isolation bases.
D. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown
and coordinated with each other, using input from Installers of the items involved:
1. Structural supports.
2. Piping roughing-in requirements.
3. Wiring roughing-in requirements, including spaces reserved for electrical equipment.
4. Access requirements, including working clearances for mechanical controls and electrical
equipment, and tube pull and service clearances.
G. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each cooling tower to include in emergency, operation,
and maintenance manuals.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
D. CTI Certification: Cooling tower thermal performance according to CTI STD 201,
"Certification Standard for Commercial Water-Cooling Towers Thermal Performance."
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.
C. Coordinate sizes and locations of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations with
actual equipment provided.
1.8 WARRANTY
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
B. Cooling tower designed to resist wind load of 30 lbf/sq. ft. (1.44 kPa).
1. Casing and Frame Material: Galvanized steel, ASTM A 653/A 653M, G235 (Z700)
coating.
D. Collection Basin:
G. Pressurized Water Distribution Piping: Main header and lateral branch piping designed for
even distribution over heat-exchanger coil or fill throughout the flow range without the need for
balancing valves and for connecting individual, removable, nonclogging spray nozzles.
1. Materials: Inert PVC, with maximum flame-spread index of 5 according to ASTM E 84.
2. Minimum Thickness: 20 mils (0.5 mm), before forming.
3. Fabrication: Fill-type sheets, fabricated, formed, and bonded together after forming into
removable assemblies that are factory installed by manufacturer.
4. Fill Material Operating Temperature: Suitable for entering-water temperatures up
through 120 deg F (49 deg C).
I. Drift Eliminator:
1. Number of Fans: Each cooling tower cell shall have a single fan or multiple fans
connected to a common shaft.
2. Fan Wheel and Housing Materials: Galvanized steel.
3. Fan Shaft: Steel, coated to resist corrosion.
4. Protective Enclosure: Removable, galvanized-steel, wire-mesh screens complying with
OSHA regulations.
5. Fan Shaft Bearings: Self-aligning, grease-lubricated ball or roller bearings with
moisture-proof seals and premium, moisture-resistant grease suitable for temperatures
between minus 20 and plus 300 deg F (minus 29 and plus 149 deg C). Bearings designed
for an L-10 life of 75,000 hours.
6. Bearings Grease Fittings: Extended lubrication lines to an easily accessible location.
K. Fan Motor:
1. General Requirements for Fan Motors: Comply with NEMA designation and
temperature-rating requirements specified in Division 15 Section "Common Motor
Requirements for HVAC Equipment" and not indicated below.
2. Motor Enclosure: Totally enclosed air over (TEAO) with epoxy or polyurethane finish.
3. Energy Efficiency: Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.
4. Service Factor: 1.15.
5. Insulation: Class F.
6. Variable-Speed Motors: Inverter-duty rated per NEMA MG-1, Section IV, "Performance
Standard Applying to All Machines," Part 31, "Definite-Purpose, Inverter-Fed, Polyphase
Motors."
7. Severe-duty rating with the following features:
N. Control Package: Factory installed and wired, and functionally tested at factory before
shipment.
a. Branch power circuit to each motor and electric basin heater and to controls with a
disconnect switch or circuit breaker.
b. NEMA-rated motor controller, hand-off-auto switch, and overcurrent protection
for each motor. Provide variable frequency controller with manual bypass and line
reactors for variable-speed motor indicated.
10. Factory-installed wiring outside of enclosures shall be in metal raceway, except make
connections to each motor and electric basin heater with liquidtight conduit.
11. Visual indication of status and alarm for each motor.
12. Audible alarm and silence switch.
13. Cooling tower shall have hardware to enable BMS to remotely monitor and display the
following:
1. Doors: Large enough for personnel to access cooling tower internal components from
both cooling tower end walls. Doors shall be operable from both sides of the door.
2. External Ladders with Safety Cages: Aluminum, galvanized- or stainless-steel, fixed
ladders with ladder extensions to access external platforms and top of cooling tower from
adjacent grade without the need for portable ladders. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.27.
3. External Platforms with Handrails: Aluminum, FRP, or galvanized-steel bar grating at
cooling tower access doors when cooling towers are elevated and not accessible from
grade.
4. Handrail: Aluminum, galvanized steel, or stainless steel complete with kneerail and
toeboard, around top of cooling tower. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.23.
P. Characteristics:
2. Sound Data:
A. Furnish and install a non-chemical Condenser Water Treatment System on the re-
circulating water system of each cooling tower. System shall be capable of han-
dling a maximum flow of 210 gallons per minute recirculating water. System
shall be Pulse~Pure ® by EVAPCO or approved equal. System shall have a 12
month money back guarantee if the system fails perform as outlined below.
B. The Non-Chemical Water Treatment System shall have the ability to maintain the
following re-circulated water parameters:
1. Conductivity range of 300 to 5,000 µS/cm.
2. pH range of 6.5 to 9.0.
3. Local environmental regulations may dictate the highest pH permitted for blowdown.
The conductivity setting can be adjusted up or down to change the pH by the balanc-
ing of fresh make-up water.
4. Total bacteria count (TBC) of less than 10,000 CFU’s/ml.
E. The Non-Chemical Water Treatment System provides physical water treatment by:
1. Changing surface scale formation to bulk solution powder formation.
2. Keeping the system free from mineral scale on all heat transfer surfaces (including fill,
coils, air inlet louvers, pipes, heat exchangers, valves and other components in the sys-
tem).
Passivation
The non-chemical water treatment system should initially be operated under blowdown settings or
protocol specified by the non-chemical water treatment system supplier. New galvanized steel cool-
ing towers must be passivated to prevent white rust formation. This conditioning is done by operat-
ing the tower for a period of 6 weeks with a pH between 6.5 and 8.0. After this conditioning period,
the tower may operate at normal pH levels. Controlling this pH may require a higher blowdown rate
for this 6 week period or in some cases additions of a pH reducing agent..
The performance of the system will be monitored every month for the first twelve months of opera-
tion by the non-chemical water treatment system representative.
Each site visits from the non-chemical water treatment system representative shall include the follow-
ing:
An analysis of the following water chemistry parameters will be performed within 30 days of installa-
tion and every 30-45 days for first year of operation at no charge to the customer:
1. pH
2. Conductivity
3. Chloride
4. Alkalinity
5. Hardness
6. Heterotrophic Plate Count
Note: These parameters will be evaluated at a local commercial laboratory or using field-tests kits.
Copy of reports shall be submitted to owner’s representative and the cooling tower manufacturer with
7 days of testing.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Before cooling tower installation, examine roughing-in for tower support, anchor-bolt sizes and
locations, piping, and electrical connections to verify actual locations, sizes, and other
conditions affecting tower performance, maintenance, and operation.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B. Equipment Mounting: Install cooling tower using restrained spring isolator rail designed to
distribute tower weight on structural steel beam posted off of building structural design.
Comply with requirements for vibration isolation devices specified in Division 15 Section
"Vibration Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
C. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
C. Install flexible pipe connectors for all pipe connections to cooling towers mounted on vibration
isolators.
D. Provide drain piping with valve at cooling tower drain connections and at low points in piping.
E. Connect cooling tower overflows and drains, and piping drains to sanitary sewage system.
G. Supply and Return Piping: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 15 Section
"Hydronic Piping." Connect to entering cooling tower connections with shutoff valve, balancing
valve, thermometer, plugged tee with pressure gage, and drain connection with valve. Connect
to leaving cooling tower connection with shutoff valve. Make connections to cooling tower
with a union, flange, or mechanical coupling.
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
D. Cooling towers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
D. Start cooling tower and associated water pumps. Follow manufacturer's written starting
procedures.
E. Prepare a written startup report that records the results of tests and inspections.
3.6 ADJUSTING
AIR-HANDLING UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1.3 SUBMITTALS
B. LEED Submittal:
1. Product Data for Prerequisite EQ 1: Documentation indicating that units comply with
ASHRAE 62.1-2004, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment."
C. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following
items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items
involved:
F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air-handling units to include in emergency, operation,
and maintenance manuals.
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 90A for design, fabrication, and installation of air-
handling units and components.
C. ARI Certification: Air-handling units and their components shall be factory tested according to
ARI 430, "Central-Station Air-Handling Units," and shall be listed and labeled by ARI.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.
B. Coordinate sizes and locations of structural-steel support members, if any, with actual
equipment provided.
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.2.1 AHU-1
B. Performance: Conform to ARI 410 and 430 Standards. See schedules on prints.
C. Acoustics: Sound power levels (dB) for the unit shall not exceed the specified levels shown
on the unit schedule. The manufacturer shall provide the necessary sound treatment to meet
these levels if required.
A. Fabricate unit with heavy gauge channel posts and panels secured with mechanical fasteners.
All panels, access doors, and ship sections shall be sealed with permanently applied bulb-type
gasket. Shipped loose gasketing is not allowed.
B. Panels and access doors shall be constructed as a 2-inch nominal thick; thermal broke double
wall assembly, injected with foam insulation with an R-value of not less than R-13.
3. The floor plate shall be constructed as specified for the inner liner.
C. Panel deflection shall not exceed L/240 ratio at 125% of design static pressure, maximum 5
inches of positive or 6 inches of negative static pressure. Deflection shall be measured at the
panel midpoint.
D. The casing leakage rate shall not exceed .5 cfm per square foot of cabinet area at 5 inches of
positive static pressure or 6 inches of negative static pressure (.0025 m3/s per square meter of
cabinet area at 1.24 kPa static pressure).
E. Module to module field assembly shall be accomplished with an overlapping, full perimeter
internal splice joint that is sealed with bulb type gasketing on both mating modules to minim-
ize on-site labor and meet indoor air quality standards.
A. Acceptable fan assembly shall be a double width, double inlet, class II, belt-
drive type housed airfoil fan dynamically balanced as an assembly, as shown in schedule.
Maximum fan RPM shall be below first critical fan speed. Fan assemblies shall be dynamically
balanced by the manufacturer on all three planes and at all bearing supports. Copper lubrication
lines shall be provided and extend from the bearings and attached with grease fittings to the
fan base assembly near access door. If not supplied at the factory, contractor shall mount cop-
per lube lines in the field. Fan and motor shall be mounted internally on a steel base. Factory
mount motor on slide base that can be slid out the side of unit if removal is required. Provide
access to motor, drive, and bearings through hinged access door.
B. Fan and motor assembly shall be mounted on 2" deflection spring vibration type isolators in-
side cabinetry.
A. Bearings: Basic load rating computed in accordance with AFBMA - ANSI Standards. The
bearings shall be designed for service with an L-50 life of 200,000 hours and shall be a heavy du-
ty pillow block, self-aligning, grease- lubricated ball or spherical roller bearing type.
B. Shafts shall be solid, hot rolled steel, ground and polished, keyed to shaft, and
protectively coated with lubricating oil. Hollow shafts are not acceptable.
C. V-Belt drives shall be cast iron or steel sheaves, dynamically balanced, bored to fit shafts and
keyed. Fixed sheaves, matched belts, and drive rated based on motor horsepower. Minimum
of 2 belts shall be provided on all fans with 10 HP motors and above. Standard drive service
factor minimum shall be 1.1 S.F. for 1/4 HP – 7.5 HP, 1.3 S.F. for 10 HP and larger, calcu-
lated based on fan brake horsepower.
2.2.5 ELECTRICAL
A. Fan motors shall be manufacturer provided and installed, Open Drip Proof, high efficiency
(meets EPAct requirements), 1750 RPM, single speed, 200V / 60HZ / 3P. Complete electric-
al characteristics for each fan motor shall be as shown in schedule.
B. Wiring Termination: Provide terminal lugs to match branch circuit conductor quantities, siz-
es, and materials indicated. Enclosed terminal lugs in terminal box sized to NFPA 70.
C. Manufacturer shall provide ASHRAE 90.1 Energy Efficiency equation details for individual
equipment to assist Building Engineer for calculating system compliance.
E. All electrical connection components shall be field provided and mounted as shown on
project schedule.
A. Certification: Acceptable water cooling, water heating, steam, and refrigerant coils shall be
certified in accordance with ARI Standard 410 and bear the ARI label. Coils exceeding the
scope of the manufacturer’s certification and/or the range of ARI’s standard rating conditions
will be considered provided the manufacturer is a current member of the ARI Forced Circula-
tion Air-Cooling and Air-Heating Coils certification programs and that the coils have been
rated in accordance with ARI Standard 410. Manufacturer must be ISO 9002 certified.
B. Water cooling coil shall be provided. Provide access to coil(s) for service and cleaning. En-
close coil headers and return bends fully within unit casing. Unit shall be provided with coil
connections that extend a minimum of 5” beyond unit casing for ease of installation. Drain
and vent connections shall be provided exterior to unit casing. Coil connections must be fac-
tory sealed with grommets on interior and exterior panel liners to minimize air leakage and
condensation inside panel assembly. If not factory packaged, Contractor must supply all coil
connection grommets and sleeves. Coils shall be removable through side and/or top panels of
unit without the need to remove and disassemble the entire section from the unit.
1. Headers shall consist of seamless copper tubing to assure compatibility with primary sur-
face. Headers to have intruded tube holes to provide maximum brazing surface for tube
to header joint, strength, and inherent flexibility. Header diameter should vary with fluid
flow requirements.
2. Fins shall have a minimum thickness of 0.0075 inch aluminum plate construction. Fins
shall have full drawn collars to provide a continuous surface cover over the entire tube
for maximum heat transfer. Tubes shall be mechanically expanded into the fins to pro-
vide a continuous primary to secondary compression bond over the entire finned length
for maximum heat transfer rates. Bare copper tubes shall not be visible between fins.
3. Coil tubes shall be 5/8 inch OD seamless copper, 0.020 inch nominal tube wall thickness,
expanded into fins, brazed at joints. Soldered U-bends shall be provided to minimize the
effects of erosion and premature failure having a minimum tube wall thickness of .025
inches.
4. Coil connections shall be carbon steel, NPT threaded connection. Connection size to be
determined by manufacturer based upon the most efficient coil circuiting. Vent and drain
fittings shall be furnished on the connections, exterior to the air handler. Vent connec-
tions provided at the highest point to assure proper venting. Drain connections shall be
provided at the lowest point to insure complete drainage and prevent freeze-up.
1. Headers shall consist of seamless copper tubing to assure compatibility with primary sur-
face. Headers to have intruded tube holes to provide maximum brazing surface for tube
to header joint, strength, and inherent flexibility. Header diameter should vary with fluid
flow requirements.
2. Fins shall have a minimum thickness of 0.0075 inch aluminum plate construction. Fins
shall have full drawn collars to provide a continuous surface cover over the entire tube
for maximum heat transfer. Tubes shall be mechanically expanded into the fins to pro-
vide a continuous primary to secondary compression bond over the entire finned length
for maximum heat transfer rates. Bare copper tubes shall not be visible between fins.
3. Coil tubes shall be 5/8 inch OD seamless copper, 0.020 inch nominal tube wall thickness,
expanded into fins, brazed at joints. Soldered U-bends shall be provided to minimize the
effects of erosion and premature failure having a minimum tube wall thickness of .025
inches.
4. Coil connections shall be carbon steel, threaded connection. Connection size to be de-
termined by manufacturer based upon the most efficient coil circuiting. Vent and drain
fittings shall be furnished on the connections, exterior to the air handler. Vent connec-
tions provided at the highest point to assure proper venting. Drain connections shall be
provided at the lowest point to insure complete drainage and prevent freeze-up.
5. Coil shall be furnished as an uncased galvanized steel track to allow for thermal move-
ment and slide into a pitched track for fluid drainage.
2.2.7 FILTERS
A. Furnish combination filter section with 2-inch flat pre-filter and 12-inch Varicel SH car-
tridge 85% efficient (MERV 14) final filter. Provide side loading and removal of filters.
A. Mixing box section shall be provided with end outside air opening and top return air
opening with or without parallel low leak airfoil damper blades. Dampers shall be hol-
low core galvanized steel airfoil blades, fully gasketed and have continuous vinyl seals
between damper blades in a galvanized steel frame. Dampers shall have stainless steel
jamb seals along end of dampers. Connecting linkage and ABS plastic end caps shall be
2.3.1 AHU-2
A. The air handler shall be furnished as a vertical draw-through cooling coil and heating coil
type.
A. Air handler casing shall be constructed with a corrosion resistant aluminum frame with 1”
thick, double wall panels. Extruded aluminum frame and polymeric corner pieces are re-
quired for casing protection and rigidity. Unit panels shall consist of injected polyurethane
foam insulation sandwiched between galvanized steel exterior and interior sheets. Formed
“thermal break” panels shall have a plastic molded edge to eliminate inner and outer panels
from contacting each other.
1. Panels shall be fastened to frame with perimeter screws with a neoprene gasket in-
between the panel and the frame to minimize air leakage and prevent thermal bridging
from unit interior to unit exterior. Removable panels for blower and filter sections shall
be furnished on both sides to allow full access to unit interior. Blower and filter access
panels shall include a pocket handle to assist in panel removal.
A. The supply fan shall be a DWDI forward-curved type. Fan assemblies including fan, motor
and sheaves shall be dynamically balanced by the manufacturer on all three planes at all bear-
ing supports. Manufacturer must ensure maximum fan RPM is below the first critical speed.
B. Fan and motor assembly shall be mounted on vibration type isolators inside cabinetry.
C. Units shall be certified in accordance with the central station air handling units certification
program that is based on ARI Standard 430.
A. Basic load rating computed in accordance with AFBMA - ANSI Standards, L-50 life at
200,000 hours heavy duty pillow block type, self-aligning, grease-lubricated ball bearings.
B. Shafts shall be solid, hot rolled steel, ground and polished, keyed to shaft, and protectively
coated with lubricating oil. Hollow shafts are not acceptable.
C. V-Belt drives shall be cast iron or steel sheaves, dynamically balanced, bored to fit shafts and
keyed. Variable and adjustable pitch sheaves selected so required RPM is obtained with
sheaves set at mid-position and rated based on motor horsepower. Contractor to furnish fixed
sheaves at final RPM as determined by balancing contractor.
2.3.5 ELECTRICAL
A. Access to coils for service and cleaning shall be provided. Coil headers and return bends
shall be fully encased within unit casing. Coil connections shall be factory sealed with
grommets on interior and exterior and gasket sleeve between outer wall and inner liner where
each pipe extends through the unit casing to minimize air and condensate leakage.
B. Cooling Coils.
2. Water coil fins shall have full drawn collars to provide a continuous surface cover over
the entire tube for maximum heat transfer. Seamless copper tubes shall be mechanically
expanded into the fins to provide a continuous primary-to-secondary compression bond
over the entire finned length for maximum heat transfer rates. Bare copper tubes shall
not be visible between fins.
3. Water coils shall be provided with headers of seamless copper tubing with intruded tube
holes to permit expansion and contraction without creating undue stress or strain. Coil
connections shall be copper sweat connections with connection size to be determined by
manufacturer based upon the most efficient coil circuiting. Vent and drain connections
shall be furnished on the coil connection, external to the cabinet. Vent connections pro-
vided at the highest point to assure proper venting. Drain connections shall be provided at
the lowest point.
4. Drainpan shall be constructed from stainless steel, pitched and sloped in direction of air-
flow to drain connection to allow for condensate drainage. Drainpan shall be positioned
above 1” thick insulated double wall panel. Condensate drain connections shall be pro-
vided on both sides of drain pan.
C. Heating Coil.
2. Hot water coil fins shall have full drawn collars to provide a continuous surface cover
over the entire tube for maximum heat transfer. Seamless copper tubes shall be mechani-
cally expanded into the fins to provide a continuous primary-to-secondary compression
bond over the entire finned length for maximum heat transfer rates. Bare copper tubes
shall not be visible between fins.
3. Water coils shall be provided with headers of seamless copper tubing with intruded tube
holes to permit expansion and contraction without creating undue stress or strain. Coil
connections shall be copper sweat connections with connection size to be determined by
A. Filter section shall be a 4-inch deep flat type furnished with MERV 14 deep pleated type fil-
ter.
A. The following manufacturers are approved for use. No substitutions will be permitted.
2. Haakon
3. Temtrol
4. Engineered Air
A. The air handler shall be furnished as an outdoor horizontal draw through cooling coil and
heating coil type.
B. Performance: Conform to ARI 410 and 430 Standards. See schedules on prints.
C. Acoustics: Sound power levels (dB) for the unit shall not exceed the specified levels shown
on the unit schedule. The manufacturer shall provide the necessary sound treatment to meet
these levels if required.
A. Fabricate unit with heavy gauge channel posts and panels secured with mechanical fasteners.
All panels, access doors, and ship sections shall be sealed with permanently applied bulb-type
gasket. Shipped loose gasketing is not allowed.
B. Panels and access doors shall be constructed as a 2-inch nominal thick; thermal broke double
wall assembly, injected with foam insulation with an R-value of not less than R-13.
3. The floor plate shall be constructed as specified for the inner liner.
C. Panel deflection shall not exceed L/240 ratio at 125% of design static pressure, maximum 5
inches of positive or 6 inches of negative static pressure. Deflection shall be measured at the
panel midpoint.
D. The casing leakage rate shall not exceed .5 cfm per square foot of cabinet area at 5 inches of
positive static pressure or 6 inches of negative static pressure (.0025 m3/s per square meter of
cabinet area at 1.24 kPa static pressure).
E. Module to module field assembly shall be accomplished with an overlapping, full perimeter
internal splice joint that is sealed with bulb type gasketing on both mating modules to minim-
ize on-site labor and meet indoor air quality standards.
F. Access doors shall be flush mounted to cabinetry, with minimum of two six inch long stain-
less steel piano-type hinges, latch and full size handle assembly. Access doors shall swing
outward for unit sections under negative pressure. Access doors on positive pressure sections,
shall have a secondary latch to relieve pressure and prevent injury upon access.
G. Provide cross broke roofcap system to divert water from the top surface of the air handler.
The rain shed roofcap shall have 2”standing seams covered with splice cap channels to seal
top seam. Splice cap shall break down over sides of standing seam to protect the ends of the
seam.
1. Cooling coil piping vestibule 24” deep shall be factory installed of standard cabinet con-
struction on the coil connection side of the unit. Roofcap over vestibule shall be a conti-
nuous single piece covering both the coil section and the vestibule. Roofcap seams be-
tween coil section and vestibule are not allowed.
2. Heating coil piping vestibule 24” deep shall be factory installed of standard cabinet con-
struction on the coil connection side of the unit. Roofcap over vestibule shall be a conti-
nuous single piece covering both the coil section and the vestibule. Roofcap seams be-
tween coil section and vestibule are not allowed.
H. The unit shall have a 6-inch curb ready base for structural rigidity and condensate trapping.
The curb-ready base shall be designed with sloped drip pans located under all unit sections
except duct openings and shall be supported by frame member.
I. Provide roof curb, designed to allow for proper structural support and condensate trapping.
A. Acceptable fan assembly shall be a double width, double inlet, class II, belt-drive type housed
forward curved fan dynamically balanced as an assembly, as shown in schedule. Maximum
fan RPM shall be below first critical fan speed. Fan assemblies shall be dynamically ba-
lanced by the manufacturer on all three planes and at all bearing supports. Copper lubrication
lines shall be provided and extend from the bearings and attached with grease fittings to the
B. Fan and motor assembly shall be mounted on 2" deflection spring vibration type isolators in-
side cabinetry.
A. Bearings: Basic load rating computed in accordance with AFBMA - ANSI Standards. The
bearings shall be designed for service with an L-50 life of 200,000 hours and shall be a heavy
duty pillow block, self-aligning, grease-lubricated ball or spherical roller bearing type.
B. Shafts shall be solid, hot rolled steel, ground and polished, keyed to shaft, and protectively
coated with lubricating oil. Hollow shafts are not acceptable.
C. V-Belt drives shall be cast iron or steel sheaves, dynamically balanced, bored to fit shafts and
keyed. Fixed sheaves, matched belts, and drive rated based on motor horsepower. Minimum
of 2 belts shall be provided on all fans with 10 HP motors and above. Standard drive service
factor minimum shall be 1.1 S.F. for 1/4 HP – 7.5 HP, 1.3 S.F. for 10 HP and larger, calcu-
lated based on fan brake horsepower.
2.4.6 ELECTRICAL
A. Fan motors shall be manufacturer provided and installed, Open Drip Proof, high efficiency
(meets EPAct requirements), 1750 RPM, single speed, 460V / 60HZ / 3P. Complete electric-
al characteristics for each fan motor shall be as shown in schedule.
B. Wiring Termination: Provide terminal lugs to match branch circuit conductor quantities, siz-
es, and materials indicated. Enclosed terminal lugs in terminal box sized to NFPA 70.
C. Manufacturer shall provide ASHRAE 90.1 Energy Efficiency equation details for individual
equipment to assist Building Engineer for calculating system compliance.
D. Installing contractor shall provide GFI receptacle within 25 feet of unit to satisfy National
Electrical Code requirements.
E. All electrical connection components shall be field provided and mounted as shown on
project schedule.
A. Certification: Acceptable water cooling, water heating, steam, and refrigerant coils shall be
certified in accordance with ARI Standard 410 and bear the ARI label. Coils exceeding the
scope of the manufacturer’s certification and/or the range of ARI’s standard rating conditions
will be considered provided the manufacturer is a current member of the ARI Forced Circula-
tion Air-Cooling and Air-Heating Coils certification programs and that the coils have been
rated in accordance with ARI Standard 410. Manufacturer must be ISO 9002 certified.
C. Headers shall consist of seamless copper tubing to assure compatibility with primary surface.
Headers to have intruded tube holes to provide maximum brazing surface for tube to header
joint, strength, and inherent flexibility. Header diameter should vary with fluid flow re-
quirements.
D. Fins shall have a minimum thickness of 0.0075 inch aluminum plate construction. Fins shall
have full drawn collars to provide a continuous surface cover over the entire tube for maxi-
mum heat transfer. Tubes shall be mechanically expanded into the fins to provide a conti-
nuous primary to secondary compression bond over the entire finned length for maximum
heat transfer rates. Bare copper tubes shall not be visible between fins.
E. Coil tubes shall be 5/8 inch OD seamless copper, 0.020 inch nominal tube wall thickness, ex-
panded into fins, brazed at joints. Soldered U-bends shall be provided to minimize the effects
of erosion and premature failure having a minimum tube wall thickness of .025 inches.
F. Coil connections shall be carbon steel, NPT threaded connection. Connection size to be de-
termined by manufacturer based upon the most efficient coil circuiting. Vent and drain fit-
tings shall be furnished on the connections, exterior to the air handler. Vent connections pro-
vided at the highest point to assure proper venting. Drain connections shall be provided at the
lowest point to insure complete drainage and prevent freeze-up.
G. Water heating coil shall be provided. Provide access to coil(s) for service and cleaning. En-
close coil headers and return bends fully within unit casing. Unit shall be provided with coil
connections that extend a minimum of 5” beyond unit casing for ease of installation. Drain
and vent connections shall be provided exterior to unit casing. Coil connections must be fac-
tory sealed with grommets on interior and exterior panel liners to minimize air leakage and
condensation inside panel assembly. If not factory packaged, Contractor must supply all coil
connection grommets and sleeves. Coils shall be removable through side and/or top panels of
unit without the need to remove and disassemble the entire section from the unit.
1. Headers shall consist of seamless copper tubing to assure compatibility with primary sur-
face. Headers to have intruded tube holes to provide maximum brazing surface for tube
to header joint, strength, and inherent flexibility. Header diameter should vary with fluid
flow requirements.
2. Fins shall have a minimum thickness of 0.0075 inch aluminum plate construction. Fins
shall have full drawn collars to provide a continuous surface cover over the entire tube
for maximum heat transfer. Tubes shall be mechanically expanded into the fins to pro-
3. Coil tubes shall be 5/8 inch OD seamless copper, 0.020 inch nominal tube wall thickness,
expanded into fins, brazed at joints. Soldered U-bends shall be provided to minimize the
effects of erosion and premature failure having a minimum tube wall thickness of .025
inches.
4. Coil connections shall be carbon steel, threaded connection. Connection size to be de-
termined by manufacturer based upon the most efficient coil circuiting. Vent and drain
fittings shall be furnished on the connections, exterior to the air handler. Vent connec-
tions provided at the highest point to assure proper venting. Drain connections shall be
provided at the lowest point to insure complete drainage and prevent freeze-up.
5. Coil shall be furnished as an uncased galvanized steel track to allow for thermal move-
ment and slide into a pitched track for fluid drainage.
2.4.8 FILTERS
A. Furnish combination filter section with 2-inch flat pre-filter and 12-inch Varicel SH cartridge
85% efficient (MERV 14) final filter. Provide side loading and removal of filters.
A. Mixing box section shall be provided with end outside air opening and bottom return air
opening with or without parallel low leak airfoil damper blades. Dampers shall be hollow
core galvanized steel airfoil blades, fully gasketed and have continuous vinyl seals between
damper blades in a galvanized steel frame. Dampers shall have stainless steel jamb seals
along end of dampers. Connecting linkage and ABS plastic end caps shall be provided when
return and outside air dampers are each sized for full airflow. Return and outside air dampers
of different sizes must be driven separately. Damper Leakage: Leakage rate shall be less than
two tenths of one percent leakage at 2 inches static pressure differential. Leakage rate tested
in accordance with AMCA Standard 500.
A. Fan Sound-Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating Fan
Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." Test fans according to AMCA 300, "Reverberant
Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." Fans shall bear AMCA-certified sound ratings seal.
B. Fan Performance Rating: Factory test fan performance for airflow, pressure, power, air density,
rotation speed, and efficiency. Rate performance according to AMCA 210, "Laboratory
Methods of Testing Fans for Aerodynamic Performance Rating."
B. Water Coils: Factory tested to 300 psig (2070 kPa) according to ARI 410 and ASHRAE 33.
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Examine casing insulation materials and filter media before air-handling unit installation.
Reject insulation materials and filter media that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.
C. Examine roughing-in for hydronic and condensate drainage piping systems and electrical
services to verify actual locations of connections before installation.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Equipment Mounting: Install air-handling units on concrete bases [using elastomeric pads]
[using elastomeric mounts] [using restrained spring isolators] [without vibration isolation
devices] <Insert device>. Secure units to anchor bolts installed in concrete bases. Comply
with requirements for concrete bases specified in Division 3 Section "[Cast-in-Place Concrete]
[Cast-in-Place Concrete (Limited Applications)]." Comply with requirements for vibration
isolation devices specified in Division 15 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC
Piping and Equipment."
1. Minimum Deflection: [1/2 inch (13 mm)] [1 inch (25 mm)] [2 inches (50 mm)] [3
inches (75 mm)] <Insert dimension>.
2. Install [galvanized] [stainless]-steel plate to equally distribute weight over elastomeric
pad.
3. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated,
install dowel rods on 18-inch (450-mm) centers around the full perimeter of concrete
base.
4. Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete base and anchor into
structural concrete floor.
5. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams,
instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
6. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.
B. Arrange installation of units to provide access space around air-handling units for service and
maintenance.
C. Do not operate fan system until filters (temporary or permanent) are in place. Replace
temporary filters used during construction and testing, with new, clean filters.
D. Install filter-gage, static-pressure taps upstream and downstream of filters. Mount filter gages
on outside of filter housing or filter plenum in accessible position. Provide filter gages on filter
banks, installed with separate static-pressure taps upstream and downstream of filters.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings
indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
C. Connect piping to air-handling units mounted on vibration isolators with flexible connectors.
D. Connect condensate drain pans using [NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32)] <Insert pipe size>, ASTM B 88,
Type M (ASTM B 88M, Type C) copper tubing. Extend to nearest equipment or floor drain.
Construct deep trap at connection to drain pan and install cleanouts at changes in direction.
E. Hot- and Chilled-Water Piping: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 15 Section
"Hydronic Piping." Install shutoff valve and union or flange at each coil supply connection.
Install balancing valve and union or flange at each coil return connection.
F. Connect duct to air-handling units with flexible connections. Comply with requirements in
Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories."
1. Leak Test: After installation, fill water and test coils and connections for leaks.
2. Fan Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm
proper motor rotation and unit operation.
3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
C. Air-handling unit or components will be considered defective if unit or components do not pass
tests and inspections.
1. Energize motor; verify proper operation of motor, drive system, and fan wheel. Adjust
fan to indicated rpm.[$ds~Replace fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve
design conditions.]
2. Measure and record motor electrical values for voltage and amperage.
3. Manually operate dampers from fully closed to fully open position and record fan
performance.
3.6 ADJUSTING
B. Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for air-
handling system testing, adjusting, and balancing.
3.7 CLEANING
A. After completing system installation and testing, adjusting, and balancing air-handling unit and
air-distribution systems and after completing startup service, clean air-handling units internally
to remove foreign material and construction dirt and dust. Clean fan wheels, cabinets, dampers,
coils, and filter housings, and install new, clean filters.
3.8 DEMONSTRATION
FAN-COIL UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1.3 DEFINITIONS
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and
accessories.
B. LEED Submittals:
C. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required
clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field
connection.
D. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following
items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items
involved:
a. Lighting fixtures.
b. Air outlets and inlets.
c. Speakers.
d. Sprinklers.
F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fan-coil units to include in emergency, operation, and
maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 1 Section "Operation and
Maintenance Data," include the following:
1. Maintenance schedules and repair part lists for motors, coils, integral controls, and filters.
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of fan-coil units with existing millwork and benches,
furniture and partition assemblies.
1.7 WARRANTY
a. Fan failure.
b. Coil leak.
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Fan-Coil-Unit Filters: Furnish one spare filter for each filter installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
B. Description: Factory-packaged and -tested units rated according to ARI 440, ASHRAE 33, and
UL 1995.
C. Coil Section Insulation: 1/2-inch (13-mm) thick, coated glass fiber complying with
ASTM C 1071 and attached with adhesive complying with ASTM C 916.
D. Main and Auxiliary Drain Pans: Insulated galvanized steel with plastic liner. Fabricate pans
and drain connections to comply with ASHRAE 62.1-2004. Drain pans shall be removable.
E. Chassis: Galvanized steel where exposed to moisture. Floor-mounting units shall have leveling
screws.
1. Vertical Unit Front Panels: Removable, steel, with integral stamped steel discharge grille
and channel-formed edges, cam fasteners, and insulation on back of panel.
2. Steel recessing flanges for recessing fan-coil units into ceiling or wall.
H. Hydronic Coils: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins spaced no closer than
0.1 inch (2.5 mm), rated for a minimum working pressure of 200 psig (1378 kPa) and a
maximum entering-water temperature of 220 deg F (104 deg C). Include manual air vent and
drain valve.
J. Factory, Hydronic Piping Package: ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B) copper tube
with wrought-copper fittings and brazed joints. Label piping to indicate service, inlet, and
outlet.
1. Two-way, two-position control valve for chilled-water coil.
2. Two-way, two-position control valve for heating coil.
3. Hose Kits: Minimum 400-psig (2758-kPa) working pressure, and operating temperatures
from 33 to 211 deg F (0.5 to 99 deg C). Tag hose kits to equipment designations.
a. Length: [24 inches (600 mm)] [36 inches (900 mm)] <Insert dimension>.
b. Minimum Diameter: Equal to fan-coil-unit connection size.
4. Two-Piece Ball Valves: Bronze body with full-port, chrome-plated bronze ball; PTFE or
TFE seats; and 600-psig (4140-kPa) minimum CWP rating and blowout-proof stem.
5. Automatic Flow-Control Valve: Brass or ferrous-metal body; 300-psig (2070-kPa)
working pressure at 250 deg F (121 deg C), with removable, corrosion-resistant,
tamperproof, self-cleaning piston spring; factory set to maintain constant indicated flow
with plus or minus 10 percent over differential pressure range of 2 to 80 psig (13.8 to 552
kPa).
6. Y-Pattern Hydronic Strainers: Cast-iron body (ASTM A 126, Class B); 125-psig (860-
kPa) working pressure; with threaded connections, bolted cover, perforated stainless-steel
basket, and bottom drain connection. Include minimum NPS 1/2 (DN 15) hose-end, full-
port, ball-type blowdown valve in drain connection.
7. Wrought-Copper Unions: ASME B16.22.
8. Risers: [ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B)] [ASTM B 88, Type M
(ASTM B 88M Type C)] copper pipe with hose and ball valve for system flushing.
K. Control devices and operational sequences are specified in Division 15 Sections "HVAC
Instrumentation and Controls" and "Sequence of Operation."
M. SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
1. Scheduled Operation: Occupied and unoccupied periods via BAS signal to dry contact.
2. Unit Supply-Air Fan Operation:
a. Fan cycles to maintain room setback temperature.
3. Hydronic-Cooling-Coil Operation:
4. Heating-Coil Operation:
a. Occupied Periods: Start fan and open control valve to provide heating if room
temperature falls below thermostat set point.
b. Unoccupied Periods: Start fan and open control valve if room temperature falls
below setback temperature.
O. Electrical Connection: Factory wire motors and controls for a single electrical connection.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas to receive fan-coil units for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Examine roughing-in for piping and electrical connections to verify actual locations before fan-
coil-unit installation.
3.2 INSTALLATION
C. Verify locations of thermostats with drawings and room details before installation. Install new
filters in each fan-coil unit within two weeks after Substantial Completion.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. Specific connection requirements are as
follows:
a. Install condensate trap of adequate depth to seal against the pressure of fan. Install
cleanouts in piping at changes of direction.
B. Connect supply and return ducts to fan-coil units with flexible duct connectors specified in
Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories." Comply with safety requirements in UL 1995 for duct
connections.
B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm
proper motor rotation and unit operation.
2. Test and adjust controls and safety devices. Replace damaged and malfunctioning
controls and equipment.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION
A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain fan-coil units. Refer to
Division 1 Section "Demonstration and Training."
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, furnished
specialties, and accessories.
B. LEED Submittals:
C. Shop Drawings: For air-to-air energy recovery equipment. Include plans, elevations, sections,
details, and attachments to other work.
E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air-to-air energy recovery equipment to include in
maintenance manuals.
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B. ARI Compliance: Capacity ratings for air-to-air energy recovery equipment shall comply with
ARI 1060, "Rating Air-to-Air Energy Recovery Equipment."
C. ASHRAE Compliance:
D. NRCA Compliance: Roof curbs for roof-mounted equipment shall be constructed according to
recommendations of NRCA.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations with
actual equipment provided.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
B. Housing: Galvanized steel construction with corrosion-protection coating and exterior finish,
hinged access doors with neoprene gaskets for inspection and access to internal parts, minimum
1-inch- (25-mm-) thick 3 lb. density foil faced thermal insulation, knockouts for electrical and
piping connections, exterior drain connection, and lifting lugs.
1. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with
requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004.
2. Inlet: Weatherproof hood, with damper for exhaust and supply.
3. Roof Curb: Refer to Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories" for roof curbs and equipment
supports.
D. Supply and Exhaust Fans: Forward-curved, centrifugal fan with neoprene isolators and
insulated flexible duct connections.
1. Motor and Drive: Belt driven with adjustable sheaves, motor mounted on adjustable
base.
2. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and
efficiency requirements for motors specified inDivision 15 Section "Common Motor
Requirements for HVAC Equipment."
3. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load
will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.
4. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Comply with requirements for electrical
devices and connections specified in Division 16 Sections.
E. Wiring: Fabricate units with space within housing for piping and electrical conduits. Wire
motors and controls so only external connections are required during installation.
1. Outdoor Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 3R enclosure contains relays, starters, and
terminal strip.
2. Include door interlocking disconnect switches.
F. Accessories:
1. Roof Curb: Galvanized steel with fiberglass insulation, gasketing, and factory-installed
wood nailer; complying with NRCA standards; minimum height of 16 inches (350 mm).
Curb shall be sloped to match roof pitch.
2. Intake weather hood with 2-inch- (50-mm-) thick filters.
3. Exhaust weather hood with birdscreen.
4. Duct flanges.
5. Hinged access doors with quarter-turn latches.
2.2 CONTROLS
A. Unit-mounted control center containing a door interlocking disconnect switch, motor starters,
control transformer for 24 VAC control, and a terminal strip. A digital signal from the BAS to
the units terminal strip will energize the outdoor air fan, exhaust fan, and energy wheel. The
BAS shall be alarmed if a fan fails to operate.
B. Stop Wheel: Energy wheel is shut down for periods of free-cooling when the OA enthalpy or
temperature drops below a setpoint. When the OA temperature drops below 45 degrees (adj),
the wheel will be re-energized for heat.
C. Stop/Jog: A timer is included with either Stop Wheel or Modulating Wheel to periodically
energize the energy wheel briefly if it is stopped for economizer to allow the wheel to self-
clean.
D. Modulating: One VFD will be provided for each fan. Each VFD is factory programmed to
accept a field-supplied 0-10V signal, but is easily convertible to receive a 4-20 mA signal
instead.
E. Rotation Sensor: Sends a digital signal to alarm BAS system that energy wheel is not rotating.
F. Dirty Filter Sensor: Sends a digital signal to alarm BAS system that filters require changing.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Examine casing insulation materials and filter media before air-to-air energy recovery
equipment installation. Reject insulation materials and filter media that are wet, moisture
damaged, or mold damaged.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Roof Curb: Install air-to-air energy recovery equipment on curbs and coordinate roof
penetrations and flashing with roof construction. Secure air-to-air energy recovery equipment
to upper curb rail, and secure curb base to roof framing or concrete base with anchor bolts.
C. Install new filters at completion of equipment installation and before testing, adjusting, and
balancing.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Comply with requirements for ductwork specified in Division 15 Section "Metal Ducts."
1. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm
proper motor rotation and unit operation.
2. Adjust seals and purge.
3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
4. Set initial temperature and humidity set points.
5. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.
C. Air-to-air energy recovery equipment will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and
inspections.
3.5 DEMONSTRATION
METAL DUCTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories" for dampers, sound-control devices, duct-
mounting access doors and panels, turning vanes, and flexible ducts.
2. Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for testing, adjusting, and
balancing requirements for metal ducts.
A. Delegated Duct Design: Duct construction, including sheet metal thicknesses, seam and joint
construction, reinforcements, and hangers and supports, shall comply with SMACNA's "HVAC
Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" and performance requirements and design
criteria indicated in "Duct Schedule" Article.
B. Structural Performance: Duct hangers and supports shall withstand the effects of gravity loads
and stresses within limits and under conditions described in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"
C. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in
ASHRAE 62.1-2004.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
B. LEED Submittals:
1. Product Data for Prerequisite EQ 1: Documentation indicating that duct systems comply
with ASHRAE 62.1-2004, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment."
2. Product Data for Prerequisite EA 2: Documentation indicating that duct systems comply
with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004, Section 6.4.4 - "HVAC System Construction and
Insulation."
3. Leakage Test Report for Prerequisite EA 2: Documentation of work performed for
compliance with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004, Section 6.4.4.2.2 - "Duct Leakage Tests."
4. Duct-Cleaning Test Report for Prerequisite EQ 1: Documentation of work performed for
compliance with ASHRAE 62.1-2004, Section 7.2.4 - "Ventilation System Start-Up."
5. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For adhesives and sealants, including printed statement
of VOC content.
C. Shop Drawings:
D. Delegated-Design Submittal:
E. Coordination Drawings: Plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and
coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:
a. Lighting fixtures.
b. Air outlets and inlets.
c. Speakers.
d. Sprinklers.
e. Access panels.
f. Perimeter moldings.
F. Welding certificates.
1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for hangers and supports.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
B. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 1-4, "Transverse (Girth) Joints," for static-
pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and
other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 1-5, "Longitudinal Seams - Rectangular
Ducts," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-
D. Elbows, Transitions, Offsets, Branch Connections, and Other Duct Construction: Select types
and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible," Chapter 2, "Fittings and Other Construction," for static-pressure class, applicable
sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in
SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
a. Lindab Inc.
b. McGill AirFlow LLC.
c. SEMCO Incorporated.
d. Sheet Metal Connectors, Inc.
e. Spiral Manufacturing Co., Inc.
B. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-2, "Transverse Joints - Round Duct," for
static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals,
and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible."
C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-1, "Seams - Round Duct and Fittings,"
for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support
intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible."
D. Tees and Laterals: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-4, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and
Figure 3-5, "Conical Tees," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials
involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
C. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and
galvanized.
1. Where black- and galvanized-steel shapes and plates are used to reinforce aluminum
ducts, isolate the different metals with butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM gasket materials.
D. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch (6-mm) minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches (900
mm) or less; 3/8-inch (10-mm) minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches (900 mm).
A. Fibrous-Glass Duct Liner: Comply with ASTM C 1071, NFPA 90A, or NFPA 90B; and with
NAIMA AH124, "Fibrous Glass Duct Liner Standard."
2. Antimicrobial Erosion-Resistant Coating: Apply to the surface of the liner that will form
the interior surface of the duct to act as a moisture repellent and erosion-resistant coating.
Antimicrobial compound shall be tested for efficacy by an NRTL and registered by the
EPA for use in HVAC systems.
3. Water-Based Liner Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B and with
ASTM C 916.
a. For indoor applications, use adhesive that has a VOC content of 80 g/L or less
when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
4. Maximum Thermal Conductivity: 0.27 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F (0.039 W/m x K) at
75 deg F (24 deg C) mean temperature.
5. Density: 2.0 PCF.
C. Shop Application of Duct Liner: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-19, "Flexible Duct Liner Installation."
1. Adhere a single layer of indicated thickness of duct liner with at least 90 percent adhesive
coverage at liner contact surface area. Attaining indicated thickness with multiple layers
of duct liner is prohibited.
2. Apply adhesive to transverse edges of liner facing upstream that do not receive metal
nosing.
3. Butt transverse joints without gaps, and coat joint with adhesive.
4. Fold and compress liner in corners of rectangular ducts or cut and fit to ensure butted-
edge overlapping.
5. Do not apply liner in rectangular ducts with longitudinal joints, except at corners of ducts,
unless duct size and dimensions of standard liner make longitudinal joints necessary.
6. Apply adhesive coating on longitudinal seams in ducts with air velocity of 2500 fpm
(12.7 m/s).
7. Secure liner with mechanical fasteners 4 inches (100 mm) from corners and at intervals
not exceeding 12 inches (300 mm) transversely; at 3 inches (75 mm) from transverse
joints and at intervals not exceeding 18 inches (450 mm) longitudinally.
8. Secure transversely oriented liner edges facing the airstream with metal nosings that have
either channel or "Z" profiles or are integrally formed from duct wall. Fabricate edge
facings at the following locations:
a. Fan discharges.
b. Intervals of lined duct preceding unlined duct.
c. Upstream edges of transverse joints in ducts where air velocities are higher than
2500 fpm (12.7 m/s) or where indicated.
9. Secure insulation between perforated sheet metal inner duct of same thickness as
specified for outer shell. Use mechanical fasteners that maintain inner duct at uniform
distance from outer shell without compressing insulation.
10. Terminate inner ducts with buildouts attached to fire-damper sleeves, dampers, turning
vane assemblies, or other devices. Fabricated buildouts (metal hat sections) or other
buildout means are optional; when used, secure buildouts to duct walls with bolts, screws,
rivets, or welds.
A. General Sealant and Gasket Requirements: Surface-burning characteristics for sealants and
gaskets shall be a maximum flame-spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke-developed index
of 50 when tested according to UL 723; certified by an NRTL.
1. Tape: Woven cotton fiber impregnated with mineral gypsum and modified
acrylic/silicone activator to react exothermically with tape to form hard, durable, airtight
seal.
2. Tape Width: 4 inches (102 mm).
3. Sealant: Modified styrene acrylic.
4. Water resistant.
5. Mold and mildew resistant.
6. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg (2500 Pa), positive and negative.
7. Service: Indoor and outdoor.
8. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 93 deg C).
9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless
steel, or aluminum.
10. For indoor applications, use sealant that has a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
F. Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer.
1. Seal shall provide maximum leakage class of 3 cfm/100 sq. ft. at 1-inch wg (0.14 L/s per
sq. m at 250 Pa) and shall be rated for 10-inch wg (2500-Pa) static-pressure class,
positive or negative.
2. EPDM O-ring to seal in concave bead in coupling or fitting spigot.
3. Double-lipped, EPDM O-ring seal, mechanically fastened to factory-fabricated couplings
and fitting spigots.
A. Hanger Rods for Noncorrosive Environments: Cadmium-plated steel rods and nuts.
C. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal
and Flexible," Table 4-1 (Table 4-1M), "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and
Table 4-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct."
D. Steel Cables for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 603.
E. Steel Cables for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless steel complying with ASTM A 492.
F. Steel Cable End Connections: Cadmium-plated steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and
bolts designed for duct hanger service; with an automatic-locking and clamping device.
G. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible
with duct materials.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of duct
system. Indicated duct locations, configurations, and arrangements were used to size ducts and
calculate friction loss for air-handling equipment sizing and for other design considerations.
Install duct systems as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings and
Coordination Drawings.
B. Install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible" unless otherwise indicated.
E. Install factory- or shop-fabricated fittings for changes in direction, size, and shape and for
branch connections.
F. Unless otherwise indicated, install ducts vertically and horizontally, and parallel and
perpendicular to building lines.
G. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent
enclosure elements of building.
H. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch (25 mm), plus allowance for insulation thickness.
I. Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment rooms and
enclosures.
J. Where ducts pass through non-fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls and are exposed to
view, cover the opening between the partition and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal
flanges of same metal thickness as the duct. Overlap openings on four sides by at least 1-1/2
inches (38 mm).
K. Where ducts pass through fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls, install fire dampers.
Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke
dampers.
L. Protect duct interiors from moisture, construction debris and dust, and other foreign materials.
A. Protect ducts exposed in finished spaces from being dented, scratched, or damaged.
C. Grind welds to provide smooth surface free of burrs, sharp edges, and weld splatter. When
welding stainless steel with a No. 3 or 4 finish, grind the welds flush, polish the exposed welds,
and treat the welds to remove discoloration caused by welding.
D. Maintain consistency, symmetry, and uniformity in the arrangement and fabrication of fittings,
hangers and supports, duct accessories, and air outlets.
E. Repair or replace damaged sections and finished work that does not comply with these
requirements.
A. Seal ducts for duct static-pressure, seal classes, and leakage classes specified in "Duct
Schedule" Article according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible."
B. Seal ducts to the following seal classes according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible":
A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible,"
Chapter 4, "Hangers and Supports."
C. Hanger Spacing: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible," Table 4-1 (Table 4-1M), "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 4-2,
"Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct," for maximum hanger spacing; install hangers and
supports within 24 inches (610 mm) of each elbow and within 48 inches (1200 mm) of each
branch intersection.
F. Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull-out, tension,
and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.
3.5 CONNECTIONS
A. Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors complying with Division 15 Section
"Duct Accessories."
B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for
branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections.
3.6 PAINTING
A. Paint interior of metal ducts that are visible through registers and grilles and that do not have
duct liner. Apply one coat of flat, black, latex paint over a compatible galvanized-steel primer.
Paint materials and application requirements are specified in Division 9 painting Sections.
B. Leakage Tests:
1. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual." Submit a test report
for each test.
2. Test the following systems:
a. Ducts with a Pressure Class of 2-Inch wg (500 Pa) or Higher: Test representative
duct sections totaling no less than 100 percent of total installed duct area for each
duct system.
1. Visually inspect duct system to ensure that no visible contaminants are present.
a. Acceptable Cleanliness Level: Net weight of debris collected on the filter media
shall not exceed 0.75 mg/100 sq. cm.
D. Duct system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
1. Create new openings and install access panels appropriate for duct static-pressure class if
required for cleaning access. Provide insulated panels for insulated or lined duct. Patch
insulation and liner as recommended by duct liner manufacturer. Comply with
Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories" for access panels and doors.
2. Disconnect and reconnect flexible ducts as needed for cleaning and inspection.
3. Remove and reinstall ceiling to gain access during the cleaning process.
1. When venting vacuuming system inside the building, use HEPA filtration with 99.97
percent collection efficiency for 0.3-micron-size (or larger) particles.
2. When venting vacuuming system to outdoors, use filter to collect debris removed from
HVAC system, and locate exhaust downwind and away from air intakes and other points
of entry into building.
3.9 START UP
A. Air Balance: Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and
Balancing."
B. Supply Ducts:
C. Return Ducts:
D. Exhaust Ducts:
F. Intermediate Reinforcement:
G. Liner:
1. Supply Air Ducts: Fibrous glass, Type I, 1 inch thick. Provide liner in first 20 feet of
duct connected to an air-handling unit or connected to ERV-1.
2. Return Air Ducts: Fibrous glass, Type I, 1 inch thick. Provide liner in first 20 feet of duct
connected to an air-handling unit or connected to ERV-1.
3. Transfer Ducts: Fibrous glass, Type I, 1 inch thick.
H. Elbow Configuration:
3. Round Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal
and Flexible," Figure 3-3, "Round Duct Elbows."
1) Velocity 1000 fpm (5 m/s) or Lower: 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and three
segments for 90-degree elbow.
2) Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm (5 to 7.6 m/s): 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and
four segments for 90-degree elbow.
3) Velocity 1500 fpm (7.6 m/s) or Higher: 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and
five segments for 90-degree elbow.
4) Radius-to Diameter Ratio: 1.5.
I. Branch Configuration:
2. Round and Flat Oval: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -
Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-4, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-5, "Conical
Tees." Saddle taps are permitted in existing duct.
DUCT ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 13 Section "Fire Alarm" for duct-mounted fire and smoke detectors.
2. Division 15 Section "Intake and Relief Ventilators" for roof-mounted ventilator caps.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
1. For duct silencers, include pressure drop and dynamic insertion loss data. Include
breakout noise calculations for high transmission loss casings.
B. LEED Submittal:
1. Product Data for Prerequisite EQ 1: Documentation indicating that units comply with
ASHRAE 62.1-2004, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment."
1. Detail duct accessories fabrication and installation in ducts and other construction.
Include dimensions, weights, loads, and required clearances; and method of field
assembly into duct systems and other construction. Include the following:
a. Special fittings.
b. Manual volume damper installations.
c. Control damper installations.
d. Fire-damper, smoke-damper, combination fire- and smoke-damper, ceiling, and
corridor damper installations, including sleeves; and duct-mounted access doors
and remote damper operators.
e. Duct security bars.
f. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air duct accessories to include in operation and
maintenance manuals.
A. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and with
NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Fusible Links: Furnish quantity equal to [10] <Insert number> percent of amount
installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for
acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise
C. Stainless-Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 480/A 480M, Type 304, and having a [No. 2]
<Insert finish designation> finish for concealed ducts and <Insert finish designation> finish
for exposed ducts.
D. Aluminum Sheets: Comply with ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 3003, Temper H14;
with mill finish for concealed ducts and standard, 1-side bright finish for exposed ducts.
E. Extruded Aluminum: Comply with ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063, Temper T6.
G. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch (6-mm) minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches (900
mm) or less; 3/8-inch (10-mm) minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches (900 mm).
C. Maximum Air Velocity: [2000 fpm (10 m/s)] [3000 fpm (15 m/s)] <Insert value>.
D. Maximum System Pressure: [1-inch wg (0.25 kPa)] [2-inch wg (0.5 kPa)] <Insert value>.
H. Blade Seals: [Felt] [Vinyl foam] [Extruded vinyl, mechanically locked] [Neoprene,
mechanically locked].
I. Blade Axles:
1. Material: [Nonferrous metal] [Galvanized steel] [Plated steel] [Stainless steel] [Non-
metallic] [Aluminum].
2. Diameter: [0.20 inch (5 mm)] <Insert value>.
L. Bearings: [Steel ball] [Synthetic pivot bushings] [Steel ball or synthetic pivot bushings].
M. Accessories:
C. Maximum Air Velocity: [2000 fpm (10 m/s)] [2500 fpm (13 m/s)] <Insert value>.
E. Frame: [0.064-inch- (1.6-mm-) thick, galvanized sheet steel] [0.063-inch- (1.6-mm-) thick
extruded aluminum], with welded corners[ and mounting flange].
F. Blades:
L. Accessories:
1. Flange on intake.
2. Adjustment device to permit setting for varying differential static pressures.
3. <Insert accessories>.
5. Blades:
5. Blades:
E. Jackshaft:
F. Damper Hardware:
1. Zinc-plated, die-cast core with dial and handle made of 3/32-inch- (2.4-mm-) thick zinc-
plated steel, and a 3/4-inch (19-mm) hexagon locking nut.
2. Include center hole to suit damper operating-rod size.
3. Include elevated platform for insulated duct mounting.
B. Low-leakage rating[, with linkage outside airstream,] and bearing AMCA's Certified Ratings
Seal for both air performance and air leakage.
C. Frames:
D. Blades:
E. Blade Axles: 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) diameter; [galvanized steel] [stainless steel] [nonferrous
metal]; blade-linkage hardware of zinc-plated steel and brass; ends sealed against blade
bearings.
1. Operating Temperature Range: From minus 40 to plus 200 deg F (minus 40 to plus 93
deg C).
F. Bearings:
B. Type: [Static] [Dynamic] [Static and dynamic]; rated and labeled according to UL 555 by an
NRTL.
C. Closing rating in ducts up to [4-inch wg (1-kPa)] <Insert value> static pressure class and
minimum [4000-fpm (20-m/s)] <Insert value> velocity.
E. Frame: [Curtain type with blades inside airstream] [Curtain type with blades outside
airstream] [Multiple-blade type] [Curtain type with blades outside airstream except when
located behind grille where blades may be inside airstream]; fabricated with roll-formed,
0.034-inch- (0.85-mm-) thick galvanized steel; with mitered and interlocking corners.
1. Minimum Thickness: 0.052 or 0.138 inch (1.3 or 3.5 mm) thick, as indicated, and of
length to suit application.
2. Exception: Omit sleeve where damper-frame width permits direct attachment of
perimeter mounting angles on each side of wall or floor; thickness of damper frame must
comply with sleeve requirements.
K. Heat-Responsive Device: [Electric] [Pneumatic] resettable link and switch package, factory
installed, [165 deg F (74 deg C)] [and] [212 deg F (100 deg C)] <Insert temperature> rated.
D. Frame: [Curtain type with blades inside airstream] [Curtain type with blades outside
airstream] [Multiple-blade type] [Curtain type with blades outside airstream except when
located behind grille where blades may be inside airstream]; fabricated with roll-formed,
0.034-inch- (0.85-mm-) thick galvanized steel; with mitered and interlocking corners.
H. Mounting Sleeve: Factory-installed, 0.052-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick, galvanized sheet steel; length
to suit wall or floor application[ with factory-furnished silicone calking].
J. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and
efficiency requirements for motors specified in Division 15 Section "Common Motor
Requirements for HVAC Equipment."
1. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load
will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.
K. Accessories:
B. Type: [Static] [Dynamic] [Static and dynamic]; rated and labeled according to UL 555 and
UL 555S by an NRTL.
C. Closing rating in ducts up to [4-inch wg (1-kPa)] <Insert value> static pressure class and
minimum [4000-fpm (20-m/s)] <Insert value> velocity.
E. Frame: [Curtain type with blades inside airstream] [Curtain type with blades outside
airstream] [Multiple-blade type] [Curtain type with blades outside airstream except when
located behind grille where blades may be inside airstream]; fabricated with roll-formed,
0.034-inch- (0.85-mm-) thick galvanized steel; with mitered and interlocking corners.
G. Heat-Responsive Device: [Electric] [Pneumatic] resettable link and switch package, factory
installed, rated.
I. Frame: [Curtain type with blades inside airstream] [Curtain type with blades outside
airstream] [Multiple-blade type] [Curtain type with blades outside airstream except when
located behind grille where blades may be inside airstream]; fabricated with roll-formed,
0.034-inch- (0.85-mm-) thick galvanized steel; with mitered and interlocking corners.
M. Mounting Sleeve: Factory-installed, 0.052-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick, galvanized sheet steel; length
to suit wall or floor application[ with factory-furnished silicone calking].
P. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and
efficiency requirements for motors specified in Division 15 Section "Common Motor
Requirements for HVAC Equipment."
1. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load
will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.
2. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Comply with requirements for electrical
devices and connections specified in [Division 15 Section "HVAC Instrumentation
and Controls."] [Division 16 Sections.]
3. Permanent-Split-Capacitor or Shaded-Pole Motors: With oil-immersed and sealed gear
trains.
4. Spring-Return Motors: Equip with an integral spiral-spring mechanism where indicated.
Enclose entire spring mechanism in a removable housing designed for service or
adjustments. Size for running torque rating of 150 in. x lbf (17 N x m) and breakaway
torque rating of 150 in. x lbf (17 N x m).
5. Outdoor Motors and Motors in Outdoor-Air Intakes: Equip with O-ring gaskets designed
to make motors weatherproof. Equip motors with internal heaters to permit normal
operation at minus 40 deg F (minus 40 deg C).
6. Nonspring-Return Motors: For dampers larger than 25 sq. ft. (2.3 sq. m), size motor for
running torque rating of 150 in. x lbf (17 N x m) and breakaway torque rating of 300 in. x
lbf (34 N x m).
7. Electrical Connection: 115 V, single phase, 60 Hz.
B. Manufactured Turning Vanes for Metal Ducts: Curved blades of galvanized sheet steel; support
with bars perpendicular to blades set; set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting.
C. Manufactured Turning Vanes for Nonmetal Ducts: Fabricate curved blades of resin-bonded
fiberglass with acrylic polymer coating; support with bars perpendicular to blades set; set into
vane runners suitable for duct mounting.
D. General Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal
and Flexible"; Figures 2-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and 2-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."
C. Tubing: Brass.
E. Wall-Box Mounting: [Recessed, 3/4 inches (19 mm) deep] [Recessed, 2 inches (50 mm)
deep] [Surface].
B. Duct-Mounted Access Doors: Fabricate access panels according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"; Figures 2-10, "Duct Access Doors and Panels,"
and 2-11, "Access Panels - Round Duct."
1. Door:
2. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with bend-over tabs and foam gaskets.
3. Number of Hinges and Locks:
a. Access Doors Less Than 12 Inches (300 mm) Square: No hinges and two sash
locks.
b. Access Doors up to 18 Inches (460 mm) Square: Two hinges and two sash locks.
c. Access Doors up to 24 by 48 Inches (600 by 1200 mm): Three hinges and two
compression latches[ with outside and inside handles].
d. Access Doors Larger Than 24 by 48 Inches (600 by 1200 mm): Four hinges and
two compression latches with outside and inside handles.
C. Panel and Frame: Minimum thickness [0.0528-inch (1.3-mm) carbon] [0.0428-inch (1.1-mm)
stainless] steel.
D. Fasteners: [Carbon] [Stainless] steel. Panel fasteners shall not penetrate duct wall.
D. Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip [3-1/2 inches (89 mm)] [5-3/4
inches (146 mm)] wide attached to 2 strips of 2-3/4-inch- (70-mm-) wide, 0.028-inch- (0.7-
mm-) thick, galvanized sheet steel or 0.032-inch- (0.8-mm-) thick aluminum sheets. Provide
metal compatible with connected ducts.
E. Indoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene.
F. Outdoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with weatherproof,
synthetic rubber resistant to UV rays and ozone.
G. High-Temperature System, Flexible Connectors: Glass fabric coated with silicone rubber.
I. Thrust Limits: Combination coil spring and elastomeric insert with spring and insert in
compression, and with a load stop. Include rod and angle-iron brackets for attaching to fan
discharge and duct.
1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded rods and to allow for a maximum of
30 degrees of angular rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency.
2. Outdoor Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the
spring at rated load.
3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.
5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without
deformation or failure.
6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene.
7. Coil Spring: Factory set and field adjustable for a maximum of 1/4-inch (6-mm)
movement at start and stop.
B. Insulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 1, 2-ply vinyl film supported by helically wound,
spring-steel wire; fibrous-glass insulation; [polyethylene] [aluminized] vapor-barrier film.
1. Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg (2500 Pa) positive and 1.0-inch wg (250 Pa) negative.
2. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm (20 m/s).
3. Temperature Range: Minus 10 to plus 160 deg F (Minus 23 to plus 71 deg C).
4. Insulation R-value: [Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004] <Insert value>.
C. Insulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 1, black polymer film supported by helically wound,
spring-steel wire; fibrous-glass insulation; [polyethylene] [aluminized] vapor-barrier film.
1. Pressure Rating: 4-inch wg (1000 Pa) positive and 0.5-inch wg (125 Pa) negative.
2. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm (20 m/s).
3. Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 175 deg F (Minus 29 to plus 79 deg C).
4. Insulation R-Value: [Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004] <Insert value>.
1. Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg (2500 Pa) positive and 1.0-inch wg (250 Pa) negative.
2. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm (20 m/s).
3. Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 210 deg F (Minus 29 to plus 99 deg C).
4. Insulation R-value: [Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004] <Insert value>.
E. Insulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 1, aluminum laminate and polyester film with latex
adhesive supported by helically wound, spring-steel wire; fibrous-glass insulation;
[polyethylene] [aluminized] vapor-barrier film.
1. Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg (2500 Pa) positive and 1.0-inch wg (250 Pa) negative.
2. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm (20 m/s).
3. Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 210 deg F (Minus 29 to plus 99 deg C).
4. Insulation R-value: [Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004] <Insert value>.
F. Insulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 0, interlocking spiral of aluminum foil; fibrous-glass
insulation; [polyethylene] [aluminized] vapor-barrier film.
1. Clamps: [Stainless-steel band with cadmium-plated hex screw to tighten band with
a worm-gear action] [Nylon strap] in sizes 3 through 18 inches (75 through 460 mm),
to suit duct size.
2. Non-Clamp Connectors: [Adhesive] [Liquid adhesive plus tape] [Adhesive plus sheet
metal screws].
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
B. Install duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized-steel accessories in
galvanized-steel and fibrous-glass ducts, stainless-steel accessories in stainless-steel ducts, and
aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts.
C. Install [backdraft] [control] dampers at inlet of exhaust fans or exhaust ducts as close as
possible to exhaust fan unless otherwise indicated.
E. Set dampers to fully open position before testing, adjusting, and balancing.
F. Install test holes at fan inlets and outlets and elsewhere as indicated.
H. Install duct security bars. Construct duct security bars from 0.164-inch (4.18-mm) steel sleeve,
continuously welded at all joints and 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) diameter steel bars, 6 inches (150 mm)
o.c. in each direction in center of sleeve. Weld each bar to steel sleeve and each crossing bar.
Weld 2-1/2-by-2-1/2-by-1/4-inch (63-by-63-by-6-mm) steel angle to 4 sides and both ends of
sleeve. Connect duct security bars to ducts with flexible connections. Provide 12-by-12-inch
(300-by-300-mm) hinged access panel with cam lock in duct in each side of sleeve.
J. Install duct access doors on sides of ducts to allow for inspecting, adjusting, and maintaining
accessories and equipment at the following locations:
M. Label access doors according to Division 15 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and
Equipment" to indicate the purpose of access door.
O. For fans developing static pressures of 5-inch wg (1250 Pa) and more, cover flexible connectors
with loaded vinyl sheet held in place with metal straps.
P. Connect terminal units to supply ducts[ directly or] with maximum [12-inch (300-mm)]
<Insert value> lengths of flexible duct. Do not use flexible ducts to change directions.
Q. Connect diffusers or light troffer boots to ducts[ directly or] with maximum [60-inch (1500-
mm)] <Insert value> lengths of flexible duct clamped or strapped in place.
R. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with [adhesive] [liquid adhesive plus tape] [draw
bands] [adhesive plus sheet metal screws].
S. Install duct test holes where required for testing and balancing purposes.
T. Install thrust limits at centerline of thrust, symmetrical on both sides of equipment. Attach
thrust limits at centerline of thrust and adjust to a maximum of 1/4-inch (6-mm) movement
during start and stop of fans.
POWER VENTILATORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories for each type of
product indicated and include the following:
B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required
clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field
connection.
C. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans and other details, drawn to scale, on which the
following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of
the items involved:
E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For power ventilators to include in emergency, operation,
and maintenance manuals.
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
B. AMCA Compliance: Products shall comply with performance requirements and shall be
licensed to use the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.
C. NEMA Compliance: Motors and electrical accessories shall comply with NEMA standards.
A. Deliver fans as factory-assembled unit, to the extent allowable by shipping limitations, with
protective crating and covering.
B. Disassemble and reassemble units, as required for moving to final location, according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Lift and support units with manufacturer's designated lifting or supporting points.
1.7 COORDINATION
B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items
are specified in Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories."
B. Description: Centrifugal fans designed for installing in ceiling or wall or for concealed in-line
applications.
C. Housing: Steel, lined with acoustical insulation. Outlet, duct collar with integral backdraft
damper.
D. Fan Wheel: Centrifugal wheels directly mounted on motor shaft. Fan shrouds, motor, and fan
wheel shall be removable for service.
E. Grille: Plastic (non-yellowing) or painted aluminum, louvered grille with flange on intake and
thumbscrew attachment to fan housing.
F. Electrical Requirements: Junction box for electrical connection on housing and receptacle for
motor plug-in.
G. Accessories:
1. Variable-Speed Controller: Solid-state control to reduce speed from 100 to less than 50
percent.
2. Isolation: Rubber-in-shear vibration isolators.
2.2 MOTORS
A. Sound-Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating Fan Sound
Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." Factory test fans according to AMCA 300, "Reverberant
Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." Label fans with the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.
B. Fan Performance Ratings: Establish flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed of rotation,
and efficiency by factory tests and ratings according to AMCA 210, "Laboratory Methods of
Testing Fans for Rating."
3.1 INSTALLATION
B. Ceiling Units: Suspend units from structure; use steel wire or metal straps.
C. Support suspended units from structure using threaded steel rods and elastomeric hangers.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections.
Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make final duct
connections with flexible connectors. Flexible connectors are specified in Division 15 Section
"Duct Accessories."
A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
B. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes control equipment for HVAC systems and components, including control
components for terminal heating and cooling units not supplied with factory-wired controls.
1. Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages" for measuring equipment that relates to this
Section.
2. Division 15 Section "Sequence of Operation" for requirements that relate to this Section.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
B; I/O: Input/output.
C, BACnet: A data communication protocol for building automation and control networks.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's technical literature for each control device. Indicate
dimensions, capacities, performance characteristics, electrical characteristics, finishes for
materials, and installation and startup instructions for each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required
clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field
connection.
10. Control System Software: List of color graphics indicating monitored systems, data
(connected and calculated) point addresses, output schedule, and operator notations.
11. Controlled Systems:
a. Schematic diagrams of each controlled system with control points labeled and
control elements graphically shown, with wiring.
b. Scaled drawings showing mounting, routing, and wiring of elements including
bases and special construction.
c. Written description of sequence of operation including schematic diagram.
d. Points list.
C. Data Communications Protocol Certificates: Certify that each proposed DDC system
component complies with at least one of the following:
1. ASHRAE 135
2. LonWorks
D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each color required, of each type of thermostat or sensor cover
with factory-applied color finishes.
E. Samples for Verification: For each color required, of each type of thermostat or sensor cover.
2. Program Software Backup: On a magnetic media or compact disc, complete with data
files.
G. Software Upgrade Kit: For Owner to use in modifying software to suit future systems revisions
or monitoring and control revisions.
J. Operation and Maintenance Data: For HVAC instrumentation and control system to include in
emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 1
Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:
1. Maintenance instructions and lists of spare parts for each type of control device.
2. Interconnection wiring diagrams with identified and numbered system components and
devices.
3. Keyboard illustrations and step-by-step procedures indexed for each operator function
4. Inspection period, cleaning methods, cleaning materials recommended, and calibration
tolerances.
5. Calibration records and lists of set points.
A. The Building Automation System (BAS) manufacturer shall furnish and install a fully
integrated building automation system, incorporating direct digital control (DDC) for energy
management, equipment monitoring and control, and subsystems with open communications
capabilities as herein specified. Provide open communications system. The system shall be an
open architecture with the capabilities to support a multi-vendor environment. To accomplish
this effectively, system shall be capable of utilizing standard protocols as follows as well as be
able to integrate third-party systems via existing vendor protocols. The system shall not be
limited to only use open communication protocols, but also be able to integrate a wide variety
of third-party devices and applications via existing vendor protocols and through the latest
software standards.
B. The installation of the control system shall be performed under the direct supervision of the
controls manufacturer with the shop drawings, flow diagrams, bill of materials, component
designation or identification number and sequence of operation all bearing the name of the
manufacturer. The installing manufacturer shall certify in writing, that the shop drawings have
C. All materials and equipment used shall be standard components, regularly manufactured for this
and/or other systems and not custom designed specially for this project. All systems and
components shall have been thoroughly tested and proven in actual use for at least two years.
D. BAS manufacturer shall be responsible for all BAS and Temperature Control wiring for a
complete and operable system. All wiring shall be done in accordance with all local and
national codes, and be in conduit.
E. System shall use the BACnet protocol for communication to the operator workstation or web
server and for communication between control modules. Schedules, setpoints, trends, and
alarms specified in Section 15900 Appendix A (Sequence of Operation) shall be BACnet
objects.
F. Provide controller, sensors and all control devices and wiring for air handling units.
The manufacturer shall provide an experienced project manager for this work, responsi-
ble for direct supervision of the design, installation, start up and commissioning of the
BAS
The Bidder shall be regularly engaged in the manufacturing, installation and maintenance
of BAS systems and shall have a minimum of ten (10) years of demonstrated technical
expertise and experience in the manufacture, installation and maintenance of BAS sys-
tems similar in size and complexity to this project. A maintained service organization
consisting of at least ten (10) competent servicemen for a period of not less than ten years
and provide a list of 10 projects, similar in size and scope to this project, completed with-
in the last five years.
B. Materials and equipment shall be the catalogued products of manufacturers regularly en-
gaged in production and installation of automatic temperature control systems and shall
be manufacturer's latest standard design that complies with the specification require-
ments.
E. All electronic equipment shall conform to the requirements of FCC Regulation, Part 15,
Governing Radio Frequency Electromagnetic Interference and be so labeled.
F. The manufacturer of the building automation system shall provide documentation sup-
porting compliance with ISO-9002 (Model for Quality Assurance in Production, Installa-
tion, and Servicing) and ISO-140001 (The application of well-accepted business man-
agement principles to the environment). The intent of this specification requirement is to
ensure that the products from the manufacturer are delivered through a Quality System
and Framework that will assure consistency in the products delivered for this project.
G. This system shall have a documented history of compatibility by design for a minimum
of 15 years. Future compatibility shall be supported for no less than 10 years. Compatibil-
ity shall be defined as the ability to upgrade existing field panels to current level of tech-
nology, and extend new field panels on a previously installed network.
Compatibility shall be defined as the ability for any existing field panel microprocessor to
be connected and directly communicate with new field panels without bridges, routers or
protocol converters.
A. Factory-Mounted Components: Where control devices specified in this Section are indicated to
be factory mounted on equipment, arrange for shipping of control devices to equipment
manufacturer.
1.9 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate location of thermostats, humidistats, and other exposed control sensors with plans
and room details before installation.
B. Coordinate equipment with Division 13 Section "Fire Alarm" to achieve compatibility with
equipment that interfaces with that system.
C. Coordinate supply of conditioned electrical branch circuits for control units and operator
workstation.
F. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete,
reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place
Concrete."
G. Coordination Meeting: The Installer furnishing the DDC network shall meet with the Installer(s)
furnishing each of the following products to coordinate details of the interface between these
products and the DDC network. The Owner or his designated representative shall be present at
this meeting. Each Installer shall provide the Owner and all other Installers with details of the
proposed interface including PICS for BACnet equipment, hardware and software identifiers for
the interface points, network identifiers, wiring requirements, communication speeds, and
required network accessories. The purpose of this meeting shall be to insure there are no
unresolved issues regarding the integration of these products into the DDC network. Submittals
for these products shall not be approved prior to the completion of this meeting.
N. Variable frequency drives: Furnish variable frequency drives with an interface to monitoring
and control points specified in Section 15900 Appendix A. Points specified in Appendix A shall
be the minimum acceptable list of interface points. Use hard-wired points (such as relay, 0 - 10
Vdc, 4 - 20 mA) or a BACnet interface for points listed as AI, DI, AO, or DO in Appendix A.
Furnish a BACnet interface to points listed as AV or DV.
O. Communications with Third Party Equipment: Any additional integral control systems included
with the products integrated with the work of this section shall be furnished with a BACnet
interface for integration into the Direct Digital Control System described in this section.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Provide all services, materials and equipment necessary for the successful operation of the
entire BAS system for a period of one year after substantial completion.
B. The adjustment, required testing, and repair of the system includes all computer equipment,
transmission equipment and all sensors and control devices.
C. The on-line support services shall allow the local BAS subcontractor to dial out over telephone
lines to monitor and control the facility's building automation system. This remote connection
to the facility shall be within 4 hours of the time that the problem is reported. This coverage
shall be extended to include normal business hours, after business hours, weekends and
holidays.
If the problem cannot be resolved with on-line support services, the BAS manufacturer shall
dispatch the appropriate personnel to the job site to resolve the problem within 8 hours of the
time that the problem is reported.
PART 2 –PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers:
C. Control system shall consist of sensors, indicators, actuators, final control elements, interface
equipment, other apparatus, accessories, and software connected to distributed controllers
operating in multiuser, multitasking environment on token-passing network and programmed to
control mechanical systems. An operator workstation permits interface with the network via
dynamic color graphics with each mechanical system, building floor plan, and control device
depicted by point-and-click graphics.
1. Motherboard: With 8 integrated USB 2.0 ports, integrated Intel Pro 10/100 (Ethernet),
integrated audio, bios, and hardware monitoring.
2. Processor: Intel Pentium 4, 3.2 Ghz, minimum.
3. Random-Access Memory: 1.0 GB.
4. Graphics: Video adapter, minimum 1600 x 1200 pixels, 64-MB video memory, with TV
out.
5. Monitor: 20” flat screen, , LCD color.
6. Keyboard: QWERTY, 105 keys in ergonomic shape.
7. Floppy-Disk Drive: 1.44 MB.
8. Hard-Disk Drive: 80 GB.
9. CD-ROM Read/Write Drive: 48x24x48 and DVD rom drive..
10. Mouse: Three button, optical.
11. Uninterruptible Power Supply: 2 kVa.
12. Operating System: Microsoft Windows XP Professional with high-speed Internet access.
a. ASHRAE 135 Compliance: Workstation shall use ASHRAE 135 protocol and
communicate using ISO 8802-3 (Ethernet) datalink/physical layer protocol.
b. LonWorks Compliance: Control units shall use LonTalk protocol and
communicate using EIA/CEA 709.1 datalink/physical layer protocol.
The BAS shall provide a web based graphical interface that allows users to access the
BAS data via the Internet, extranet, or Intranet. The interface shall use HTML based
ASP pages to send and receive data from the BAS to a web browser.
A web server computer will be supplied. The web server shall use Microsoft’s IIS
server 4.0 with Windows NT4, or IIS 5.0 with Windows 2000, and support browser
access via Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.0 (or higher), or Navigator Netscape 6.0 (or
higher).
All information exchanged over Internet shall be optionally encrypted and secure via
SSL (provided by Owner).
Access to the web interface may be password protected. A users rights and privileges
to points and graphics will be the same as those assigned at the BAS workstation.
An option will exist to only allow users “read” access via the web browser, while
maintaining “command” privileges via the BAS workstation.
The web-based interface shall provide the following functionality to users, based on
their access and privilege rights:
1) Logon Screen – allows the user to enter their user name, password and Domain
name for logging into the web server.
2) Alarm Display – a display of current BAS alarms to which the user has access
will be displayed. Users will be able to acknowledge and erase active alarms,
and link to additional alarm information including alarm messages, and infor-
mational and memo text. Any alarm acknowledgements initiated through the
web interface will be written to the BAS central workstation activity log.
4) Point details – users will have access to point detail information including op-
erational status, operational priority, physical address, and alarm limits, for
point objects to which they have access rights.
5) Point Commanding – users will be able to override and command points they
have access to via the web browser interface. Any commands or overrides in-
itiated via the web browser interface will be written to the BAS central
workstation activity log.
g. The web server licensing options will allow concurrent access by 10 browser
connections.
C. The PC Workstations shall support the BACnet interoperability Building Blocks (BIBBS)
for read (initiate) and write (Execute) Services. That Following BIBBS shall be sup-
ported:
a. DS-RP-A,B
b. DS-RPM-A
c. DS-WP-A
d. DS-wpm-A
A. The design of the BAS shall network the operator workstations and new stand-alone DDC
Controllers. The network architecture shall consist of multiple levels for communication effi-
ciency, a campus-wide Ethernet network based on TCP/IP protocol, high performance
peer-to-peer building level network(s) and DDC Controller floor level local area networks
with access being totally transparent to the user when accessing data or developing control
programs. Communication between the workstation/server and the control network backbone
shall use the ISO 8802-3 (Ethernet) Data Link/Physical layer protocol and BACnet/IP ad-
dressing as specified in Annex J of the ASHRAE/ANSI BACnet Specification and BACnet
MS/TP to support lower order devices. Connection from a remote site to OWS shall use ei-
ther the BACnet Point to Point Physical/Data Link Layer Protocol or IP over Point-to-Point
(PTP).
B. The design of BAS shall allow the co-existence of new DDC Controllers with existing DDC
Controllers in the same network without the use of gateways or protocol converters.
1. All operator devices either network resident or connected via dial-up modems shall
have the ability to access all point status and application report data or execute con-
trol functions for any and all other devices via the peer-to-peer network. No hard-
ware or software limits shall be imposed on the number of devices with global access
to the network data at any time.
2. The peer-to-peer network shall support a minimum of 100 DDC controllers and PC
workstations
4. The system shall support integration of third party systems (fire alarm, security, light-
ing, PCL, chiller, boiler) via panel mounted open protocol processor. This processor
shall exchange data between the two systems for interprocess control. All exchange
points shall have full system functionality as specified herein for hardwired points.
5. The peer-to-peer Building Level Network shall use the TCP/IP over Ethernet. All
devices must:
D. Intranet/Internet access
a. The BAS shall provide a web based graphical interface that allows users to
access the BAS data via the Internet, extranet, or Intranet. The interface
shall use HTML based ASP pages to send and receive data from the BAS
to a web browser.
b. A web server will be supplied. The web server shall support browser access
via Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.0 (or higher), or Navigator Netscape
6.0 (or higher).
c. BACnet. The web server shall support the BACnet Interperable Building
Blocks (BIBBS) for Read (Initiate) and Write (Execute) Services. These
are the Data Sharing BIBBS as follows:
DS-RP-A,B
DS-RPM-A
DS-WP-A
DS-WPM-A
d. The Web browser client shall support Sun Microsystems Java 2 (JRE 1.4.0 or
higher plug in.
e. All information exchanged over Internet shall be optionally encrypted and
secure via SSL (provided by Owner).
f. Access to the web interface may be password protected. A users rights and
privileges to points and graphics will be the same as those assigned at the
BAS workstation. An option will exist to only allow users “read” access
via the web browser, while maintaining “command” privileges via the
BAS workstation.
1) Logon Screen – allows the user to enter their user name, pass-
word and Domain name for logging into the web server.
a. The Data Managment System shall provide a web based graphical interface
that allows users to access the stored data via the Internet, extranet, or Intra-
net. The interface shall use HTML based ASP pages to send and receive data
from the data management system to a web browser.
c. Access to the web interface may be password protected. Users shall be able
to configure reports and/or run reports.
1. All Ethernet-capable PCs shall simultaneously direct connect to the Ethernet Man-
agement Level Network without the use of an interposing device.
3. The Management Level Network shall not impose a maximum constraint on the
number of operator workstations.
4. When appropriate, any controller residing on the peer-to-peer building level networks
shall connect to Ethernet network without the use of a PC or a gateway with a hard
drive.
5. Any PC on the Ethernet Management Level Network shall have transparent commu-
nication with controllers on the building level networks connected via Ethernet, as
well as, directly connected building level networks. Any PC shall be able to interro-
gate any controller on the building level network.
7. The standard client and server workstations on the Management Level Network shall
reside on industry standard Ethernet utilizing standard TCP/IP, IEEE 802.3
8. Any break in Ethernet communication between the standard client and server
workstations on the Management Level Network shall result in a notification within
the Windows taskbar at each workstation.
9. Access to the system database shall be available from any standard client workstation
on the Management Level Network.
A. This level communication shall support a family of application specific controllers and shall
communicate with the peer-to-peer network via BACnet (using the MS/TP Data
Link/Physical Layer protocol) or Lontalk through DDC Controllers for transmission of global
data.
A. The DDC & HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controllers shall reside on the Building
Level Network.
B. DDC & HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controllers shall use the same programming lan-
guage and tools. DDC & HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controllers which require differ-
ent programming language or tools on a network are not acceptable.
C. DDC & HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controllers which do not meet the functions spe-
cified in Section 2.4.1 and Section 2.5 for DDC Controllers or Section 2.4.2 and Section
2.5 for HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controllers are not acceptable.
D. Each DDC & HVAC Mechanical Equipment controller shall have a connection for a
laptop computer or a portable operator's tool. This connection shall be extended to a
space temperature sensor port where shown.
E. Distributed Processing: Each DDC & HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controller shall
be capable of performing all specified control functions in a completely independent
manner. Independent shall be defined as follows: If any one control unit or commu-
nications processor malfunctions within the system, all other control units will con-
tinue to control, monitor, have the ability to be accessed and programmed without be-
ing in a degraded mode. Each DDC & HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controller
shall have a separate internal battery backed time clock for scheduling devices con-
trolled by that panel. DDC & HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controllers that are Ap-
Networking: Each DDC & HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controller shall be capa-
ble of sharing point information with other such units, such that control sequences or
control loops executed at one control unit may receive input signals from sensors
connected to other units within the network. If the network communication link fails
or the originating control unit malfunctions, the control loop shall continue to func-
tion using the last value received from the failed stand-alone unit.
B. Each DDC Controller shall have sufficient memory to support its own operating system
and databases, including:
1. Control processes
2. Energy management applications
3. Alarm management applications including custom alarm messages for each level
alarm for each point in the system.
4. Historical/trend data for points specified
5. Maintenance support applications
6. Custom processes
7. Operator I/O
8. Dial-up communications
9. Manual override monitoring
C. Each DDC Controller shall support firmware upgrades without the need to replace hard-
ware.
D. Provide all processors, power supplies and communication controllers so that the imple-
mentation of a point only requires the addition of the appropriate point input/output ter-
mination module and wiring.
E. DDC Controllers shall provide a RS-232C serial data communication ports for operation
of operator I/O devices such as industry standard printers, operator terminals, modems
and portable laptop operator's terminals. DDC Controllers shall allow temporary use of
portable devices without interrupting the normal operation of permanently connected
modems, printers or terminals.
G. DDC Controllers shall provide status indication for each digital input and output for con-
stant, up-to-date verification of all point conditions without the need for an operator I/O
device. Status indication shall be visible without opening the panel door.
H. Isolation shall be provided at all peer-to-peer network terminations, as well as all field
point terminations to suppress induced voltage transients consistent with:
3. Electrical Fast Transient (EFT) per EN 61000-4-4 (IEC 1000-4-4) at 500 V signal, 1
kV power
4. Output Circuit Transients per UL 864 (2,400V, 10A, 1.2 Joule max)
J. In the event of the loss of normal power, there shall be an orderly shutdown of all DDC
Controllers to prevent the loss of database or operating system software. Non-volatile
memory shall be incorporated for all critical controller configuration data and battery
backup shall be provided to support the real-time clock and all volatile memory for a
minimum of 60 days.
2. Should DDC Controller memory be lost for any reason, the user shall have the
capability of reloading the DDC Controller via the local RS-232C port, via tele-
phone line dial-in or from a network workstation PC.
B. Each HVAC Mechanical Controller shall have sufficient memory to support its own op-
erating system and databases, including:
1. Control processes
2. Energy management applications
3. Alarm management applications including custom alarm messages for each level
alarm for each point in the system.
4. Historical/trend data for points specified
5. Maintenance support applications
6. Custom processes
7. Operator I/O
8. Remote communications
C. HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controllers shall provide a RS-232C serial data commu-
nication port for operation of operator I/O devices such as industry standard printers, op-
erator terminals, modems and portable laptop operator's terminals.
D. HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controllers shall provide local LED status indication for
each digital input and output for constant, up-to-date verification of all point conditions
without the need for an operator I/O device.
F. Isolation shall be provided at all peer-to-peer network terminations, as well as all field
point terminations to suppress induced voltage transients consistent with:
• RF-Conducted Immunity (RFCI) per ENV 50141 (IEC 1000-4-6) at 3 V
• Electro Static Discharge (ESD) Immunity per EN 61000-4-2 (IEC 1000-
4-2) at 8 kV air discharge, 4 kV contact
• Electrical Fast Transient (EFT) per EN 61000-4-4 (IEC 1000-4-4) at 500
V signal, 1 kV power
• Output Circuit Transients per UL 864 (2,400V, 10A, 1.2 Joule max)
Isolation shall be provided at all peer-to-peer panel's AC input terminals to sup-
press induced voltage transients consistent with:
• EEE Standard 587-1980
G. In the event of the loss of normal power, there shall be an orderly shutdown of all HVAC
Mechanical Equipment Controllers to prevent the loss of database or operating system
software. Non-volatile memory shall be incorporated for all critical controller configura-
tion data and battery backup shall be provided to support the real-time clock and all vola-
tile memory for a minimum of 72 hours.
2. Should HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controller memory be lost for any reason,
the user shall have the capability of reloading the HVAC Mechanical Equipment
Controller via the local RS-232C port, via telephone line dial-in or from a net-
work workstation PC.
A. General:
3. All digital points shall have user defined two-state status indication
(descriptors with minimum of 8 characters allowed per state (i.e.
summer/winter)).
1. The DDC and HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controllers shall have the ability to
perform the following pre-tested control algorithms:
a. Two-position control
b. Proportional control
C. DDC and HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controllers shall provide the following energy
management routines for the purpose of optimizing energy consumption while maintain-
ing occupant comfort.
a) The SSTO program shall operate in both the heating and cooling seasons.
b) The SSTO program shall meet the local code requirements for minimum
outside air while the building is occupied.
b) For points assigned to one common load group, it shall be possible to as-
sign variable time delays between each successive start or stop within
that group.
1. Time, day
2. Commands such as on, off, auto, and so forth.
3. Time delays between successive commands.
4. There shall be provisions for manual overriding of each schedule
by an appropriate operator.
a) The DCCP (Duty Cycle Control Program) shall periodically stop and
start loads according to various patterns.
b) The loads shall be cycled such that there is a net reduction in both the
electrical demands and the energy consumed.
5. Automatic Daylight Savings Time Switchover: The system shall provide auto-
matic time adjustment for switching to/from Daylight Savings Time.
6. Night setback control: The system shall provide the ability to automatically ad-
just setpoints for night control.
D. DDC and HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controllers shall be able to execute custom,
job-specific processes defined by the user, to automatically perform calculations and spe-
cial control routines.
3. DDC and HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controller shall provide a HELP func-
tion key, providing enhanced context sensitive on-line help with task orientated
information from the user manual.
E. Alarm management shall be provided to monitor and direct alarm information to operator
devices. Each DDC and HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controller shall perform distri-
buted, independent alarm analysis and filtering to minimize operator interruptions due to
non-critical alarms, minimize network traffic and prevent alarms from being lost. At no
time shall the DDC and HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controllers ability to report
1. All alarm or point change reports shall include the point's English language de-
scription and the time and date of occurrence.
2. The user shall be able to define the specific system reaction for each point.
Alarms shall be prioritized to minimize nuisance reporting and to speed operator
response to critical alarms. A minimum of six priority levels shall be provided
for each point. Point priority levels shall be combined with user definable desti-
nation categories (PC, printer, DDC Controller, etc.) to provide full flexibility in
defining the handling of system alarms. Each DDC and HVAC Mechanical
Equipment Controller shall automatically inhibit the reporting of selected alarms
during system shutdown and start-up. Users shall have the ability to manually
inhibit alarm reporting for each point.
3. Alarm reports and messages will be directed to a user-defined list of operator de-
vices or PCs based on time (after hours destinations) or based on priority.
4. In addition to the point's descriptor and the time and date, the user shall be able to
print, display or store a 200 character alarm message to more fully describe the
alarm condition or direct operator response.
1. Any point, physical or calculated may be designated for trending. Any point, re-
gardless of physical location in the network, may be collected and stored in each
DDC and HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controllers point group. Two methods
of collection shall be allowed: either by a pre-defined time interval or upon a
pre-defined change of value. Sample intervals of l minute to 7 days shall be pro-
vided. Each DDC and HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controller shall have a
dedicated RAM-based buffer for trend data and shall be capable of storing a min-
imum of __ data samples. All trend data shall be available for transfer to a
Workstation without manual intervention.
2. DDC and HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controllers shall also provide high
resolution sampling capability for verification of control loop performance. Op-
erator-initiated automatic and manual loop tuning algorithms shall be provided
for operator-selected PID control loops as identified in the point I/O summary.
a. Loop tuning shall be capable of being initiated either locally at the DDC
and HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controller, from a network worksta-
tion or remotely using dial-in modems. For all loop tuning functions,
H. The peer to peer network shall allow the DDC and HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controllers
to access any data from or send control commands and alarm reports directly to any other
DDC and HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controller or combination of controllers on the
network without dependence upon a central or intermediate processing device. DDC and
HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controllers shall send alarm reports to multiple worksta-
tion without dependence upon a central or intermediate processing device. The peer to
peer network shall also allow any DDC and HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controller to
access, edit, modify, add, delete, back up, and restore all system point database and all
programs.
I. The peer to peer network shall allow the DDC and HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controllers
to assign a minimum of 50 passwords access and control priorities to each point indivi-
dually. The logon password (at any PC workstation or portable operator terminal) shall
enable the operator to monitor, adjust and control the points that the operator is autho-
rized for. All other points shall not be displayed on the PC workstation or portable ter-
minal (e.g. all base building and all tenant points shall be accessible to any base building
operators, but only tenant points shall be accessible to tenant building operators). Pass-
words and priorities for every point shall be fully programmable and adjustable.
A. Each DDC Controller shall be able to extend its performance and capacity through the
use of remote application specific controllers (ASCs) through Floor Level LAN Device
Networks.
B. Each ASC shall operate as a stand-alone controller capable of performing its specified
control responsibilities independently of other controllers in the network. Each ASC
shall be a microprocessor-based, multi-tasking, real-time digital control processor. Each
ASC shall be capable of control of the terminal device independent of the manufacturer
of the terminal device.
1. Provide for control of each piece of equipment, including, but not limited to, the
following:
e. Heat Pumps
f. Unit Ventilators
2. Controllers shall include all point inputs and outputs necessary to perform the speci-
fied control sequences. Analog outputs shall be industry standard signals such as 24V
floating control, 3-15 psi pneumatic, 0-10v ,allowing for interface to a variety of
modulating actuators.
3. All controller sequences and operation shall provide closed loop control of the in-
tended application. Closing control loops over the FLN, BLN or MLN is not accept-
able
1. Provide a graphical user interface that shall minimize the use of keyboard through the
use of a mouse or similar pointing device, with a "point and click" approach to menu se-
lection and a “drag and drop” approach to inter-application navigation. Selection of ap-
plications within the workstation software shall be via a graphical toolbar menu – the ap-
plication toolbar menu shall have the option to be located in a docked position on any of
the four sides of the visible desktop space on the workstation display monitor, and the op-
tion to automatically hide itself from the visible monitor workspace when not being ac-
tively manipulated by the user.
2. The software shall provide a multi-tasking type environment that allows the user to
run several applications simultaneously. BAS software shall run on a Windows XP, 2000
or NT 32 bit operating system. System database parameters shall be stored within an ob-
ject-oriented database, which is compliant with the Open Database Connectivity (ODBC)
or Structured Query Language (SQL) standards. Standard Windows applications shall
run simultaneously with the BAS software. The mouse or Alt-Tab keys shall be used to
quickly select and switch between multiple applications. The operator shall be able to
work in Microsoft Word, Excel, and other Windows based software packages, while con-
currently annunciating on-line BAS alarms and monitoring information
Provide a calendar type format for simplification of time and date scheduling and
overrides of building operations. Schedule definitions reside in the PC worksta-
tion, DDC Controller, and HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controller to ensure
time equipment scheduling when PC is off-line -- PC is not required to execute
time scheduling. Provide override access through menu selection, graphical
mouse action or function key. Provide the following capabilities as a minimum:
a. Weekly schedules
b. Zone schedules
c. Event schedules – an event consists of logical combinations of equip-
ment and/or zones
d. Report schedules
e. Ability to schedule for a minimum of up to 365 days in advance
b. Trend data reports shall be provided to allow the user to view all trended
point data. Reports may be customized to include individual points or
predefined groups of selected points. Provide additional functionality to
allow predefined groups of up to 250 trended points to be easily trans-
ferred on-line to Microsoft Excel. DDC contractor shall provide custom
designed spreadsheet reports for use by the owner to track energy usage
and cost, equipment run times, equipment efficiency, and/or building en-
vironmental conditions. DDC contractor shall provide setup of custom
reports including creation of data format templates for monthly or week-
ly reports.
1. Create color graphic floor plan displays and system schematics for each piece of
mechanical equipment, including air handling units, chilled water systems and
hot water boiler systems, and room level terminal units, shall be provided by the
BAS contractor as indicated in the point I/O schedule of this specification to op-
timize system performance, analysis and speed alarm recognition.
2. The operator interface shall allow users to access the various system schematics
and floor plans via a graphical penetration scheme, menu selection, point alarm
3. Dynamic temperature values, humidity values, flow values and status indication
shall be shown in their actual respective locations within the system schematics
or graphic floor plan displays, and shall automatically update to represent current
conditions without operator intervention and without pre-defined screen refresh
rates.
a. Provide the user the ability to display real-time point values by animated mo-
tion or custom picture control visual representation. Animation shall depict
movement of mechanical equipment, or air or fluid flow. Picture Control
shall depict various positions in relation to assigned point values or ranges.
A library (set) of animation and picture control symbols shall be included
within the workstation software’s graphics application. Animation shall re-
flect, ON or OFF conditions, and shall also be optionally configurable for up
to five rates of animation speed.
b. Sizable analog bars shall be available for monitor and control of analog val-
ues; high and low alarm limit settings shall be displayed on the analog scale.
The user shall be able to "click and drag" the pointer to change the setpoint.
c. Provide the user the ability to display blocks of point data by defined point
groups; alarm conditions shall be displayed by flashing point blocks.
4. Colors shall be used to indicate status and change as the status of the equipment
changes. The state colors shall be user definable.
5. Advanced linking within the Graphics application shall provide the ability to na-
vigate to outside documents (e.g., .doc, .pdf, .xls, etc.), internet web addresses, e-
mail, external programs, and other workstation applications, directly from the
Graphics application window with a mouse-click on a customizable link symbol.
6. The windowing environment of the PC operator workstation shall allow the user
to simultaneously view several applications at a time to analyze total building
operation or to allow the display of a graphic associated with an alarm to be
viewed without interrupting work in progress.
9. A hierarchy of graphics that allow an operator viewing a site map to see the gen-
eral location of alarm activity on the system shall be created. By selecting the
highlighted area, an operator shall be able to “drill-down” repeatedly to the next
most specific graphic, until the exact area of incident is displayed.
10. When adding a new point to a graphic all higher level graphics on the hierarchy,
the location of the new point shall be automatically associated with the location
of the new point, such that graphics higher up the hierarchy do not have to be
modified or resaved in order to associate them with the new point.
2. Network wide control strategies shall not be restricted to a single DDC Controller
or HVAC Mechanical Equipment controller, but shall be able to include data
from any and all other network panels to allow the development of Global con-
trol strategies.
3. Provide automatic backup and restore of all DDC controller and HVAC Mechan-
ical Equipment controller databases on the workstation hard disk. In addition, all
database changes shall be performed while the workstation is on-line without dis-
rupting other system operations. Changes shall be automatically recorded and
downloaded to the appropriate DDC Controller or HVAC Mechanical Equipment
Controller. Changes made at the user-interface of DDC Controllers or HVAC
Mechanical Equipment Controllers shall be automatically uploaded to the
workstation, ensuring system continuity.
D. Alarm Management
1. Alarm Routing shall allow the user to send alarm notification to selected printers or
workstation location(s) based on time of day, alarm severity, or point type.
3. Alarm Display shall have the ability to list & sort the alarms based on alarm status,
point name, ascending or descending alarm time.
4. Directly from the Alarm Display, the user shall have the ability to acknowledge, si-
lence the alarm sound, print, or erase each alarm. The interface shall also have the
option to inhibit the erasing of active acknowledged alarms, until they have returned
to normal status. The user shall also have the ability to command, launch an asso-
ciated graphic or trended graphical plot, or run a report on a selected alarm point di-
rectly on the Alarm Display.
5. Each alarm point shall have a direct link from the Alarm Display to further user-
defined point informational data. The user shall have the ability to also associate
real-time electronic annotations or notes to each alarm.
7. Alarm Display application shall allow workstation operators to send and receive real-
time messages to each other, for purposes of coordinating Alarm and BAS system
management.
9. Alarm segregation
a. At the user interface, alarms shall be segregated into separate categories depend-
ing on their usage. There shall be separate tabs on the alarm display that segre-
gate fire, security, and building automation events.
a. An alarm display must be active and visible to the operator at all times, regard-
less of what other workstation applications the operator is involved in.
b. This display shall provide an overview of the system status including fire, securi-
ty, and building automation events.
c. This display shall display a textual description of the highest priority event on the
system as well the point status and indication of when the point last changed
state.
d. This display shall indicate whether the highest priority event has been acknowl-
edged.
e. When a new alarm is received at a workstation, the operator shall be informed of
the new event through an audible and visual notification without application fo-
11. Acknowledgement
Output 4 – 20 mA DC
Calibration Adjustments Zero and span
Accuracy +-0.2% of span
Linearity +-0.1% of span
Hysteresis +-0.05% of span
F. Differential pressure:
Output signal 4 to 20 mA
Accuracy +1.0% of full scale
1. Electric Control
Rangeability 40:1
Flow Characteristics Modified. Equal percentage
Control Action Normal open or closed as selected
Medium Steam, water, glycol
Body Type Screwed ends 2” and smaller, flanged
Valves 2½” and larger
Body Material Bronze
Body Trim Bronze
Stem Stainless Steel
Actuator 0-10 VDC, 4-20 MA or 2 position
24 VAC/120VAC
2. All automatic temperature control valves in water lines shall be provided with
Characterized throttling plugs and shall be sized for minimum 25% of the system
pressure drop or 5 psi, whichever is less.
a) The actuator assembly shall include the necessary hardware and proper
mounting and connection to a standard diameter shaft or damper blade.
4. All actuators having more than 100 lb-in torque output shall have a self-
centering damper shaft clamp that guarantees concentric alignment of the
actuator’s output coupling with the damper shaft. The self-centering
clamp shall have a pair of opposed “v” shaped toothed cradles; each hav-
ing two rows of teeth to maximize holding strength. A single clamping
bolt shall simultaneously drive both cradles into contact with the damper
shaft.
5. All actuators having more than a 100 lb-in torque output shall accept a
1” diameter shaft directly, without the need for auxiliary adapters.
A. Thermostats
1. Thermostats shall be of the gradual acting type with adjustable sensitivity.
2. They shall have a bi-metal sensing element capable of responding to a
temperature change of one-tenth of one degree. (Provide all thermostats
with limit stops to limit adjustments as required.)
3. Thermostats shall be arranged for either horizontal or vertical mounting.
4. In the vertical position thermostat shall fit on a mullion of movable parti-
tions without overlap.
5. Mount the thermostat covers with tamper-proof socket head screws.
6. Guest room thermostats shall be “Inncom” DDC type.
B. Freezestats:
1. Provide manual reset, fixed temperature line voltage type with a bi-metal
actuated switch.
1. Each station shall contain parallel air straightener, total and static pressure
sensing manifolds, internal piping and external pressure transmission ports
with flexible tubing and quick-connect fittings. Fabricate of galvanized
steel, size for fan inlet in which mounted. Maximum pressure loss through
station of 0.08 inches water gage at 1500 fpm. Station shall have accuracy
of 2%. Identify by model number, size, area, and specified airflow capaci-
ty.
H. Power Line Filtering: Internal or external transient voltage and surge suppression for
workstations or controllers with the following:
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
C. Verify that pneumatic piping and duct-, pipe-, and equipment-mounted devices are installed
before proceeding with installation.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install software in control units and operator workstation(s). Implement all features of
programs to specified requirements and as appropriate to sequence of operation.
B. Connect and configure equipment and software to achieve sequence of operation specified.
D. Verify location of thermostats, humidistats, and other exposed control sensors with Drawings
and room details before installation. Install devices 48 inches above the floor.
1. Entrances.
2. Public areas.
3. Where indicated.
G. Install damper motors on outside of duct in warm areas, not in locations exposed to outdoor
temperatures.
H. Install labels and nameplates to identify control components according to Division 15 Section
"Mechanical Identification."
I. Install hydronic instrument wells, valves, and other accessories according to Division 15 Section
"Hydronic Piping."
K. Install refrigerant instrument wells, valves, and other accessories according to Division 15
Section "Refrigerant Piping."
L. Install duct volume-control dampers according to Division 15 Sections specifying air ducts.
M. Install electronic and fiber-optic cables according to Division 16 Section "Voice and Data
Communication Cabling."
A. When installation of the system is complete, calibrate equipment and verify transmission
media operation before the system is placed on-line. All testing, calibrating, adjusting
and final field tests shall be completed by the manufacturer. Verify that all systems are
operable from local controls in the specified failure mode upon panel failure or loss of
power. Coordinate with testing/balancing contractor.
C. After manufacturer has completed system start-up and commissioning. Joint commission-
ing of integrated system segments shall be completed.
A. Install, connect and wire the items included under this Section. This work includes provid-
ing required conduit, wire, fittings, and related wiring accessories. All wiring shall be in-
stalled in conduit.
B. Provide wiring between thermostats, aquastats and unit heater motors, all control and alarm
wiring for all control and alarm devices for all Sections of Specifications.
C. Provide 120 volt, single phase, 60 hertz emergency power to every BAS DDC Controller
panel, HVAC/Mechanical Equipment Controller, PC console, power supply, transformer, an-
nunciator, modems, printers and to other devices as required. It is the intent that the entire
building management system except terminal equipment shall be operative under emergency
power conditions in the building. The power supplies are to be extended in conduit and wire
from emergency circuit breakers.
D. Provide status function conduit and wiring for equipment covered under this Section.
E. Provide conduit and wiring between the BAS panels and the temperature, humidity, or pres-
sure sensing elements, including low voltage control wiring in conduit.
F. Provide conduit and control wiring for devices specified in this Section.
G. Provide conduit and signal wiring between motor starters in motor control centers and high
and/or low temperature relay contacts and remote relays in BAS panels located in the vicini-
ty of motor control centers.
H. Provide conduit and wiring between the PC workstation, electrical panels, metering instru-
mentation, indicating devices, miscellaneous alarm points, remotely operated contractors,
and BAS panels, as shown on the drawings or as specified.
J. Provide electrical wall box and conduit sleeve for all wall mounted devices.
3.5 PERFORMANCE
A. Unless stated otherwise, control temperatures within plus or minus 2oF, humidity within plus
or minus 3% of the set point, and static pressure within 10% of set point.
1. Prior to system program commissioning, verify that each control panel has been in-
stalled according to plans, specifications and approved shop drawings. Test, calibrate
and bring on line each control sensor and device. Commissioning to include, but not
be limited to:
b. Sensor range.
f. Actuator ranges.
g. Fail safe operation on loss of control signal, electric power, network communi-
cations.
B. After control devices have been commissioned (i.e. calibrated, tested and signed off), each
BAS program shall be put on line and commissioned. The contractor shall, in the presence of
the owner and construction manager, demonstrate each programmed sequence of operation
and compare the results in writing. In addition, each control loop shall be tested to verify
proper response and stable control, within specified accuracy's. System program test results
shall be recorded on commissioning data sheets and submitted for record. Any discrepancies
between the specification and the actual performance will be immediately rectified and re-
tested.
C. After all BAS programs have been commissioned, the contractor shall verify the overall sys-
tem performance as specified. Tests shall include, but not be limited to:
6. Season changeover.
13. Smoke Control, stair pressurization, stair, vents, in concert with Fire Alarm System
testing.
14. Testing of all electrical and HVAC systems with other division of work.
D. Submit for approval, a detailed acceptance test procedure designed to demonstrate com-
pliance with contractual requirements. This Acceptance test procedure will take place after
the commissioning procedure but before final acceptance, to verify that sensors and control
devices maintain specified accuracy's and the system performance does not degrade over
time.
E. Using the commissioning test data sheets, the contractor shall demonstrate each point. The
contractor shall also demonstrate all system functions. The contractor shall demonstrate all
points and system functions until all devices and functions meet specification.
F. The contractor shall supply all instruments for testing and turn over same to the owner after
acceptance testing.
Humidity: 2% RH
G. After the above tests are complete and the system is demonstrated to be functioning as speci-
fied, a thirty day performance test period shall begin. If the system performs as specified
throughout the test period, requiring only routine maintenance, the system shall be accepted. If
the system fails during the test, and cannot be fully corrected within eight hours, the owner may
request that performance tests be repeated.
3.7 TRAINING
A. The manufacturer shall provide factory trained instructor to give full instruction to desig-
nated personnel in the operation of the system installed. Instructors shall be thoroughly
familiar with all aspects of the subject matter they are to teach. The manufacturer shall
provide all students with a student binder containing product specific training modules
for the system installed. All training shall be held during normal working hours of 8:00
am to 4:30 PM weekdays.
B. Provide 80 hours of training for Owner's designated operating personnel. Training shall
include:
D. Since the Owner may require personnel to have more comprehensive understanding of
the hardware and software, additional training must be available from the Manufacturer.
If such training is required by the Owner, it will be contracted at a later date.
SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes control sequences for HVAC systems, subsystems, and equipment.
1. Division 15 Section "HVAC Instrumentation and Controls" for control equipment and
devices and for submittal requirements.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
The constant volume air handling unit consists of a mixed air section with outdoor air and return
air dampers, pre-filter, hot water heating coil, chilled water cooling coil, reheat coil (AHU-1 only)
and supply fan. The unit is DDC controlled using electric actuation.
The air handling unit is scheduled for automatic operation on a time of day basis for Occupied
and Unoccupied modes. Within the Occupied mode, the system can enter the Warm-Up mode
when the space temperature is below setpoint or the Cool-Down mode when the space tempera-
ture is above set point. The system stays in the Warm-Up or Cool-Down mode until the mode
setpoint is satisfied. Within the Unoccupied mode, Night Heating is available when the space
temperature drops below 65 degrees F (18 degrees C). The latest start time is the scheduled oc-
cupancy for the space.
The air handling unit operates in Warm-Up, Cool-Down, Occupied, Unoccupied, Night Heating
and Safety modes as follows (All suggested setpoints and settings are adjustable.):
Cool-Down:
The supply fan starts and the heating coil valve remains closed. The cooling coil valve and the
mixing dampers modulate to maintain the supply air temperature setpoint. When the outside air
enthalpy is above the economizer changeover value, the mixing dampers are positioned for 100%
return air. If time reaches the latest start time during the Cool-Down mode, the outdoor air dam-
per opens to its minimum position or is controlled in economizer operation. The system is pre-
vented from entering the Cool-Down mode more than once per day. Return air enthalpy shall be
compared with a global outside enthalpy sensor.
Occupied:
The supply air temperature setpoint is reset based on the room temperature setpoint or discharge
temperature sensor.
The fans starts or continues to run and the unit is controlled as follows:
When the outside air enthalpy is below the economizer changeover value, the heating coil valve,
cooling coil valve and mixed air dampers modulate in sequence without overlap to maintain the
supply air temperature setpoint with a low limit of 48 degrees F (9 degrees C) at the mixed air
sensor. The mixing dampers ramp open slowly to minimize overshooting.
When the outside air enthalpy is above the economizer changeover value, the mixing dampers are
placed in the minimum outdoor air position. The heating coil valve and cooling coil valve mod-
ulate in sequence without overlap to maintain the supply air temperature setpoint.
Night Heating:
The supply fan starts with the heating coil valve open to maintain a minimum space temperature
of 65 degrees F (18 degrees C). The cooling coil valve is closed and the mixing dampers close to
the outdoor air.
Safety:
Smoke detectors in the supply and return air streams de-energize the supply fan upon activation.
When the OAT is less than 45 degrees F (7 degrees C), the heating coil valve modulates to main-
tain the mixed air temperature at 45 degrees F (7 degrees C). When the OAT is 45 degrees F (7
degrees C) or above, the heating coil valve closes. All other dampers and valves position to their
normal position after the fan is de-energized.
A current switch is installed in the supply fan starter. The DDC system uses this switch to con-
firm the fan is in the desired state (i.e. on or off) and generates an alarm if status deviates from
DDC start/stop control. High static sensor shall shut-down unit and alarm at BAS.
Humidity Control (AHU-1 only): Space humidistat shall cycle cooling and reheat to maintain
space humidity setpoint of 65% adj. minimum.
Demand Control Ventilation (AHU-1 only): Outside air ventilation shall be controlled via CO 2
sensors. Outside air shall not be controlled below 40% of scheduled CFM.
The space served by the exhaust fan is controlled in Occupied and Unoccupied modes as follows:
Occupied:
The DDC system opens the exhaust damper, if applicable, and turns on the exhaust fan.
Unoccupied:
The exhaust fan is off, and dampers return to normal position.
The DDC system uses a current switch to monitor the exhaust fan status.
The DDC system monitors the room temperature sensor. The system opens the outdoor air and
exhaust dampers and cycles the exhaust/supply fan to maintain the space temperature at setpoint.
H.
A wall or unit mounted electric thermostat opens a 2-way heating valve and cycles the unit heater
fan to maintain the space temperature at setpoint. A strap-on aquastat prevents the unit heater fan
from operating if hot water is not available.
K. Elevator Machine Room (Air Conditioned): A room sensor shall energize A/C unit in stages to
maintain setpoint 80 deg. F (adj.).
2. Unit fan shall run continuously during heating and cooling modes of operations.
All mechanical equipment serving elevator equipment rooms on emergency power must be con-
nected to emergency power.
This section covers the operation of the chiller plant equipment CH-1 and cooling
towers. Operation of CT-1, is determined by the time of day and by outside air tem-
perature. During occupied mode, if outside air temperature is greater than 50 deg F as
sensed by outside air temperature sensor, then the chiller plant will be activated “ON”,
and all chiller staging, as defined below, shall be initiated. Chiller plant “ON/OFF”
point may be overridden by the operator to turn the chiller plant on or off, if desired.
EMCS shall provide a virtual point to determine whether CH-1 or CH-2 is the lead
chiller in the Chiller Plant Staging Sequence, see below. This point may be com-
manded by the operator during the unoccupied mode, so that the chillers will be al-
ternated during the next start up routine. If chiller CH-1 is to be started, then CWP-1
(condenser pump) and CHP-1 (chilled water pump) will start. If chiller CH-2 is to be
started, then CWP-3(condenser pump) and CHP-3 (chilled water pump) will start.
CWP-2 (condenser pump) and CHP-2 (chilled water pump) are back-up pumps
which will be manually brought into service as needed. The start-up will occur using
the following sequence:
d. BAS shall wait for confirmation from the chiller that is ready for condenser
water flow. This is done via pair of dry contacts from the chiller control pan-
el to the BAS Panel. When BAS receives confirmation, it shall start con-
denser water pump.
a. BAS shall first disable the chiller and then de-energize the chilled water
pump(s) simultaneously.
b. Prior to de-energizing the condenser water pumps, the BAS will le the con-
denser water pump(s) run for two minutes.
When chiller CH-1 is in operation, then all isolation valves will be open, and the
BAS will control the fan VFD’s to maintain the condenser water temperature set-
point.
Free Cooling Mode HX-1: When the outside air temperature falls below 45 degrees
F bulb, the free cooling mode is initiated. During Free cooling, the chillers are de-
energized, valves V-1 and V-2 shall be opened, valves V-3 and V-4 shall be closed
and the condenser water shall flow through the heat exchanger. The cooling tower
fans shall cycle to maintain a condenser water supply temperature of 42 degrees F
dry bulb.
When the chilled water supply temperature exceeds 50 degrees F for a least five mi-
nutes (adjustable) the system shall be indexed for the mechanical cooling mode.
During the mechanical mode, valves V-1 and V-2 shall close, V-3 and/or V-4 shall
open, the chiller sequencing mode shall be energized and the lead chiller differential
pressure sensors shall modulate the by-pass valve V-5 and cycle the tower fans to
maintain the chiller differential pressure setting. The chillers shall maintain the pri-
mary chilled water supply temperature (adjustable) through the chiller sequencing
program. Whenever a chiller is indexed to start, its respective isolation valve shall
open.
b. The secondary chilled water loop shall be equipped with a remote differential
pressure sensor. DPTE-1. This sensor shall monitor remote differential pres-
sure across the secondary chilled water systems supply and return water pip-
ing.
c. BAS will vary the speed of the chilled water pump to maintain remote diffe-
rential pressure setpoint (20 psi, adjustable) as sensed by remote differential
pressure sensor. The rate of flow change should be a maximum of 10% of
the change per minute or as recommended by chiller manufacturer. Do not
reduce the flow lower than the chiller manufacturer recommended minimum
flows.
M. Centrifugal Chiller:
1. General: The stand alone microprocessor based chiller control panel shall monitor
and control the chiller(s) in a stand alone mode or as directed by the chiller sequencing
software.
The chiller sequencing software shall perform the following control strategies, provide
the points listed on the chiller point list and support their specified monitoring and di-
agnostics.
2. System Scheduling: The chiller sequencing software will start the chiller system based
upon an 8 day (7 + Holiday) time of day schedule.
An override input will allow an external device to lock out chiller system operation.
3. Chiller Sequencing: The EMCS software will start and stop system water pumps and
chillers based upon the loading of the operating chillers, occupied/unoccupied operation
shall be incorporated.
a. When the chilled system is enabled the EMCS system control will:
ii. Upon sensing a chiller failure the EMCS software shall lockout that
chiller and pump.
8. Individual Chiller Status Display: The chiller sequencing software shall provide an oper-
ating status report for each chiller. This display shall include:
9. Diagnostics/Protection: The EMCS software shall be able to alarm from all sensed points
and diagnostic alarms sensed by the chiller controller.
10. When interfaced with a Energy Management System (EMS) the following features shall
be provided at the Central Building Control Station.
a. A refrigeration monitor shall provide an analog output (0-10 VDC or 4-20 mA)
that corresponds to the level of refrigerant detected by the monitor. This signal
shall be used to generate an electronic log of the refrigerant level in the Mechani-
cal Equipment Room. An increase in detected refrigerant levels shall trigger a di-
agnostic alarm indicating a refrigerant leak and the system should be checked.
b. The EMS shall monitor the following alarms:
a. Monitor malfunction
b. Refrigerant alarm triggered at the Acceptable Exposure
Limit (AEL) for the refrigerant in use.
c. The EMS shall be tied to the Mechanical Equipment Room ventilation system to
provide control of both normal and purge ventilation of the Mechanical Equip-
ment Room. This control shall be in parallel to the primary control of the ventila-
tion fans by the refrigerant monitor.
d. The building automation system shall monitor the following points as outlined in
ASHRAE Guideline 3-1990 and automatically make a daily log.
11. Condenser Water Limiting: The EMS will provide a two step signal to the tower control-
ler based on evaporator – condenser refrigerant temperature difference to call for warmer
condenser.
N. Refrigerant Detection Control: EMS will monitor the alarm contacts on the Refrigerant Monitor-
ing Alarm Panel through the digital input point. When a refrigerant alarm is detected, EMS shall
energize penthouse supply and exhaust fans. EMS will simultaneously alarm the OWS.
a. Alarm horns and lights located at the chiller plant room doors shall be energized automat-
ically. Alarm panel light and horn shall return to normal operation when acknowledged at
the control panel.
b. The refrigeration plant shall comply with ASHRAE 15-1994. Contractor shall provide all
devices necessary to comply.
O. Where required, all control dampers to open prior to equipment operation. Provide damper end
switches per sequences and points list. All supply and return dampers shall fail open, and all out-
door air and relief dampers shall fail closed.
Q. Kitchen Exhaust Fan and Dishwasher Exhaust Fan: Fans shall be started and stopped by hood sys-
tem control package. The BAS shall provide points to monitor the status of the exhaust fans via
current sensing relays and record the run time of the fan which can be checked at any time.
The heating water system consists of two hot water boilers with dedicated heating water
pumps for AHU’s and FCU’s. The system is DDC controlled.
The system operates with a factory boiler control system interfaced with the BAS system.
1. When multiple condensing boilers are to be installed in a common hydronic loop, a sequenc-
ing control system shall be provided to stage and control firing rate of the boilers. To ensure
proper integration with the Pulse boiler controls, the boiler manufacturer shall supply a Mod-
Sync Sequencing Control System as designed by Fulton Heating Solutions, Inc. The Pulse
boilers shall be sequenced as follows to maximize their operating efficiency:
a. The ModSync Sequencing Control System shall monitor the outdoor temperature and
calculate a water loop temperature setpoint based on the selectable preset values. The
ModSync Sequencing System will begin sequencing the condensing boilers based on the
difference between the actual water loop temperature and the calculated (outdoor air) wa-
ter temperature.
b. When a requirement for heat is determined by the ModSync, the Lead Boiler is energized
and its firing rate is maintained at low fire.
c. If the water loop temperature continues to decrease, the ModSync will enable a Lag Boi-
ler. The first Lag Boiler is energized and the lag boiler’s firing rate is maintained at low
fire.
d. If additional heat is required, the ModSync will enable each additional Lag Boiler stage
until all of the available condensing boilers in the water loop have been energized. Each
boiler stage will remain at low fire until all of the stages have been enabled.
e. If all of the condensing boilers are enabled and additional heat is required, the ModSync
will release the boilers to modulate. The condensing boilers will modulate together as a
single unit to keep the condensing boiler system at the lowest possible firing rate.
f. As the water loop temperature increases, the ModSync will decrease the firing rate of the
condensing boilers to maintain the water loop temperature. If all of the condensing boi-
lers are at low fire and the water loop temperature continues to rise, the BMS will begin
to stage the boilers off. The first lag boiler energized will be the first boiler to be dis-
g. The Lead Boiler is disabled when the water loop temperature reaches a selectable value
referenced around the water loop setpoint.
3. The ModSync will have the ability to communicate to a Building Management System using
Modbus RTU (RS-485) or accept a 4-20mA Remote Setpoint signal. BacNet and LonWorks
protocols can be used through a gateway, if requested.
4. The ModSync Sequencing Control shall include automatic rotation of the lead boiler based on
a user configured cycle count. Manual selection of the Lead boiler will also be available
through a Setup Menu.
5. Outdoor and Loop Header Temperature sensors supplied with the ModSync shall be PT100
RTD type.
6. The ModSync Sequencing Control will provide an adjustable reset schedule based on the
outdoor temperature. A linear outdoor reset ratio will be determined based on user defined
hydronic loop temperatures at 50ºF and 0ºF outdoor temperatures. A reference graphic will
be displayed on the ModSync representing the reset loop temperature vs outdoor temperature
calculated ratio. A user defined Outdoor Temp Disable parameter will be provided to turn off
all Pulse boilers if a predetermined outdoor temperature is reached. Minimum and Maximum
Loop Temperature parameters will be provided for both Occupied and Unoccupied modes.
This will prevent the outdoor reset schedule from operating outside of a user defined tem-
perature range.
7. Provisions will be provided that monitor the Pulse Boiler’s outlet temperature and adjusts the
firing rate if the boiler’s outlet temperature exceeds a user defined value above the loop set-
point. This is beneficial for variable flow loops to prevent high temperature limit alarms.
8. Multiple setback schedules shall be available based on whether the building is in Occupied or
Unoccupied mode. Building Mode selection shall be determined by a user defined Time of
Day / Day of Week Touchscreen entry. The Building Mode will automatically change be-
tween Occupied and Unoccupied based on the user programmed day and times. Manual
9. The ModSync Sequencing Control will provide alarm annunciation of each Pulse Boiler con-
nected to the network. The ModSync will automatically adjust the Pulse boiler sequencing
schedule and remove the boiler from the sequencing logic if an alarm occurs. The Pulse boi-
ler will automatically be added back into the rotation loop as soon as the ModSync senses
that the alarm has been cleared.
10. The ModSync will stage the Pulse boilers based on a PID generated value. The Proportional,
Integral and Derivative values shall be user defined through the Lead/Lag Configuration
Screen. Each Pulse boiler stage will be enabled based on a user defined “Percentage from
Setpoint” control variable. Properly tuned loops will provide temperature control accuracy
up to +/- 2ºF. Pulse Boiler Sequencing Start and Stop parameters shall be user defined
through the operator interface. A Manual Reset parameter will be provided to allow the Pro-
portional Band to be shifted around setpoint.
11. The ModSync shall provide capabilities to Enable/Disable the Pulse boilers through the oper-
ator interface. Boilers that are disabled will not be included in the sequencing logic.
12. A user defined time delay parameter will be provided that delays enabling of the next Pulse
boiler stage. This helps to decrease cycling of the Pulse Boilers when the heat load is close to
being met.
13. Provisions for Domestic Hot Water Priority shall be available if required. Domestic Hot Wa-
ter priority will override the outdoor temperature reset schedule when required.
14. The ModSync will provide the capability control System Pumps if requested. System Pump
configuration can either be accomplished through main loop pumps or dedicated pumps at
each boiler. The ModSync will provide a user defined time delay to keep the pump energized
for a certain time after the Pulse boilers have been turned off.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1.3 DEFINITIONS
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. LEED Submittal:
D. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit TAB
strategies and step-by-step procedures as specified in "Preparation" Article.
1. TAB Field Supervisor: Employee of the TAB contractor and certified by AABC.
2. TAB Technician: Employee of the TAB contractor and who is certified by AABC as a
TAB technician.
B. TAB Conference: Meet with Owner and Commissioning Authority on approval of the TAB
strategies and procedures plan to develop a mutual understanding of the details. Require the
participation of the TAB field supervisor and technicians. Provide seven days' advance notice
of scheduled meeting time and location.
1. Agenda Items:
1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified TAB
reports.
2. Certify that the TAB team complied with the approved TAB plan and the procedures
specified and referenced in this Specification.
A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy the site and existing building during entire TAB
period. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner's
operations.
B. Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner may occupy completed areas of building before Substantial
Completion. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner's
operations.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Notice: Provide seven days' advance notice for each test. Include scheduled test dates and
times.
B. Perform TAB after leakage and pressure tests on air and water distribution systems have been
satisfactorily completed.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover
conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment.
B. Examine systems for installed balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer
wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers. Verify
that locations of these balancing devices are accessible.
D. Examine design data including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design assumptions
for environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of philosophies and
assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls.
E. Examine ceiling plenums and underfloor air plenums used for supply, return, or relief air to
verify that they meet the leakage class of connected ducts as specified in Division 15 Section
1. Relate performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects
that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or
part of a system.
2. Calculate system-effect factors to reduce performance ratings of HVAC equipment when
installed under conditions different from the conditions used to rate equipment
performance. To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in
AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems - Duct Design."
Compare results with the design data and installed conditions.
G. Examine system and equipment installations and verify that field quality-control testing,
cleaning, and adjusting specified in individual Sections have been performed.
I. Examine HVAC equipment and filters and verify that bearings are greased, belts are aligned
and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation.
J. Examine terminal units, such as variable-air-volume boxes, and verify that they are accessible
and their controls are connected and functioning.
K. Examine strainers. Verify that startup screens are replaced by permanent screens with indicated
perforations.
L. Examine three-way valves for proper installation for their intended function of diverting or
mixing fluid flows.
M. Examine heat-transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins.
N. Examine system pumps to ensure absence of entrained air in the suction piping.
P. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe
and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from
indicated values.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained
in AABC's "National Standards for Total System Balance" and in this Section.
B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the
minimum extent necessary for TAB procedures.
1. After testing and balancing, patch probe holes in ducts with same material and thickness
as used to construct ducts.
2. After testing and balancing, install test ports and duct access doors that comply with
requirements in Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories."
3. Install and join new insulation that matches removed materials. Restore insulation,
coverings, vapor barrier, and finish according to Division 15 Section "HVAC Insulation."
C. Mark equipment and balancing devices, including damper-control positions, valve position
indicators, fan-speed-control levers, and similar controls and devices, with paint or other
suitable, permanent identification material to show final settings.
D. Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch-pound (IP) units.
A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and
recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes with
required fan volumes.
D. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct-airflow measurements.
E. Check airflow patterns from the outdoor-air louvers and dampers and the return- and exhaust-air
dampers through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers.
F. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.
L. Verify that air duct system is sealed as specified in Division 15 Section "Metal Ducts."
A. Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed listed by
fan manufacturer.
a. Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as practical and
upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions.
b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection.
c. Measure inlet static pressure of single-inlet fans in the inlet duct as near the fan as
possible, upstream from the flexible connection, and downstream from duct
restrictions.
d. Measure inlet static pressure of double-inlet fans through the wall of the plenum
that houses the fan.
3. Measure static pressure across each component that makes up an air-handling unit,
rooftop unit, and other air-handling and -treating equipment.
a. Report the cleanliness status of filters and the time static pressures are measured.
4. Measure static pressures entering and leaving other devices, such as sound traps, heat-
recovery equipment, and air washers, under final balanced conditions.
5. Review Record Documents to determine variations in design static pressures versus
actual static pressures. Calculate actual system-effect factors. Recommend adjustments
to accommodate actual conditions.
6. Obtain approval from Owner and Commissioning Authority for adjustment of fan speed
higher or lower than indicated speed. Comply with requirements in Division 15 Sections
for air-handling units for adjustment of fans, belts, and pulley sizes to achieve indicated
air-handling-unit performance.
B. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to indicated
airflows within specified tolerances.
a. Where sufficient space in submain and branch ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube
traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate
the total airflow for that zone.
2. Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper, and adjust
volume dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved.
3. Remeasure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted. Continue to
adjust submain and branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances.
D. Adjust air outlets and inlets for each space to indicated airflows within specified tolerances of
indicated values. Make adjustments using branch volume dampers rather than extractors and
the dampers at air terminals.
1. Adjust each outlet in same room or space to within specified tolerances of indicated
quantities without generating noise levels above the limitations prescribed by the
Contract Documents.
2. Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts.
A. Prepare test reports with pertinent design data, and number in sequence starting at pump to end
of system. Check the sum of branch-circuit flows against the approved pump flow rate. Correct
variations that exceed plus or minus 5 percent.
C. Prepare hydronic systems for testing and balancing according to the following, in addition to the
general preparation procedures specified above:
A. Measure water flow at pumps. Use the following procedures except for positive-displacement
pumps:
1. Verify impeller size by operating the pump with the discharge valve closed. Read
pressure differential across the pump. Convert pressure to head and correct for
differences in gage heights. Note the point on manufacturer's pump curve at zero flow
and verify that the pump has the intended impeller size.
2. Check system resistance. With all valves open, read pressure differential across the
pump and mark pump manufacturer's head-capacity curve. Adjust pump discharge valve
until indicated water flow is achieved.
3. Verify pump-motor brake horsepower. Calculate the intended brake horsepower for the
system based on pump manufacturer's performance data. Compare calculated brake
horsepower with nameplate data on the pump motor. Report conditions where actual
amperage exceeds motor nameplate amperage.
4. Report flow rates that are not within plus or minus 10 percent of design.
B. Measure flow at all automatic flow control valves to verify that valves are functioning as
designed.
C. Measure flow at all pressure-independent characterized control valves, with valves in fully open
position, to verify that valves are functioning as designed.
E. Measure flow at all stations and adjust, where necessary, to obtain first balance.
G. Adjust balancing stations to within specified tolerances of indicated flow rate as follows:
1. Determine the balancing station with the highest percentage over indicated flow.
2. Adjust each station in turn, beginning with the station with the highest percentage over
indicated flow and proceeding to the station with the lowest percentage over indicated
flow.
3. Record settings and mark balancing devices.
H. Measure pump flow rate and make final measurements of pump amperage, voltage, rpm, pump
heads, and systems' pressures and temperatures including outdoor-air temperature.
A. Balance systems with automatic two- and three-way control valves by setting systems at
maximum flow through heat-exchange terminals and proceed as specified above for hydronic
systems.
E. Check settings and operation of safety and relief valves. Record settings.
A. Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data:
A. Balance water flow through each evaporator and condenser to within specified tolerances of
indicated flow with all pumps operating. With only one chiller operating in a multiple chiller
installation, do not exceed the flow for the maximum tube velocity recommended by the chiller
manufacturer. Measure and record the following data with each chiller operating at design
conditions:
1. Evaporator-water entering and leaving temperatures, pressure drop, and water flow.
2. For water-cooled chillers, condenser-water entering and leaving temperatures, pressure
drop, and water flow.
3. Evaporator and condenser refrigerant temperatures and pressures, using instruments
furnished by chiller manufacturer.
4. Power factor if factory-installed instrumentation is furnished for measuring kilowatts.
5. Kilowatt input if factory-installed instrumentation is furnished for measuring kilowatts.
6. Capacity: Calculate in tons of cooling.
7. For air-cooled chillers, verify condenser-fan rotation and record fan and motor data
including number of fans and entering- and leaving-air temperatures.
A. Shut off makeup water for the duration of the test, and verify that makeup and blowdown
systems are fully operational after tests and before leaving the equipment. Perform the
following tests and record the results:
A. Hydronic Boilers: Measure and record entering- and leaving-water temperatures and water
flow.
A. Measure, adjust, and record the following data for each water coil:
B. Measure, adjust, and record the following data for each refrigerant coil:
3.16 TOLERANCES
A. Set HVAC system's air flow rates and water flow rates within the following tolerances:
1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus or minus 10 percent.
2. Air Outlets and Inlets: Plus or minus 10 percent.
3. Heating-Water Flow Rate: Plus or minus 10 percent.
4. Cooling-Water Flow Rate: Plus or minus 10 percent.
3.17 REPORTING
A. General: Prepare a certified written report; tabulate and divide the report into separate sections
for tested systems and balanced systems.
1. Include a certification sheet at the front of the report's binder, signed and sealed by the
certified testing and balancing engineer.
2. Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration.
B. Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field-report data, include the following:
1. Pump curves.
2. Fan curves.
3. Manufacturers' test data.
4. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers.
5. Other information relative to equipment performance; do not include Shop Drawings and
product data.
C. General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data:
1. Title page.
2. Name and address of the TAB contractor.
3. Project name.
4. Project location.
5. Architect's name and address.
6. Engineer's name and address.
7. Contractor's name and address.
8. Report date.
9. Signature of TAB supervisor who certifies the report.
10. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report.
Number each page in the report.
11. Summary of contents including the following:
D. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems. Present
each system with single-line diagram and include the following:
E. Air-Handling-Unit Test Reports: For air-handling units with coils, include the following:
1. Unit Data:
a. Unit identification.
b. Location.
c. Make and type.
d. Model number and unit size.
e. Manufacturer's serial number.
f. Unit arrangement and class.
g. Discharge arrangement.
h. Sheave make, size in inches (mm), and bore.
i. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches (mm).
j. Number, make, and size of belts.
k. Number, type, and size of filters.
2. Motor Data:
1. Coil Data:
a. System identification.
b. Location.
c. Coil type.
d. Number of rows.
e. Fin spacing in fins per inch (mm) o.c.
f. Make and model number.
g. Face area in sq. ft. (sq. m).
h. Tube size in NPS (DN).
i. Tube and fin materials.
j. Circuiting arrangement.
G. Gas- and Oil-Fired Heat Apparatus Test Reports: In addition to manufacturer's factory startup
equipment reports, include the following:
1. Unit Data:
a. System identification.
b. Location.
c. Make and type.
d. Model number and unit size.
e. Manufacturer's serial number.
f. Fuel type in input data.
g. Output capacity in Btu/h (kW).
h. Ignition type.
H. Fan Test Reports: For supply, return, and exhaust fans, include the following:
1. Fan Data:
a. System identification.
b. Location.
c. Make and type.
d. Model number and size.
e. Manufacturer's serial number.
f. Arrangement and class.
g. Sheave make, size in inches (mm), and bore.
h. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches (mm).
2. Motor Data:
I. Round, Flat-Oval, and Rectangular Duct Traverse Reports: Include a diagram with a grid
representing the duct cross-section and record the following:
1. Report Data:
J. System-Coil Reports: For reheat coils and water coils of terminal units, include the following:
1. Unit Data:
K. Pump Test Reports: Calculate impeller size by plotting the shutoff head on pump curves and
include the following:
1. Unit Data:
a. Unit identification.
b. Location.
c. Service.
1. Report Data:
3.19 INSPECTIONS
A. Initial Inspection:
1. After testing and balancing are complete, operate each system and randomly check
measurements to verify that the system is operating according to the final test and balance
readings documented in the final report.
2. Check the following for each system:
B. Final Inspection:
1. After initial inspection is complete and documentation by random checks verifies that
testing and balancing are complete and accurately documented in the final report, request
that a final inspection be made by Owner.
2. The TAB contractor's test and balance engineer shall conduct the inspection in the
presence of Owner.
3. Owner shall randomly select measurements, documented in the final report, to be
rechecked. Rechecking shall be limited to either 10 percent of the total measurements
recorded or the extent of measurements that can be accomplished in a normal 8-hour
business day.
4. If rechecks yield measurements that differ from the measurements documented in the
final report by more than the tolerances allowed, the measurements shall be noted as
"FAILED."
5. If the number of "FAILED" measurements is greater than 10 percent of the total
measurements checked during the final inspection, the testing and balancing shall be
considered incomplete and shall be rejected.
C. TAB Work will be considered defective if it does not pass final inspections. If TAB Work fails,
proceed as follows:
1. Recheck all measurements and make adjustments. Revise the final report and balancing
device settings to include all changes; resubmit the final report and request a second final
inspection.
2. If the second final inspection also fails, Owner may contract the services of another TAB
contractor to complete TAB Work according to the Contract Documents and deduct the
cost of the services from the original TAB contractor's final payment.
A. Within 90 days of completing TAB, perform additional TAB to verify that balanced conditions
are being maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions.
B. Seasonal Periods: If initial TAB procedures were not performed during near-peak summer and
winter conditions, perform additional TAB during near-peak summer and winter conditions.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
C. Commissioning requires the participation of Division 15 to ensure that all systems are
operating in a manner consistent with the Contract Documents. The general commissioning
requirements and coordination are detailed in Division 1. Division 15 shall be familiar with
all parts of Division 01 and shall execute all commissioning responsibilities assigned to them
in the Contract Documents.
D. With respect to HVAC commissioning, the Mechanical and Electrical contractors shall:
Include cost for HVAC commissioning requirements, as it pertains to this and other Cx sections and the
Preliminary Cx Plan posted in Div.1, in the quoted price.
Attend commissioning meetings scheduled by the CxA.
Schedule work so that required installations are completed, and systems verification checks and
functional performance tests can be carried out on schedule.
Inspect, check and confirm in writing the proper installation and performance of all mechanical and
electrical systems provided.
Provide mechanical and electrical system technicians to assist during system verification and functional
performance testing as required by the CxA.
Review specification Division 1 and 16 to fully understand their responsibilities as they pertain to the
commissioning processes.
1.02 RESPONSIBILITIES
Warranty Period
1. Correct deficiencies and make necessary adjustments to O&M manuals and as-
built drawings for applicable issues identified in any seasonal testing.
B. Mechanical Contractor and TAB. The responsibilities of the HVAC mechanical and
TAB contractors, during construction and acceptance phases in addition to those listed in
(A) are:
1. Provide start-up for all HVAC equipment, and for the building automation
control system.
2. Assist and cooperate with the TAB contractor and CxA by:
a. Putting all HVAC equipment and systems into operation and continuing
the operation during each working day of TAB and commissioning, as
required.
b. Including cost of sheaves and belts that may be required by TAB.
3 Prepare a preliminary schedule for Division 15 pipe and duct system testing,
flushing and cleaning, equipment start-up and TAB start and completion for use
by the CxA. Update the schedule as appropriate.
4. Notify the CM/GC when pipe and duct system testing, flushing, cleaning, start-
up of each piece of equipment and TAB will occur. Be responsible to notify the
CM/GC ahead of time, when commissioning activities not yet performed or not
yet scheduled will delay construction. Be proactive in seeing that
commissioning processes are executed and that the CxA has the scheduling
information needed to efficiently execute the commissioning process.
C.TAB Contractor. The duties of the TAB contractor, in addition to those listed in (A) are:
1. Submit the outline of the TAB plan and approach for each system and
component to the CxA, CM/GC and the Controls Contractor six weeks prior to
starting the TAB. This plan will be developed after the TAB has some
familiarity with the control system.
2. The submitted plan will include:
a. Certification that the TAB contractor has reviewed the construction
documents and the systems with the design engineers and contractors to
sufficiently understand the design intent for each system.
b. An explanation of the intended use of the building control system. The
Controls Contractor will comment on feasibility of the plan.
c. Discussion of what notations and markings will be made on the duct
drawings during the process.
d. Final test report forms to be used.
e. Detailed step-by-step procedures for TAB work for each system and
issue: terminal flow calibration (for each terminal type), diffuser
3. A running log of events and issues shall be kept by the TAB field technicians.
Submit hand-written reports of discrepancies, deficient or uncompleted work by
others, contract interpretation requests and lists of completed tests to the CxA
and CM/GC at least weekly.
4. Communicate in writing to the Controls Contractor all setpoint and parameter
changes made or problems and discrepancies identified during TAB which affect
the control system setup and operation.
5. Provide a draft TAB report within two weeks of completion. A copy will be
provided to the CxA. The report will contain a full explanation of the
methodology, assumptions and the results in a clear format with designations of
all uncommon abbreviations and column headings. The report should follow the
latest and most rigorous reporting recommendations by AABC, ASHRAE
Standard 111.
6. Provide the CxA with any requested data, gathered, but not shown on the draft
reports.
7. Provide a final TAB report for the CxA with details, as in the draft.
8. Conduct functional performance tests and checks on the original TAB as
specified for TAB in Division 1 and 15.
All ATC/BAS graphics and sequences are to be demonstrated to the CxA prior to functional
testing.
A. Refer to Division 1 for a listing of all sections where commissioning requirements are
found.
B. Refer to Division 1 for sections involving related commissioning work; for functional
testing requirements, and preliminary Cx Plan.
A. The following systems and equipment (including all integral equipment controls) will be
commissioned in this project. All general references to equipment in this document refer
only to equipment that is to be commissioned.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Division 15 shall provide all test equipment necessary to fulfill the testing requirements
of this Division.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 SUBMITTALS
3.02 START-UP
A. The HVAC mechanical Contractor shall follow the start-up and initial checkout
procedures listed in the Responsibilities list in this Division 1. Division 15 has start-up
responsibility and is required to complete systems and sub-systems so they are fully
3.03 TAB
A. Refer to this section and the Cx Plan for a list of systems to be commissioned.
B. The CxA shall create the functional performance procedures and guideline after review
and comment of the equipment startup documents supplied by the contractor.
C. The CxA is to witness and document the functional performance testing. All hands on
testing and equipment required by the CxA is to be supplied and performed by the
contractor. The contractor’s fees are to be included in their base bid.
D. If more than one return visit is required by the CxA due to failed systems, the contractor
is responsible for the CxA team hourly rate and expenses.
3.06
A. Special TAB Documentation Requirements. The TAB will compile and submit the
following with other documentation that may be specified elsewhere in the
Specifications.
B. Review and Approvals. Review of the commissioning related sections of the O&M
manuals shall be made by the A/E and by the CxA. Refer to Division 1 for details.
A. The CM/GC shall be responsible for training coordination and scheduling and ultimately
to ensure that training is completed.
1. After completion of TAB, TAB shall meet with facility staff for the number of
hours specified in the contract documents, and shall instruct them on the
following:
a) Go over the final TAB report, explaining the layout and meanings of
each data type.
b) Discuss any outstanding deficient items in control, ducting or design that
may affect the proper delivery of air.
c) Identify and discuss any duct runs, diffusers, coils, fans and pumps that
are close to or are not meeting their design capacity.
d) Discuss any temporary settings and steps to finalize them for any areas
that are not finished.
e) Other salient information that may be useful for facility operations,
relative to TAB.
A. Written work products of Contractors will consist of the start-up and initial checkout
plan described in Section 01810 and the executed start-up, initial checkout and
prefunctional checklists.